Home

WBK Options User`s Manual

1.
2. Be a SS D N 7 S E T ERER RREH JERE EEN 8 10 1 rr rT a may oe of T Tr rr LT An 7 br dbi 18 Possible Address Settings for a DBK84 Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 13 Software Setup You will need to use the Dag Configuration control panel applet to add the WBK40 or WBK41 device to the parent first level device i e a WaveBook S16E or a WBK25 module Refer to the WBK40 amp WBK41 Installation Guide p n 1066 0901 For convenience a copy has been placed after the specifications section of this document As this document goes to print there is no out of the box software support for WBK40 and WBK41 systems At this early stage of the product cycle users must create their own custom programs using API commands These are covered in the Programmer s Manual p n 1008 0901 Refer to the ProgrammersManual pdf regarding API The document is included on the Data Acquisition CD and can be accessed via the lt View PDF gt button that appears on the CD s opening screen Operational Aspects Block Diagrams Removable Screw Terminals WBK41 Front Panel Mini T C Input Amplifier _ __connector ____and Filter _ 1 CH 1 l i I 16 Bit 200 KHz A D Converter a J 14 Channels per WBK41 Module MUX Parallel Cold Junction Communications Sensor SYNC SYNC Synchronization To From a WaveBook 516E P1 DB37 C Connects to an Optional DBK84 14 Chann
3. JP4 Configurations for Serial Port Selection JPS In reference to the following figure the top four jumper positions on JP5 select the serial port IRQ level IRQ4 is the default setting The bottom two jumper rows select the parallel port IRQ level IRQ7 is the default parallel port setting Note that COM and LPT ports cannot both be configured for IRQ5 at the same time _ 3 b b IRQ2 IRQ2 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ3 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ4 IRQ4 5 IRQ5 IRQ5 IRQ5 IRQ7 IRQ7 IRQ7 JP5 JP5 JP5 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQS JP5 Configurations for Serial Port IRQ Level JP5 Configurations for Parallel Port IR Level After WBK21 is properly configured power off your computer and install WBK21 into an available 16 bit ISA bus Consult your PC user s manual as needed After WBK21 has been physically installed power up your PC WBK21 Specifications Name Function WBK21 ISA EPP Interface Plug in Board Bus Interface 16 bit ISA bus interface Transfer Rate gt 2 5 Mbytes s LPT Address 378 or 278 LPT Interrupts 5 or 7 Connector DB25F Serial Port high speed 16C550 via DBY Serial Port Address 3F8 2F8 3E8 or 2E8 Serial Port Interrupt 2 3 4 or 5 Connector DB9M WBK21 page 2 948198 WBK21 ISA EPP Plug in Board WBK23 PCI EPP Interface Plug In Board For Linking a WaveBook or DaqBook to a PC WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Your computer must be unplugged prior to installing a WBK23 Refer to the WBK23 installation instructi
4. fou can get IF settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Othenvise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically f Use the following IP address IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Obtain DNS serwer address automatically f Use the following ONS server addresses Prefered ONS server Alternate DNS server Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 6 Select the Use the following IP Address radio button 7 Set the IP address field to 10 0 0 x where x is some number from 1 to 255 Make sure that each computer on the dedicated network has a unique IP address 8 Set the Subnet mask to 255 0 0 0 Note that the remaining fields can be left unchanged If using a LAN Local Area Network which has a DHCP server skip this section and continue with STEP 7 Configure and Test the System using the Daq Configuration Applet page 12 The DagIPConfig applet designed for 32 bit Windows NT 2000 XP systems Dag IPConfig allows you to change the IP address of a device to match the address of a host computer The applet is located in the program group for the associated device and can be accessed from the Windows Desktop via the start menu 1 Locate the DaqlPConfig Applet Locate the DaqIPConfig applet by navigating from the Windows Desktop as follows DaqBook Users Start Menu gt Programs gt IOtec
5. 5 Turn ON the WBK40 or WBK41 by placing the unit s power switch to the 1 position The power led will light up 6 Turn the WaveBook 516E or WBK25 ON by placing the unit s power switch to the 1 position The power led will light up 1066 0901 rev 1 0 967896 WBK40 amp WBK41 IG 3 STEP 3 Configure and Test the Hardware The Dag Configuration applet designed for 32 bit Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP systems is located in the Windows Control Panel It allows you to add or remove a device and change configuration settings The included test utility provides feedback on the validity of current configuration settings as well as performance summaries 1 Open the Daq Configuration Applet a Open the Control Panel by navigating from the Windows Desktop as follows Start Menu gt Settings gt Control Panel b From the Control Panel double click the Daq Configuration icon 2 Add the WBK40 or WBK41 In the Daq Configuration applet add the WBK40 or WBK41 to one of the three expansion ports of the WaveBook 516E or WBK25 a Select the WaveBook 516E or WBK25 in the Device Inventory configuration tree see following figure b Click the lt Add Device gt button The Select Device Type box will appear c Select WBK40 or WBK41 from the device list as applicable d Click the lt OK gt button The Properties box for the device will appear Device Inventory
6. Gain of Bypass Mode O Oo 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 0 05 0 1 0 15 0 2 Gain dB 0 25 0 3 FIN kHz Zoom tin to Filter Cutoff Frequency Region WBK18 pg 12 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module DC Accuracy As previously mentioned the 2 pole and Bypass filter modes are most commonly used in applications where DC signal information is important The AC response of each of these modes is described above The DC accuracy excluding noise for both modes 1s Accuracy at 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Range of Reading Range Typical 0 5 1 15mV 1V 2 5V 0 15 2mV 0 15 900uV These numbers are valid for 1 year after calibration and over the entire operating temperature range of the unit Module Configuration Overrange Detection The configuration of overrange detection is done through the Module Configuration me ik Module Configuration window The Module Configuration window can be accessed from the View pull down menu or by System Inventory Module Chassis Option use of the first toolbar button located just below the File pull A cca ate WBK1 34 down menu In this window the user enables disables overrange detection on a per channel basis A checkmark next to the channel number indicates that overrange detection is enabled for that channel The overrange detection level is also set in this screen It is set as a percentage of range tha
7. Many IOtech products carry the CE marker indicating they comply with the safety and emissions standards of the European Community As applicable include Declarations of Conformity on our website The declarations state which standards and operating conditions apply Cautions Notes and Tips Refer all service to qualified personnel This caution symbol warns of possible personal injury or equipment damage under noted conditions Follow all safety standards of professional practice and the recommendations in this manual Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can present serious safety hazards or cause equipment damage This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible injury or death from electrical shock under noted conditions This ESD caution symbol urges proper handling of equipment or components sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge Proper handling guidelines include the use of grounded anti static mats and wrist straps ESD protective bags and cartons and related procedures This symbol indicates the message is important but is not of a Warning or Caution category These notes can be of great benefit to the user and should be read In this manual the book symbol always precedes the words Reference Note This type of note identifies the location of additional information that may prove helpful References may be made to other chapters or other documentation
8. The remote sensing feature of the WBK16 will compensate for voltage drop in long lead wires to provide accurate excitation levels at the terminals of full bridge and half bridge configurations If the remote sense lines are not used be sure to tie them to their respective output lines to minimize excitation noise 10 Spend your resistor dollars wisely For the widely used 3 wire quarter bridge configuration purchase the lower bridge completion resistor Ra with the best available temperature coefficient and sufficient power rating as to minimize self heating The tolerance of the resistance is not as critical but it should be 0 1 or better The internal bridge completion locations for the reference node Rgand Ry have about 50 milli ohms resistance between their midpoint connection pads and the tap to the amplifier is at the lower end of this resistance This resistance nullifies the benefit of using bridge completion resistors with better than 0 1 resistance tolerance because offset nulling will still be necessary If using shunt calibration purchase high precision shunt calibration resistors with micro strain values appropriate to your application These are the closest to standards short of a very high precision strain calibrator WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 37 WBK16 Specifications Name Function Strain Gage Module Number of Channels 8 Input Connector Standard female DB9 per channel Input Type Diff
9. Computer e Wok 0 Device Type DagBook200 260 7 a OK Cancel Properties Add Device Remove Close Adding a WBK40 or WBK41 to a WaveBook 516E or WBK25 Note Devices have default names for example WBK40 0 If desired you can change the device name IG 4 WBK40 amp WBK41 967896 Installation Guide 3 Set the Expansion Port number In our current setup the WBK40 or WBK41 is a second level device This is because it is connected to an expansion port of a first level device i e the WaveBook 516E or WBK25 4 Daq Configuration xj Whk41 Test Hardware m Device Settings Device Name Whbk41_0 For this step select the expansion port number to which the WBK40 or WBK41 is connected i e Port 1 Port 2 or Port 3 Device Type wok o Note The WBK40 or WBK41 make use of the same IP address Expansion Port Port 1 E as the WaveBook 516E or WBK25 to which they are connected For this reason no configuration of the IP address is called for in the second level device s properties box Cancel Apply Setting the Expansion Port Number 4 Test the system connections a Make sure the device has been properly installed and is Sa Daq Configuration xi powered on Wbk41 Test Hardware b Make SUFE all cables are properly and securely a a testing please make sure your device is connected to the PL connected If your computer does
10. Power AC 10 to 30 VDC Power ne S WBK16 requires an input voltage between Power 10 and 30 VDC The DC source should Adapter be filtered but not necessarily regulated Power Input The TR 40U AC power adapter is Connectors recommended for AC line applications WBK16 may be powered with the supplied AC adapter that plugs into any standard AC wall outlet or from any isolated 10 30 VDC source of at least 25 W see figure Before WBK16 Power Connections plugging unit in make sure the power switch is in the 0 OFF position If you are using an AC power adapter plug it into an AC outlet and attach the low voltage end to WBK16 s DINS jack If you are using another source of power make sure leads are connected to the proper DINS terminals as shown in the figure WBK16 Rear Panel Do not exceed the 5 amp maximum DC current limit of the POWER IN and POWER OUT DIN connectors Internal DC to DC converters provide properly isolated and regulated 15V 12V and 5V from the single 10 to 30 VDC external source Excitation power is derived from these internal converters An internal replaceable fuse rated at 4 A provides overload protection For replacement use a Littelfuse 251004 Reversed input polarity is the usual cause of a blown fuse Reference Note The WBK16 fuse Littelfuse 251004 rated at 4A is located on the board between the Power Switch and the Power In connector Reference Note For details o
11. OFF indicates half duplex which only allows one way data traffic at any given time EXPANSION PORTS 1 2 and 3 The three parallel ports are used to expand the system with up to three additional devices Each of these ports can be connected to the parallel port of a WaveBook 512A 516 516A DaqBook 2000A DaqBook 2000X WBK40 or a WBK41 via a CA 35 2 2 foot or a CA 35 12 1 foot cable 919896 WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide Operational Aspects The WBK25 provides an interface for high speed Ethernet connectivity The module contains one 10 100BaseT Ethernet port for connection to a PC s Ethernet jack or to an Ethernet network hub The WBK25 also includes three parallel ports which are designated as expansion ports Each port can be attached to a to one device such as a WaveBook 512A 516 516A DaqBook 2000A DaqBook 2000X WBK40 or a WBK41 WBK23S s three parallel ports are labeled as expansion ports 1 through 3 They are used to connect to WaveBook DaqBook WBK40 and WBK41 systems via parallel cables The ports cannot be used for other parallel devices such as printers and scanners Data transfer rates with the WBK25 depend on the network to which it is attached If the WBK25 is used in a point to point configuration where the WBK25 and the PC are the only devices on the network then data transfers that exceed 2 Mbytes per second can be expected The point to point scenario is recommended f
12. Tips provide advice that may save time during a procedure or help to clarify an issue Tips may include additional reference Specifications and Calibration Specifications are subject to change without notice Significant changes will be addressed in an addendum or revision to the manual As applicable MCC calibrates its hardware to published specifications Periodic hardware calibration is not covered under the warranty and must be performed by qualified personnel as specified in this manual Improper calibration procedures may void the warranty WaveBook 512A 516 516A 516E 988789 WaveBook User s Manual iii CAUTION Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can cause personal injury or equipment damage Before setting up and using your equipment you should read all documentation that covers your system Pay special attention to Warnings and Cautions Note During software installation Adobe PDF versions of user manuals will automatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support The default location is in the Programs group which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop You can also access the PDF documents directly from the CD vis the lt View PDFs gt button on the CD s opening screen Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader is included on your CD The Reader provides a means of reading and printing t
13. 002 0 6 LSB C typical 10 to 10V range With WBK12A 13A 002 1 LSB C typical 10 to 10V range Input Resistance 5MQ single ended 10MQ differential in parallel with 30pF Bias Current lt 400 nA 0 to 35 C Common Mode Rejection gt 70dB minimum gt 80dB typical DC 20KHz Input Bandwidth DC to 500KHz Hostile Channel to channel Crosstalk 5Vrms input signal DC 100KHz 88dB typical Over Voltage Protection 35 V relative to analog common Note Specifications are subject to change without notice WBK10A Analog Expansion Module 988397 WBK10A pg 3 PGA Filter Filter Type 20KHz low pass Butterworth 5 pole filter WBK11A Functions Input Voltage Ranges Software programmable prior to a scan sequence Aperture Uncertainty SSH 75ps max Voltage Droop SSH 0 01mV ms typ WBK12A WBK13A Functions Input Voltage Ranges Software programmable prior to a scan sequence Low Pass Filter Type Software selectable 8 Pole elliptic or linear phase Anti Aliasing Filters Single pole pre and post filters automatically set depending on filter frequency selected Low Pass Filter Frequency Cutoff Range 100KHz 75KHz 60KHz 400Hz bypass fc 300KHZ N where N 3 to 750 Filter Grouping 4 Channels each in two programmable banks Aperture Uncertainty SSH 75ps max Voltage Droop SSH 0 01mV ms typ Triggering Channel 1 Analog Trigger Input Signal Range 10 to 10V Input Characteristics and Protection Same a
14. 516E 285 mm wide x 220 mm deep x 70 mm high 11 x 8 5 x 2 70 inches 516 516A amp 512A 285 mm wide x 220 deep x 45 mm high 11 x 8 5 x 1 75 inches Weight I516E 1 9 kg 4 2 Ibs 1516 516A amp 512A 1 5 kg 3 3 Ibs WBK10A Analog Expansion Module 988397 WBK10A pg 5 WBK11A Simultaneous Sample amp Hold Card Description The WBK11A is a simultaneous sample and hold card SSH that provide a means of obtaining concurrent lt 150 ns capture from up to 8 input channels The card virtually eliminates channel to channel time skewing The card is controlled by the acquisition system s base WaveBook The WBK11A can be installed inside a WaveBook or ina WBK10A series module however it must be installed by a qualified service representative see the important notice above When using a WaveBook with an SSH channel enabled the per channel sample rates are reduced The rate reduction is the same as that which would occur if another channel were added The per channel rate with SSH enabled is 1 MHz n where n is the number of active channels The WBK11A SSH card can accommodate higher gains than the main unit because its gains are fixed for each channel prior to the acquisition You can use WaveView to set each channel to the ranges listed in the specifications on page 2 All channels equipped with SSH circuitry are sampled simultaneously as a system P10 P11 mates One of 8 Channels Typical mates with O
15. Example Two WBK61 and two WBK62 High Voltage Adapters Connected to a WaveBook 512 3 If connecting only one WBK61 62 connect the green banana plug alligator clip lead CN 111 from the WBK61 62 earth ground connector to the local earth ground If connecting two or more WBK61 62s connect the green banana plug alligator clip lead CN 111 from the last WBK61 62 earth ground connector to the local earth ground Refer also to step 2 and the above figure 4 Connect the input leads CA 152 to the WBK61 62 Input HI and Input LO jacks 5 Connect the test leads CA 152 to the circuit under test You may use alligator clips CN 109 to connect test leads If desired set the applicable WaveBook channel s to the appropriate scale by setting the mx b function in the WaveView program as discussed in the following section Software Setup WBK61 and WBK 62 High Voltage Adapters 988296 WBK61 and WBK62 pg 3 Software Setup Depending on your application you will need to set several software parameters so that WaveView will organize data to meet your requirements Of special importance is the correct setting of the scaling factor This is done using the mx b equation Me WaveView WAVEVIEW CFG MEF File Edit View System Help r Channel Contiguration pa Engineering Units Em TE 0 ae zien DE nat a fie o eH Hee BAA 3 aa iit MM lt i WEE CH Module Typ Module Type gt Ons On Of
16. HighLimit Low Limit 1 Logical E t Detect 1 oe Example Detection Channel 1 in Totalizing Counter Mode l L L L I aR E E E E A E A ee eee ee ENEE EEE L l L L l te E st E E E A Sa mee The detection circuit works on data that is latched out of the counters and put into the acquisition stream at the scan rate This data is acquired according to the pre acquisition setup scan group scan period etc and returned to the PC The actual counters may be counting much faster than the scan rate and therefore only every 10 100 or n count will show up in the acquisition data Therefore it is possible to set a small detection window on a totalizing counter channel and have the detection setpoint stepped over since the scan period was too long Even though the counter value stepped into and out of the detection window the actual values going back to the PC may not This is true no matter what mode the counter channel is in The setting of a detection window must be done with a scan period in mind Two possible solutions for overcoming this problem The scan period could be shortened to give more timing resolution on the counter values or the setpoint window High Limit and Low Limit could be widened Perhaps a combination of both solutions is the best compromise Example Setpoint Detection on Encoder Position and Velocity The figure below shows how setpoints can be used on two channels Channel
17. IR y RE iae on ciel as ERCT 5 R EW E ET 2190 ore aah Ce ou Any r iex chin eres bilgi eddies Bal re dB normalized Go WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896 WBK18 pg 25 WBK20A PCMCIA EPP Interface Card For Linking a WaveBook or DaqBook to a Notebook PC Card Inserts into a Type Il PC Card Socket on the Host PC Spring Clip Locks Cable to Card Connecter Mates with WaveBook s DB25 Connector Labeled To Computer WBK20A Interface Card and Cable Reference Note The WBK20A is shipped with a WBK20A User s Guide p n 274 0901 Refer to that document for product information and installation instructions Reference to 274 0901 979397 WBK20A page 1 WBK21 ISA EPP Interface Plug In Board For Linking a WaveBook to a Desktop PC WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Perform all hardware setups with all power off to the device serviced and to all connected equipment otherwise personal injury may result WBK21 is used to link WaveBook to a desktop PC WBK21 contains the following two ports e 2 5 Mbyte second enhanced parallel port often referred to as an LPT printer port e 16550 type buffered high speed serial port Often referred to as serial communication or COM port WBK21 installs into an IBM compatible computer using any available 16 bit ISA bus backplane slot Prior to installing the card make sure it is configured for your preferences A discussion of card configur
18. Input Impedance 590K 0 1 Hz High Pass Filter Input Impedance 10 MQ Input Ranges 5 0 V 2 5 V 41 0 V 500 mV 250 mV 100 mV 50 mV Anti Aliasing Low Pass Filter Accuracy 0 5 dB at the pass band center Frequency Span 30 Hz to 100 kHz Frequency Settings 300 kHz N N 3 4 10000 Dynamic Range 1 kHz 69 dB THD 1 kHz 70 dB Amplitude Matching 0 1 dB Phase Matching 2 Excitation Source Max Output Voltage 10 V Max Output Current 10 mA DC Output 5 V Sine Frequency 20 Hz to 100 kHz Distortion lt 0 1 Amplitude 5 V Steps 256 Random Spectral Distribution White Band limited Amplitude Distribution Gaussian Bandwidth 20 Hz to 100 kHz RMS level Adjustable in binary steps External Clock Digital TTL levels Sine gt 500 mV peak WBK14 Dynamic Signal Input Module 988396 WBK14 pg 9 WBK15 5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module Description 1 Hardware Setup 2 Configuration 2 Connection 3 Power 4 Safety Concerns 4 Using Fastener Panels to Stack Modules 4 Software Setup 5 WBK15 Specifications 7 Description The WBK15 module can accommodate eight 5B isolated input signal conditioning modules for use with the WaveBook The WaveBook can accommodate 8 WBK 15s for a maximum of 64 expansion channels The WaveBook scans WBK15 s channels at the same 1 us channel rate that it scans all WBK analog inputs a
19. OPTI This determines if the counter is to rollover or stop at the top Rollover Mode The counter continues to count upward rolling over on the 16 bit Counter Low boundary or on the 32 bit Counter High boundary See OPT2 in regard to choosing 16 bit or 32 bit counters Stop at the Top Mode The counter will stop at the top of its count The top of the count is FFFF for the 16 bit option Counter Low and FFFFFFFF for the 32 bit option Counter High COUNTER OPT2 Determines whether the counter is 16 bits or 32 bits Counter Low or Counter High respectively This only matters when the counter is using the stop at the top option otherwise this option is inconsequential COUNTER OPT3 Determines which signal latches the counter outputs into the data stream back to the WaveBook Normally the start of scan signal latches the counter outputs at the beginning of every scan but an option is to have the mapped signal latch the counter outputs This mapped signal option allows a second signal to control the latching of the count data This allows the user to know the exact counter value when an edge is present on another channel COUNTER OPT4 Allows the mapped channel to gate the counter if desired When the mapped channel is high the counter is enabled When the mapped channel is low the counter is disabled but holds the count value The mapped channel can be any other input channel or one of the detection signals COU
20. Power Out terminal block Choose a pullup resistor value based on the encoder s output drive capability and the input impedance of the WBK17 Lower values of pullup resistors will cause less distortion but also cause the encoder s output driver to pull down with more current If the inputs are connected differentially then each channel will need two pullup resistors 1 e one on the low signal input and one on the high signal input WBK17 pg 22 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Wiring for 1 or 2 Encoders The following figure illustrates differential connections for two encoders For single ended connections remove the A B and Z signal connections and short the Low inputs of these channels to COM The A signals must be connected to odd numbered channels and the associated B signals must be connected to the next higher even numbered channels For example for A connected to channel 1H B is connected to channel 2H A wiring diagram for one encoder is not shown as it would be identical to the following diagram except one of the encoders and its associated wiring would be removed Encoder Power Power Out Terminal Block Encoder 2 Counter Input Terminal Blocks Encoder 1 WBK17 Partial Two Encoders with Differential Connections to WBK17 In addition to the previous figure the following table indicates how to connect two encoders to a
21. Range One Year 18 28 C DC 500KHz One Year 18 28 C LSB rms typical typical Note 4 Filter reading range reading range Bypass oiexiov ora oo 2 on oon 22 22 0 to 5V 10A 012 009 012 009 22 2 2 0 to 4V 516 ows ome ome s on ome 22 3 oy Oe a 10A onl Poto 5V oen 033 22 6 ee e ows om m e o Aon osa onw 3 oe omn 22 33 5 to 5V 018 018 5 018 018 2 2 10A only 2 2to 2V 2to 2V 2V opo Ha e ae E a E oe o8 22 2 ee eee 10A only Notes 1 Specifications assume differential input scan unfiltered Accuracy specification is exclusive of noise 3 Unipolar ranges are unavailable for a WaveBook 516 Series with a WBK11A WBK12A or WBK13A option installed Unipolar mode is available with WBK10A and any option 4 Maximum limit is 1 3X typical pg 4 WBK12A and WBK13A 988396 Programmable Low Pass Filter Cards Predicting Amplitude Loss The following equations can be used to predict the amplitude loss when passing a signal through either the anti alias or clock suppression filter Definition of equation terms Fin is the signal to be measured Falias is the cutoff frequency of the anti alias filter Fclock is the cutoff frequency of the clock suppression filter Err 20 log qe Fin Falias Err 20 log l ini Fin Fclock Total error in dB due to both filters is Etot 20 lo
22. Strain Gage Module High Gain Amplifier Configurations WBK 16s are useful as a programmable high gain amplifier No external bridge is used in these cases The inputs are fully differential Note The differential inputs are not isolated inputs Common mode voltage should not exceed 10 V TS Sense Excitation External Bridge Excitation Bri leti nternal Bridge Completion Sense Universal High Gain Amplifier Input Differential E Sense Excitation Switches External Bridge Excitation Internal Bridge Completion Sense Universal High Gain Amplifier Input Differential with Pull Downs Sense Excitation LI Switches External accessed Bridge Input through V lt O Auu O software eo C C E Excitation Internal Bridge Completion Sense Universal High Gain Amplifier Input Single Ended WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 CN 115 Header O O OOO rPrWOOUMMMOT No pull down resistors are required if the input signal ground is connected to Pin 1 as shown CN 115 Header PWOUMND AT A floating input without a ground reference such as a battery requires a path for input bias currents Pull down resistors of 1k to LOMQ may be installed as shown to provide this function A 1OMQ resistor would be suitable in most cases These resistors are not compatible with other bridge configurations CN 115 Header rOBOOoOUMmMmNaoOo zt If the
23. TRERMOOOLRLE MULTIFUR TIM WHILE DIGITAL I O 2 Terminal Blocks POWER Out COUNTER TMR D A DACO DAC1 DAC2 DAC3 WBK41 Front Panel Connectors CAUTION Signal mix up will result in erroneous readings and can damage equipment Be sure to connect signal lines to the proper screw terminal connections Never move a wired terminal block from its intended terminal block socket to another The improperly routed signals which result can cause equipment damage Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 7 Connecting to the Device Interface Side WBK40 System Examples WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard To avoid possible injury and equipment damage turn off power to devices and connected equipment prior to setup DBK8 amp 4 mamn mn mm mm mm mam mm am mm mare mm mare mart FY z DBK84 Note 1 WBK40 IE WaveBook 516E Re Ethernet Channel Input Side Device Interface Side A WaveBook 516E with a WBK40 and two DBK84 Modules Note 1 Each DBK84 module requires a unique address setting as explained on page 13 Device Interface Connections seen in the above example 1 From the WBK40 P1 connector to two DBK84 Modules via two CA 37 1T cables Page 10 discusses T Cables 2 From a WBK40 SYNC port to a WaveBook 516E SYNC Port via a CA 74 1 cable 3 From a WaveBook 516E EXPANSION PORT to the WBK40 PARALLEL PORT via a CA 35 12 cable 4 From the WaveBook 516E ETHERNET port to the Eth
24. empirically or by electrical calculation determine the physical equivalence of an available resistance connected to accessible transducer lines to produce an output signal The shunt calibration resistor can be located internal soldered onto the WBK16 LC in the provided R1 location or external to the host StrainBook or WBK16 at a wiring transition location Four schematics which include an External Full Bridge follow WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 15 circuit BUT NEVER TO BOTH Doing so will create a short circuit that could damage equipment A Make the DB9 pin 2 connection to the low side or the high side of the Internal Shunt Resistor Low Side Connection Sense Excitation gt External Bridge a ee C A see CAUTION TOTES YS Excitation Sense Full Bridge with Internal Shunt Resistor Installed at RI on the WBK16 LC DB9 Pin 2 Connected to the Low Side Internal Shunt Resistor High Side Connection see CAUTION 6 S5ense 9 ot Excitation External 8 N Bridge D OF D2 Note 1 WBK16 LC Excitation Sense Full Bridge with Internal Shunt Resistor Installed at RI on the WBK16 LC DB9 Pin 2 Connected to the High Side Make the DB9 pin 2 connection to the low side or the high side of the circuit BUT NEVER TO BOTH Doing so will create a short circuit that could damage equipment Note 1 The
25. lt View PDFs gt button on the opening screen Me WaveView WAVEVIEW_CFG Tey File Edt View System Help WER WEE WEK Channel Configuration LPF Cutoff Frequency Ss a A f 1000 00 z za E sll iil Za cH Module Type Fes OnOff Readings P Range Label Label Units oe a LFF Dutoit IF E 2i EWEBE 0 5 0 to 5 0 CHH Ho On 100000 00 10Hz 2rn4 5 2 WBKI4 0 5 0to5 0 CH42 Na External 1000 00 0 1 Hz 2rv4 Bos WBKI4 On O 5 0to 5 0 CH4s Vv Mo Bypass 100000 00 10 Hz rn E WaveView Configuration Window In the Wave View Configuration main window see figure the following columns are important in regard to filters LPF Mode You can click on a cell in the LPF Mode column to make the cell active and then change its setting Options for WBK14 s LPF Mode are a On turns the Low Pass Filter on b External selects an external filter c Bypass bypasses the low pass filter LPF Cutoff the cells in this column are used to set the Low Pass Filter cutoff frequency HPF Cutoff the cells in this column are used to set the High Pass Filter cutoff frequency A Module Configuration o x System Inventory Module Chassis Option For WBK 14 applications the Module Configuration window allows you to set the excitation source in regard to EHSA Wave 516 WBK10 WBK11 aaa WEBK10H WBK11 amplitude 3 WBK10 WBK12 ff 4 WBK10 WBK13 ols
26. whether you have a Dedicated Network or a LAN with DHCP Server Network Illustrations of the network types are provided on page 5 Users of Dedicated Networks follow these 3 steps a Enter the Serial Number of the first level device WBK25 In the following screen shots the Serial Number is 800000 b Select the Auto IP Setting radio button Note that the IP Address of the WBK25 will automatically be calculated and displayed in the IP Address field as indicated in the following left hand figure c Click the lt OK gt button 2 4 Daq Configuration x 4 Daq Configuration x WBK25 Test Hardware WBK25 Test Hardware r Device Settings i m Device Settings Device Name wbk25 0 Device Name lwek250 ooo Device Type weK2 H Device Type weK2 x Serial Number so0o000 Serial Number s0000 IFP Address Setting IP Address Setting Auto IP Setting Auto IP Setting C Manual IP Setting Manual IP Setting IP Address 10 IP Address 192 168 2 2 Cancel Apply For DEDICATED Networks For LAN with DHCP Server Networks Dagq Configuration Properties Dialog Boxes Users of LAN with DHCP Server Networks follow these 4 steps The DagIPConfig applet provides the Serial Number and the IP Address of the device Users of LAN with DHCP Server Networks will need to enter both numbers in the Daqg Configuration Properties dialog boxes previous right hand figure Page 10 includ
27. 1 375 Ethernet Interface 10 100BaseT Ethernet Connector RJ45 Parallel Interface Three EPP Enhanced Parallel Ports Parallel Connectors DB25 female Accessories amp Cables Fastener panel kit for WBK series Fastener panel kit for DBK series Fastener panel handle DB25 male to DB25 female parallel cable 2 ft DB25 male to DB25 female parallel cable 1 ft Ethernet patch cable 1 5 ft Ethernet patch cable 7 ft Note WBK25 is supported in the 32 bit driver only WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide 919896 Part No 262 0801 232 0810 HA 11 1 CA 35 2 CA 35 12 CA 242 CA 242 7 WBK25 pg 17 Ethernet CE Kit Installation Instructions Introduction The Ethernet CE Kit includes three ferrite clamp on inductive collars to reduce EMI It also includes a ground line for safety The kit is simple to install and consists of the following components e 3 Ferrite Inductive Collars with Tie wrap p n L 8 1 e 1 Ground Line p n CA 250 e 4 Washers 8 External Tooth p n WA 5 used to lock screws 2 washers per screw e 1 Screw 8 32x1 4 Phillips Pan head p n HA 154 4 used to secure the ground line to a threaded splice plate hole on the data acquisition device e 1 Screw 6 32x5 16 Phillips Pan head p n HA 2 5 used to secure the ground line to the PC Connect the Ground Line If using a desktop or tower PC a remove a screw that secures the computer casing to the chassis The first photo
28. 10 to 30 VDC Input power BNC OSC from AC adapter DBK30A v DBK34 or 12 V car battery etc ttt x i ry Excitation Amplitude in Power Supply ON OFF Source DAC s Switgh BNO Expansion 15 i DAG Unit Control 15 Fuse Converter DINSs can be daisy chained WBK14 Block Diagram Current Source WBK14 provides constant current to bias ICP transducers Two current levels 2 mA or 4 mA with voltage compliance of 27 V can be selected via software The bias current is sourced through the center conductor of a coaxial lead and returns to the WBK14 by the outer conductor The output impedance is larger than 1 MQ and presents virtually no loading effect on the transducer s output For applications that do not require bias the current source can be removed from the BNC input by opening a relay contact The current sources are applied to or removed from the input in channel groups of two i e channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 High Pass Filters HPF Each WBK 14 channel has three High Pass Filters HPFs with a 3 dB cut off frequency Fc Two filters are at 0 1 Hz and the other is 10 Hz The 0 1 Hz HPF filters are single pole RC filters They are primarily used to couple vibration signals The 10 Hz HPF is a 2 pole Butterworth type that can be used to couple acoustic signals or attenuate setup induced low frequency signals since these can reduce the dynamic range of the measurement for example when using tape recorders as signal sources Progr
29. 10ppm or 1ppm Full 32 bit Counter lt 10 ppm Range Hz Ticksize nS Averaging Option 15u 500m 20000 Full 32 bit Counter lt 1 ppm Range Hz Ticksize nS Averaging Option 15u 50m 20000 150u 500m 2000 i5m 50 20 l 20 l mso a o 50m Sk 1 5 50k 20 100 1 5 5k 15 500k 1000 15 50k 1000 High Accuracy Frequency Ranges for a 32 bit Value that has little sampling error lt 10ppm lt Ippm imo ft 20 100 If the input frequency is required to have less than 1 ppm sampling error and is greater than 50kHz use the 15 50kHz lppm range The values returned will have sampling error that is greater than 1ppm but they can be averaged by the PC software to further reduce the sampling error 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Pulsewidth Mode This mode provides a means to measure a channel s pulsewidth The measurement is the time from the rising edge to the falling edge or visa versa The measurement will be either pulsewidth low or pulsewidth high depending upon the edge polarity set in the debounce module Every time the pulsewidth measurement is latched from the counter the counter is immediately cleared and enabled to count the time for the next pulsewidth The pulsewidth measurements are latched as they become available Low Word High Word Increment Channel Input Post Debounce 7Ons 200ns 2000ns 20000 ns To Wavehooks1 Als Channel Inputs Pos
30. 2 Off CHO vo Ees fro 0 Bypass 1000 DC 100V FullBridge No Bypassed 0 3 0 CHOS Y to No 0 Bypass 10 00 BC 10 0 Full Bridge No Bypassed WBK16 Strain Gage Module StrainBook616 WBK16 Sensor Configuration aE Calibration Password New Configuration Load 4n Existing Configuration f oai r sz Save Current Configuration CLOSE Calibration Farameters Channel Values Dibri Exe Gage Sensitivity Shunt Bric 3 7 yaaran Calibration Date Units Label Sensor Label Volts Factor Resistor Res Type Top Method mA Ohm Ot 0 2 No Sti I J it Fi fi 1 r F oO 3 No l l l WaveView Configuration Main Window Top and Sensor Configuration Calibration Window Bottom To open the Sensor Configuration Calibration window click on WaveView s Sensor Calibration button The button is depicted at the left and pointed out in the upper portion of the previous figure You can also open the window from WaveView s System pull down menu You can use the Sensor Configuration window s File pull down menu to Load an Existing Configuration This option opens a standard dialog box that allows you to select and open the desired file 949794 WBK16 pg 23 Sensor Configuration Main Components StrainBook616 WEK16 Sensor Configuration Fil Calibration Password Sensor Configuration Calibrate Yes No i EA foe O e l A a Ho Calibration Parameters Channel Values l Exc
31. 3 With WBK12A 13A Note 3 Voltage Input Noise Input Noise Input Noise Range Accuracy Note 2 LSB rms Accuracy Note 2 LSB rms Accuracy Note 2 LSB rms One Year 18 28 C DC 500KHz One Year 18 28 C DC SOOKHZ One Year 18 28 C typical typical typical Filter reading range reading range reading range Bypass foiexiov ora oo 2 foram one 2 ores ones 22 22 0 to 4V 516 Pow oe om s om 0mm s ome om 22 3 tee e n 10A onl otv o o f o on e on ome aa o wa t e t a a E H wowe o o o a o s oen ae 22 O o Titoriv ore orn 3 orem orm 3 oen orm 22 33 5 to 5V 018 018 5 018 018 018 018 2 2 10A only Gaes o ome e orem oom 22 2 mew f f f fom on e foe on e f o 05 to 05V 018 16 018 16 10A only Notes 1 Specifications assume differential input scan unfiltered 2 Accuracy specification is exclusive of noise 3 Unipolar ranges are not available for WaveBook 516 516A or 516E when a WBK11A WBK12A or WBK13A option is installed Unipolar ranges are available with WBK10A and any option System Performance one year 18 28 C unless otherwise noted Differential Nonlinearity 2 LSB max Total Harmonic Distortion 10Hz 20KHz 84dB typical Signal to Noise and Distortion SINAD 10Hz 20KHz 74dB typical Temperature Coefficient of Accuracy 0 18 and 28 50 C With PGA and WBK11A
32. 328to 328to 454to 454to 32to 58 to 58 to 122 to The modules automatically convert TC measurements into temperature readings including cold junction compensation and linearization Open TC detection and overload protection up to 40V is also included on every channel To expand beyond the built in 14 TC input channels up to fifteen DBK84 expansion modules can be attached to one WBK40 or WBK41 providing an additional 14 TC input channels per module Fifteen DBK84 Thermocouple Modules connected via daisy chain to a single WBK40 or WBK41 module provide up to 210 additional temperature channels for a total system capability of 224 channels 1 e 14 channels per device x 16 devices If more than eight DBK84 modules are to be connected to one WBK40 or WBK41 module additional power must be supplied The power can be obtained from DBK32A or DBK33 Auxiliary Power Supply Cards housed within a DBK10 expansion chassis In comparison to typical DBK options the DBK84 modules demand significant power from the system s 15 V power supplies It is important that you calculate your system s power demand as you may need to add auxiliary power supplies Refer to the Power Management section of the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual in regard to calculating system power requirements Note that WBK40 and WBK41 can each provide up to 15000 mW of power to DBK84 modules that are added to the system See previous note regardi
33. 5 foot cable or a CA 242 7 7 foot cable 1 Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet jack on the WBK25 2 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet jack on the host computer or network hub STEP 4 Power up the WBK25 What you will need A power supply with a range of 10 VDC to 30 VDC The power supply needs to have a male DINS connector Note The switching mode power supply that is commonly used with these systems has an input range of 100 VAC to 240 VAC at 50 Hz to 60 Hz The power supply s output to the device is typically 15 VDC 2 7 amps via a DINS connector Note Various AC adapter models support power grids of USA Europe Japan and Asia How to make the connection 1 Place the WBK25 s power switch in the OFF 0 position if it is not already OFF Connect the DINS end of the adapter s cable to the power in connector on the WBK25 Connect the adapter s plug to a standard AC outlet If your adapter has a power switch position it to ON ol E a Turn ON the WBK25by placing the power switch to the 1 position The power led will light up WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide 919896 WBK25 pg 7 The power management and power requirements sections of the associated user s manual s should be reviewed prior to powering up a system gt For DaqBook 2000 Series systems refer the DaqBook 2000 Series User s Manual p n 1103 0901 gt For WaveB
34. A B and Z highs must be connected to separate channels e The input channel lows must be jumpered to COM e Each encoder ground connects to COM e Up to four encoders can be powered from the Encoder Power Power Out terminal block Refer to your encoder specification sheet for actual power requirements Each encoder power wire connects to the Encoder Power Power Out terminal block s 15 VDC or 5 VDC connector as applicable For Differential Connections For differential applications connections made from the encoder to the WBK17 s front panel are as follows e Signals A B and Z connect to the H channel high connections on WBK17 s Counter Input Terminal Blocks A B and Z highs must be connected to separate channels e Signals A B and Z connect to the respective L channel low connections on WBK17 s Counter Input Terminal Blocks e ach encoder ground connects to COM e Up to four encoders can be powered from the Encoder Power Power Out terminal block Refer to your encoder specification sheet for actual power requirement Each encoder power wire connects to the Encoder Power Power Out terminal block s 15 VDC or 5 VDC connector as applicable For Open Collector Outputs External pullup resistors can be connected to the WBK17 s counter input terminal blocks A pullup resistor can be placed between any input channel and one of the two power supplies 5V or 15V provided by the Encoder Power
35. A will lead B and when the encoder is rotating counter clockwise A will lag B If the counter direction control logic is such that the counter counts upward when A leads B and counts downward when A lags B then the counter will give direction control as well as distance from the reference An Example of Encoder Accuracy If there are 512 pulses on A then the encoder position is accurate to within 360 degrees 512 Even greater accuracy can be obtained by counting not only rising edges on A but also falling edges on A giving position accuracy to 360 degrees 1024 The ultimate accuracy is obtained by counting rising and falling edges on A and on B since B also has 512 pulses This gives a position accuracy of 360 degrees 2048 These 3 different modes are known as 1X 2X and 4X The WBK17 implements all of these modes and functions as described in the following options OPT4 Low Word High Word Channels 1 3 5 7 A Post Debounce 32 Bits Increment Channels 2 4 6 8 Post Debource To Wavebooko16 ANE Channel Inputs Start of scan Signal Post Debounce Wapped Channel Alls Detection mignials Encoder Mode ENCODER OPT 1 0 This determines the encoder measurement mode 1X 2X or 4X ENCODER OPT3 This determines which signal latches the counter outputs into the data stream going back to the WaveBook Normally the start of scan signal latches the counter outputs at the beginning o
36. Control Out oo Expansion Control Interface ath lt q Expansion xq Control In o LS o9 Differential High Speed Amplifier Comparator Counter Input Program Terminal Block oj Asi Aas mable 32 Bit ouplin 1 Blockof 4 fol Ping Programmable Pepounce Counter Analog Filter goug 2 Channels amp 1 COM per Block o9 Programmable aro Threshold 9 me To WaveBook Channel 1 typical of 8 channels o 09 Internal DC to DC Power Supply PREM Digital Re Detection Expansion i Interface o i na r 4 gt i H O 3 i gt t yO 3 d To Digital Inputs i S QA Trigger amp Ext Clock i A a o V Encoder Power i 2s i Terminal Block ISISISISISIGISISIS 3 3 DC Power Input and Expansion o D eg ee Digital Outputs WBK17 Block Diagram The WBK17 can be used with any combination of up to 7 additional WBK signal conditioning modules Together these modules can measure a broad range of signal types and address a broad range of applications A discussion of the following items is presented in Functional Concepts which immediately follows Hardware Setup e AC DC Coupling e Analog Filtering e Comparator e Debounce Circuit e Counter Options e Digital Inputs e Digital Outputs with Pattern Detection WBK17 pg 2 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Hardware Setup Configuration All WBK17 configurations are controlled by software The WBK17 requires no hardware
37. Gage Sensitivity Shunt Erin CH Lal sensor Bridge Calibration Calibration Date Units Label Sensor Label Volts Factor Resistor Aes f Type Type Method mi Ohm Ok Sensor Configuration Calibration Window Sensor Configuration Toolbar and Pull Down Menus Control functions in the sensor configuration window are available through the pull down menus or the toolbar For descriptions of button functions see the related menu selections Note that some menu selections have no corresponding button Sensor Configuration Window Toolbar 1 New Configuration 2 Load an Existing Configuration 3 Save Current Configuration 4 Take a Single Reading 5 Calibrate Enabled Channels 6 Return to WaveView File The File menu provides four functions File New Configuration Load n Existing Configuration Save Curent Configuration Return to Wave ie New Configuration Set all parameters to their default startup setting Load an Existing Configuration Load a saved sensor calibration configuration Save Current Configuration Save the current sensor calibration configuration for later recall Return to WaveView Exit the Sensor Configuration window and return to WaveView WBK16 pg 24 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module Calibration The Calibration menu provides two functions Calibration Take a Single Reading Ctrl F Calibrate Enabled Channels FS Take a Single Reading This command allows the
38. I O lines are built into the WBK41 Sixteen are accessible via front panel removable screw terminal connectors and can be defined under program control as either all inputs or all outputs As inputs these channels can be scanned synchronously during an acquisition or asynchronously under program control As outputs these lines can be set prior to an acquisition or changed during an acquisition if used with a programming environment such as Visual Basic C or LabVIEW In addition to the 16 front panel Digital I O lines 24 lines are provided on the rear panel 37 pin D connector designated as P2 These lines are logically divided into three 8 bit ports with each port programmable as input or output As with the front panel Digital I O these lines can be scanned as inputs along with other channels in a scan group or read during an acquisition when a programming environment is being used Note that P2 can be used as a Digital I O expansion port In this role it can be expanded up to 256 digital I O lines using our DBK20 Series options DBK20 Series devices provide additional signal I O including optical isolation and relay closure The DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual 457 0905 which is included in PDF format on your data acquisition CD contains details regarding each DBK20 Series device Synchronous Input Operations The WBK40 and the WBK41 allow synchronous scanning and acquisition of Thermocouple Inputs This type of data ca
39. If all lower word setpoints and higher word setpoints were programmed for a channel that channel would have 32 programmed setpoints driving the detect signal during the acquisition All setpoints are programmed as part of the pre acquisition setup similar to setting up the analog path debounce mode or counter mode setup As stated above each setpoint acts on 16 bit data Therefore each setpoint has two 16 bit compare values High Limit and Low Limit The High Limit and Low Limit values define the setpoint window Each setpoint has four comparison types 1 inside the window 2 outside the window 3 greater than value and 4 less than value The programmed comparison type tells the detection module how to compare the channel s data value to the values of High Limit and Low Limit Each setpoint can also be programmed with an 8 bit digital output byte DigOut and corresponding 8 bit mask byte DigMask When the setpoint criteria has been met the digital output port can be updated with the given byte and mask The digital output port can also be part of the setpoint comparison Any setpoint can be programmed to take the detect signal high when the digital output port is equal to the 8 bit digital byte DigComp qualified by the 8 bit DigMask If any of the digital output port bits are not going to be driven as outputs they can act as inputs that drive the detection signals via setpoints The diagram below summarizes the comparisons that
40. LEDs There are eight Transducer Fault LEDs 1 for each channel eight Overrange LEDs 1 for each channel an Active LED Ready LED and a Power LED The indicators have the following meanings Transducer Fault When lit a Transducer Fault LED indicates that the transducer for the associated channel has 1 LED per Channel either an open circuit or a short circuit In addition to LED indication transducer fault information is available through a software status request at the end of an acquisition Transducer fault errors are latched until the commencement of a new acquisition Consequently even intermittent faults are detected and communicated Detection of a transducer fault does not stop an acquisition or alter data For related information refer to Current Source with Transducer Fault Detection on page 2 Overrange When lit an Overrange LED indicates that the associated channel s input signal has exceeded 1 LED per Channel the input full scale range which was programmed for that specific WBK18 module Even a momentary exceeding of the range will cause the LED to light This indication is critical for overrange signals result in clipped data that significantly corrupts FFT analysis In addition to LED indication the overrange condition is available through a software status request at the end of an acquisition Overrange errors are latched until the commencement of a new acquisition Consequently even intermittent faults are detec
41. Locate fuse F201 see the preceding figure 6 While wearing a grounded wrist strap remove and replace the bad fuse Ensure that the new fuse is fully seated 7 Replace the Rear Panel and secure it to the chassis with the 2 Rear Panel Screws the Bottom Panel Screw and the connector Jackscrews that were removed in step 2 8 Return the WBK40 or WBK41 to normal service Should any problems be noted consult the factory Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 25 P1 DB37 Connector Pinout Analog I O Pin SignalName CiescriptionforP1PinUse 16 Expansion 6 Digital OUT external GAIN select bitO O OOOO O O 8 Negative Reference Analog 5 V reference 9 Positive Reference Analog 5V reference Ch 15 HI IN single ended mode Ch 7 LO IN differential mode Ch 14 HI IN single ended mode Ch 6 LO IN differential mode Ch 13 HI IN single ended mode Ch 5 LO IN differential mode Ch 12 HI IN single ended mode Ch 4 LO IN differential mode CH 11 SE or CH 3 LO DIFF Ch 11 HI IN single ended mode Ch 3 LO IN differential mode CH 10 SE or CH 2 LO DIFF Ch 10 HI IN single ended mode Ch 2 LO IN differential mode Ch 9 HI IN single ended mode Ch 1 LO IN differential mode Ch 8 HI IN single ended mode Ch 0 LO IN differential mode ae Le Le OL A a A a ae Le Le OL A a A CH 0 SE or CH 0 HI DIFF Ch 0 IN single ended mode Ch O HI IN
42. Low amp High for each of 8 channels Power Out for Encoders snap in terminal block Includes connections for Common 5 VDC and 15 VDC Digital Expansion In HD26 Female amp Digital Expansion Out Digital In Trigger Clock DB25 Female LED Indicators Active Ready and Power Rear Panel Power Switch Power In and Out DINS connectors for 10 VDC to 30 VDC Digital Outputs snap in terminal block with connection for Common and 8 Channels Expansion Control In DB15 Male amp Expansion Control Out DB15 Female Expansion Signal In BNC amp Expansion Signal Out BNC WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 1 The WBK17 is an 8 channel multi function counter encoder module that can be used with WaveBook 516 512A 516A and 516E systems The WBK17 module can not be used with earlier WaveBook models such as WaveBook 512 and WaveBook 512H Each of the high speed 32 bit counter channels can be configured for counter period pulse width time between edges or encoder modes All channels are capable of measuring analog inputs that are digitized by the WaveBook at up to 1 MHz The Analog Waveform Input Mode can be used to measure waveforms from 0 to 100 V peak to peak 50 V The maximum analog over range is 150 V peak to peak 75 V The resolution is 0 002307 V bit BNC lt m Expansion Signal Out lt Analog g Expansion BNC gt Interface ay Ex pansion Signal In oe pe Expansion me
43. O00000 oe I CS E Ey ee 4 V c EXP SIG IN OUT e A d EXP CNTRL EXP CNTRL exp gic N OUT Silke Channel Input Side Device Interface Side A WaveBook 516E with a WBK17 WBKI0A WBK40 and three DBK84 Modules Device Interface Connections seen in the above example l Aa i a m 10 11 From the WBK40 P1 connector to three DBK84 Modules via three CA 37 1T cables From the WBK40 SYNC port to WaveBook 516E SYNC Port via a CA 74 1 cable From the WBK40 PARALLEL PORT to the WaveBook 516E Expansion Port via a CA 35 12 cable From the WaveBook 516E s ETHERNET port to the Ethernet via a CA 242 cable From the WaveBook 516E EXTERNAL CONTROL connector to the WBK17 s EXPANSION CONTROL IN connector via a CA 129 cable From the WaveBook 516E EXTERNAL SIGNAL IN connector to the WBK17 EXTERNAL SIGNAL OUT connector via a CA 150 cable From the WaveBook 516E Channel Input Side s DIGITAL I O AND TRIGGER connector to the WBK17 DIGITAL EXPANSION IN connector via a CA 217 cable From the WBK17 EXPANSION CONTROL OUT connector to the WBK10A EXPANSION CONTROL IN connector via a CA 129 cable From the WBK17 s EXPANSION SIGNAL IN connector to the WBK10A s EXPANSION SIGNAL OUT connector via a CA 150 cable Power Supply a TR 40U was connected to the POWER IN DIN 5 connector to supply power at 10 VDC to 30 VDC for the WBK40 WaveBook 516E and WBK17 Power Supply From the WBK17 POWER OUT DIN 5 10 VDC to 30 VDC co
44. PORT 3 JO of ac J EE Mowe WBK25 Rear Panel POWER Switch A rocker type switch with a 0 label for Power Off and a 1 for Power On DIN5 POWER IN 10 to 30 VDC through a socket type DIN5 connector on the chassis Power is typically supplied from a TR 40U power adapter ETHERNET The 10 100BaseT Ethernet port can connect to the Ethernet port of the host PC or to an Ethernet network Either of two Ethernet patch cables may be used to make the connection CA 242 is a 1 5 foot long cable CA 242 7 is a 7 foot long cable Note that the Ethernet connector has two built in LEDs Tx and Rx that indicate traffic flow These are discussed with the three other Ethernet related LEDs To be CE compliant the length of the Ethernet cable can not exceed 10m LEDs There are 5 ETHERNET Status LEDS Two rectangular LEDs Tx and a Rx are built into the frame of the Ethernet port The other three LEDs located just to the right of the Ethernet port are round and are labeled L T and D for Link BaseT and Duplex respectively Tx and Rx LEDs Tx ON indicates traffic is being transmitted see following figure Rx ON indicates that the port is receiving traffic L Link ON indicates a link exists OFF indicates no link T BaseT ON indicates 100BaseTx OFF indicates 10BaseT D Duplex ON indicates full duplex which allows simultaneous two way data traffic
45. Plate Mot Calibrate y CHO S N 11 0 3 000 Yes Transducer 2 Pt Man ot Calibrate Wi CHOe S M 10 04 Yes Strain Gage Full Bridge Shunt Ad fot Calibrate L CHOS S H 10 0 Yes Load Cell Mame Plate Mot Calibrate Wi CHO S M 10 04 Yes Strain Gage Full Bridge Shunt AA Mot Calibrate i CHGS S H 10 0 Yes Stram Gage Full Bridge 2 Pt Man ot Calibrate ECHE SH 10 0 Ma ra ag Full Brida otl ibrater L 1 OO IoC oo oOo oS VS OT fe Od a Sensor Configuration Window Column Description Calibrate Yes enables the selected channel to be calibrated with the calibrate enabled channels option No prevents the channel from being calibrated All other columns for that channel will be disabled if no is selected The channel can still be turned on in WaveView Sensor Type Provides a means of selecting the sensor type The three available sensor types are Strain Gage Load Cell and Transducer Bridge Type Provides a means of selecting the bridge type Choices are full bridge half bridge and quarter bridge This option is only available for a strain gage sensor in the calibration program The bridge type for any sensor can be changed from the Sensor Configuration window Calibration Method Allows the calibration method to be selected Possible selections are indicated in the Calibration Method gt am Rb figure to the right These calibration methods are explained later in the document Calibration Date Dis
46. Puller or needle nose pliers Grounding wrist strap and associated anti static pad Replacement fuse F201 Needle nose pliers can be used to pull MINI ATO fuses but should not be used to insert fuses 1 Ifyou have not already done so turn OFF the power to and UNPLUG the WBK25 module and all connected equipment Remove all lines from the unit 2 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the 4 cover plate screws and the cover plate not shown Cover Plate Cover Plate Screws 2 of 4 Screws 2 of 4 Fuse F201 WBK25 Fuse and Cover Plate Screw Locations WBK25 pg 16 919896 WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide 3 Locate fuse F201 near the Power In DIN 5 Connector left edge of the rear panel see figure 4 While wearing a grounded wrist strap remove and replace the bad fuse Ensure that the new fuse is fully seated 5 Replace the cover plate and secure it to the chassis with the 4 screws that were removed in step 2 6 Return the WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module to normal service Should any problems be noted consult the factory Specifications Environment Operating 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F 0 to 95 humidity non condensing Storage 20 to 70 C 4 to 158 F Power 0 75A 15V Fuse F201 Input Power Fuse 4 0 A MINI ATO Factory Part Number FU 8 4 Littelfuse Part Number 297 004 Littelfuse Body Color Code Pink Dimensions 285 mm W x 220 mm D x 35 mm H 11 x 8 5 x
47. Rshunt 350 10 4 0 020 0 5 43 5750 remove bridge completion headers adapter plugs from the unit before soldering resistors in the headers A Be careful to avoid component damage while the WBK16 enclosure is open Always Solder resistor lead Configuring the Bridge Completion Resistor Modules For each channel the into support fork board has a 2x8 resistor socket with rows designated A through H The removable adapter plugs are included for soldering in the resistors Additional adapter plugs are available for convenient changeover of alternate configurations Resistor Ra is located nearest the front panel o Half bridge completion resistors consist of Rg and Rh o Quarter bridge completion resistors consist of Ra Rc and Re o Shunt resistors consist of Rb Rd and Rf Inserting resistors directly into the socket makes an unreliable connection and is not recommended Remove the plug from the main board then solder resistors to the adapter plug as indicated To avoid damaging the pin alignment on the plug solder with minimal heat After soldering the resistor leads should be snipped off close to the support Soldering Resistors to Adapter Plug 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module Reference Notes Schematics of various bridge configurations begin on page 8 DB9 connector information including use of the optional CN 189 adapter is located on page 12 The WBK16 LC Load Cell Shunt Cal Internal Option is disc
48. Side One of Many Possible WBK41 Based Systems Note 1 Each DBK84 module requires a unique address setting as explained on page 13 Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 5 HF n Gng GAD CH1 GH CHI M14 CHIS H2 Chats OG TAR NS T POCA COA IEN Ta yy x Note Pa 4h E Pom WO sap apy z Wootaan rae eles ae ENE a The row of terminal blocks does not apply to WBK40 TRERMCOLE MU APQRAIDTION mo re E DIGITAL I O 2 Terminal Blocks POWER Out COUNTER TMR D A DACO DAC1 DAC2 DAC3 WBK41 Front Panel Connectors Note that WBK40 s Front Panel is identical except it has no screw terminal blocks Page 1 includes a photo of WBK40 Page 2 includes a table that describes each item found on the front panel Thermocouple Connections The WBK40 and WBK41 each accept up to 14 thermocouples with mini TC plugs via channels 1 through 7 and 9 through 15 All channels have the same level of functionality Thermocouple wire is standardized color coded and polarized as noted in the following table Mini TC plugs are type specific and for best Thermocouple Standards measurement operation the plug TC type should match eS ee ae the wire TC type If necessary copper copper Type U Type Channel High eae Low plugs may be used but measurement stability will be ate slightly degraded Mini TC plugs are polarized as well tales Red and it is critical for proper measurement operation t
49. Signal Conditioning Module WBK 16 Strain Gage Module WBK17 Counter Input Module with Quadrature Encoder Support WBK 18 Dynamic Signal Conditioning Module WBK20A PCMCIA EPP Interface Card and Cable WBK21 ISA EPP Interface Plug In Board WBK23 PCI EPP Interface Plug In Board WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide p n 1087 0901 WBK30 WaveBook Memory Options WBK40 and WBK41 Thermocouple and Multi Function I O Modules WBK61 and WBK 2 High Voltage Adapters Glossary CAUTION Using the equipment in ways other than described in this manual can cause personal injury or equipment damage Pay special attention to all cautions and warnings Reference Notes gt Information not available at the time of publication will be made available in ReadMe files or in supplemental documentation gt For programming related information refer to the separate Programmer s Manual p n 1008 0901 See PDF Note below gt WaveBook 512A WaveBook 516 and WaveBook 516A are covered in the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 gt WaveBook 512 and WaveBook 512H are covered in WaveBook User s Manual p n 481 0901 PDF Note During software installation Adobe PDF versions of user manuals will automatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support The default location is in the Programs group which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop Refer to the PDF documentatio
50. The sensor calibration program uses five methods of calibration 2 Point Manual 2 Point Automatic Shunt Internal 2 Point Shunt External Name Plate for load cell or transducer O O O Or 3 Table of Calibration Methods and Required Parameters Gage Sensi Bridge Full Max Quie Pt 1 Pt 1 Pt 2 Pt 2 Factor tivity Ohms Load Load scent mV Units mV Units 2 Point Y Y Y Y Y Manual 2 Point vA Y Y Y Y Y Y Auto Shunt v4 Y Y Y v4 v4 Y Internal 2 Point Shunt External To use any of these calibration methods enter the appropriate values into the required spreadsheet columns of the Sensor Calibration window as listed above and click on the Calibrate Enabled Channels button on the toolbar In 2 Point Manual calibration a message box prompts you to apply the first load When prompted apply the load and click the OK button A second message box will prompt you to apply the second load When prompted apply the second load and click lt OK gt Saving a Calibration File After calibrating the enabled channels a message box asks if you want to save the changes Click on the Yes button to save the calibration and a dialog box will appear If you choose not to save the changes at this time another message will appear asking if you want to save the changes when you click on the Return to WaveView button on the tool bar Click on the Yes button to save these changes and a dialog box will appear The most recently
51. Then the software uses these numbers to convert the raw signals into engineering units using the following mx b equation Engineering Units m Raw Signal b 1 The user must however determine the proper values of scale m and offset b for the application in question To do the calculation the user needs to identify two known values 1 the raw signal values and 2 the engineering units that correspond to the raw signal values After this the scale and offset parameters can be calculated by solving two equations for the two unknowns This method is made clear by the following example Example An engineer has a pressure transducer that produces a voltage output of 10 5 volts when the measured pressure is 3200 psi The same transducer produces an output of 0 5 volt when the pressure is 0 psi Knowing these facts m and b are calculated as follows A Write a pair of equations representing the two known points 3200 m 10 5 b 2 0 m 0 5 b 3 B Solve for m by first subtracting each element in equation 3 from equation 2 3200 0 m 10 5 0 5 b b 4 Simplifying gives you 3200 m 10 5 This means m 320 6 C Substitute the value for m into equation 3 to determine the value for b 0 320 0 5 b 7 So b 160 8 Now it is possible to rewrite the general equation 1 using the specific values for m and b that we just determined Engineering Units 320 Raw Signal 1
52. Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules TC Accuracy at Measurement Temperature in C C i200 07 os o6 or os os os ao a or os oe oe am oso os os os os os Input Sequencer Scan Clock Sources 2 1 Internal programmable from 5 us to 5 96 hours in 5 us steps 2 External TTL level input up to 200 kHz max pin 20 on P1 Depth 512 locations Channel to Channel Scan Rate 5 us per channel programmable Data Buffer 64 Ksample FIFO Note for WBK41 Only Analog digital and frequency inputs can be scanned synchronously based on either an internal programmable timer or an external clock source External Acquisition Scan Clock Input Maximum Rate 200 kHz Clock Signal Range OV to 5V Minimum Pulse Width 50 ns high 50 ns low External SYNC Port Available on rear panel allows the modules to be synchronized with a WaveBook 516E Note Specifications are subject to change without notice Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 29 Triggering WBK40 Trigger Sources Four individually selectable for starting and stopping an acquisition Stop acquisition can occur on a different channel than start acquisition stop acquisition can be triggered via modes 2 or 4 described below Pre trigger is supported with fixed or variable pre trigger periods WBK41 Trigger Sources Six individually selectable for star
53. WBK16 pg 38 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module WBK17 Counter Input Module with Quadrature Encoder Support For use with WaveBook 516 512A 516A and 516E Description 1 Hardware Setup 3 Configuration 3 Power 3 Using Fastener Panels to Stack Modules 4 Functional Concepts 4 Input Coupling 4 Analog Filtering 5 Comparator 6 Debounce Module T Terms Applicable to Counter Modes 11 Counter Options 11 Counter Totalize Mode 12 Period Mode 14 Pulsewidth Mode 17 Timing Mode 19 Encoder Mode 20 Digital Inputs 29 Digital Outputs 30 Pattern Detection and Data Markers 31 Software Support 31 Fuse Replacement 36 WBK17 Specifications 37 Description COUNTER INPUT _ r POWER OUT IN DIGITAL EXPANSION OUT 3 3 ee ACTIVE Front Panel i wll ne 4 eee COMLH LH COMLH LH COMLH LH COMLH LH COM COM DIG IN TRG CLK WBK17 CHi CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 5 15 MADE IN U S A COUNTER ENCODER MODULE ieee EPD a Vitis Caia Rear Panel Se SE iir Mamie E OCJo oC jo CC LO POWER IN POWER OUT EXPANSION EXPANSION gt c ani USA hb ac TONOS vem DIGITAL OUTPUTS CONTROL IN CONTROL OUT Bice Oh Signa orc E WBK17 Modules Showing Front and Rear Panels Front Panel Counter Input snap in terminal blocks Includes connections for Common
54. WBK17 module Each signal A B Z can be connected as a single ended connection with respect to the common ground or as a true differential input Both encoders can draw their power from the WBK17 s power output connector Connect the encoder s power input to the 5V or 15V power connect the return to common ground COM on the same connector The programming setup given below is just a representative of possible options Two Encoders Example Setup Example Programming Setup Encoder1 A Encoder Mode 4X option 16 bit counter Latch on SOS Map channel Clears the counter set Map channel to 3 Encoder1 B Period Mode 1Xperiod option 16 bit counter Map channel doesn t gate Ticksize to 200ns Encoder1 Z Counter in Totalize mode stop at the top 16 bit counter No connection Encoder2 A Encoder2 B Encoder2 Z WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 23 WBK17 pg 24 There are other useful encoder options for example analog filtering If the encoders are known to run in a noisy environment then some analog filtering may be in order A low pass filter with 20kHz or 100kHz cutoff frequency can be used to reduce extraneous high frequency normal mode noise that may come in on the encoder lines In addition if the encoder is connected in differential mode any common mode noise will be reduced by the common mode rejection of the WBK17 s front end differential amplifier typically 70dB I
55. WBK18 pg 7 Source Level Source Level refers to the transducer bias current and is not to be confused with the excitation source that is discussed on pages 4 and 14 The current Source Level column of WaveView s main window is used to turn the transducer bias current on at a current value of 4 mA or to turn the transducer bias current off Click on a cell in the Source Level column to make the cell active and then change its setting to 4 mA or to off according to the application If a channel is connected to a transducer that requires a current source set the source level to 4 mA otherwise set the source level to off TEDS Transducer Electronic Data Sheet TEDS is a purchased option that enables WBK18 modules to access calibration information from TEDS compatible sensors The WBK18 automatically scales the readings and sets the range according to the information stored on the sensor This is done independently for each TEDS associated channel providing that Yes appears in the TEDS Data cell right hand column following figure 38 WaveView WAVEVIEW CFG Bel x File Edit View System wer E E 19 p PAN Eh Pa 0 1 Channel Configuration z 0 MoN Use TEDS Data sE Label Readings Units Range ae al Mone LPF Cutoff a ee ae Wee CtrLo CtrHi Dig counts 0 7 WaveBook 516 Off CHO1 Yy 10 to 10 No 0 Bypass 20000 00 D 2 WaveBook 516 Off CHO2 Yy 10 to 10 No 0 Bypass 2000
56. a ING No i EE MOSFET C Amplifier l Input NJI Constant Bias Curent P i Voltage eee Crystal R 30 VDC 1 Power i D a Sensor sis OT WBKIA Accelerometer Circuit The MOSFET circuit will bias off at approximately 12 V in the quiet state As the system is excited voltage is developed across the crystal and applied to the gate of the MOSFET This voltage will cause linear variation in the impedance of the MOSFET and a proportional change in bias voltage This voltage change will be coupled to the WBK 14 input amplifier through the capacitor C The value of R and the internal capacitance of the piezoelectric crystal control the low frequency corner Units weighing only a few grams can provide high level outputs up to 1 V g with response to frequencies below 1 Hz Accelerometer Specification Parameters WBK14 pg 6 Noise in Accelerometers The noise floor or resolution specifies lowest discernible amplitude minimum g that can be measured There are two main sources of noise as follows e Noise from the crystal and microcircuit inside the accelerometer Some types of crystals such as quartz are inherently more noisy than others A good noise floor is 10 to 20 uV e Noise from electrical activity on the mounting surface Since the signal from the accelerometer is a voltage 60 Hz or other voltages ground loop etc can interfere with the signal The best protection is to electrically isolate the accelerome
57. a low pass second order filter and can attenuate or amplify high frequency signals depending on the output impedance of the accelerometer electronics Generally this is not a problem with low frequency vibration 10 Hz to 2000 Hz For measurements above 2000 Hz and cables longer than 100 ft the possibility of high frequency amplification or attenuation should be considered The maximum frequency that can be transmitted over a given length of cable is a function of both the cable capacitance and the ratio of the maximum peak signal voltage to the current available from the constant current source Frequency Response to 5 of eA ECM Ceo SET Maximum Output Signal Amplitude i Sass 1000 5 5 kHz 1 1 kHz Where f Maximum frequency in Hz K K 3 45 x10 Kis the scale factor to convert Farads to picoFarads and Amperes to milliAmperes and a factor to allow cable capacitance to charge to 95 of the final charge p d 4 C Cable capacitance in picoFarads TU V Maximum peak measured voltage from sensor in volts Icc Constant current from current source in mA Ib Current required to bias the internal electronics typically 1 mA Icc Ib 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module Fuse Replacement for WBK18 CAUTION Turn OFF the power to and UNPLUG the WBK18 module and all connected equipment Remove all signal I O lines from the unit Electric shock or damage to equipment can result even under low voltage cond
58. a part of product support when your software is installed The default location is the Programs Group The documentation includes API information pinouts troubleshooting and a great deal of material regarding specific DBK cards and modules gt Documents can be read directly from the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button located on the opening screen gt Hardcopy versions of the manuals can be ordered from the factory IG 6 WBK40 amp WBK41 967896 Installation Guide WBK61 and WBK62 High Voltage Adapters Description The WBK61 and WBK62 are single channel high voltage adapters that can be used with WaveBooks or with WBK10A expansion modules In addition WBK61 and WBK62 can be used with WBK11A WBK12A and WBK13A signal conditioning cards WBK61 and WBK62 Product Comparison Maximum Voltage 1000 Vpeak on either input reference to 100 Vpeak on either input reference to earth ground earth ground Maximum Differential 2000 Vpeak if neither input exceeds 200 Vpeak if neither input exceeds Voltage 1000 Vp rating to earth ground 100 Vp rating to earth ground The channel output connection for both the WBK61 and WBK62 voltage adapters is made through a BNC to BNC coupler Each model has two signal input connections one for low signal input and the other for high signal input The input channels are resistively isolated from ground providing for safe connection of the test device Series resistors for
59. and WBK41 1 nindni a A Front Panel Connectors 2 i Rear Panel Connectors 4 eo Setup 5 cones Hardware Setup 5 Software Setup 14 Operational Aspects 14 Block Diagrams 14 WBK40 14 Channel Thermocouple Input Module Thermocouple Measurements 15 Front amp Rear Vi Digital O WBK41 Only 16 E Synchronous Input Operations 16 Output Channel Configuration 17 Asynchronous I O Operations 18 Analog Outputs WBK47 Only DBK46 Required 19 Using a Temperature Calibrator 20 CE Compliance 21 Fuse Replacement 23 P1 DB37 Connector Pinout 26 P2 DB37 Connector Pinout WBK41 Only 27 mec Specifications 28 WBK41 WBK40 amp WBK41 Installation Guide p n 1066 0901 Multi Function Thermocouple I O Module Front amp Rear Views Overview What are WBK40 and WBK41 The WBK40 is a 14 Channel Thermocouple Input Module The WBK41 is a Multi Functional I O Module The latter includes the thermocouple functionality of the WBK40 and additional features as will be discussed shortly Both the WBK40 and WBK41 attach to any one of the three DB25 parallel expansion ports on a WaveBook 516E or WBK25 Because the modules each have a built in 16 bit 200 kHz A D converter measurements do not consume valuable sampling time from the host WaveBook s 1 MHz A D converter For this reason there are no sp
60. and WBK62 include safety style banana jacks for the high WBK61 and WBK62 and low inputs and 60 inch 152 cm cables with probe tips and alligator clips for easy input connection WBK67 High Voltage Adapter with 200 1 Voltage Divider 1 channel WBK62 High Voltage Adapter with 20 1 Voltage Divider 1 channel WBK Option Cards and Modules 988397 Introduction 3 How do WaveBooks and WBkKs Interrelate WaveBooks and WBKs interrelate when they become part of the same data acquisition system The relationship can be broken down into enhancement expansion or both The following illustrates the relationship of various system components 4 Notebook PE wilh Witwer mew Ethernet 7 z ii m WEK23 ER Pt interface ed Hugin board 2 EE Parallel Expansion H ea Card amp Cable g ViSKI0 64 Gul Fale ie hierar Card ee WEKao128 ee 1265 Minte berr WEEKS Exernat imeta for Wine Book amp EGO Seres Jom o mi m EA o Iel THLE ey pst ay a ey ye ee g a Wily aBooks 166 Stra net based 46 bit 1 MHz Date Aoquiiion Syston VibweBook 5164 Tebi 1 H Dai Acquistion Sysiam Pre Book 2A 13 5 tf Date Acquistion System DBx S04 Rechargeable Baer cahon Faced COEK 344 Unien pta ba Power Supply k EKG 14 0 pannel a TE Wed ule Ut ni DBK WHR 14 Channial TIC LS Pataca He i4eChanns TE P icgube are
61. and can be used for linking two or more compatible devices together via the device s 37 pin connectors The bottom end of the T Cable is a dual connector consisting of both a female connector and a 37 pin male connector As seen in the following illustration the T Cable s 37 pin male connector can be used for Daisy Chain applications Each T Cable comes with three sets of screws These are designated in the diagram as short medium and long Use the short screws to secure the single female end of the cable to the device and use the medium length screws to secure a cable s dual end connector Use the long screws for daisy chain applications when you are connecting one T Cable to another T Cable Tighten screws snug only do not over tighten pg 10 WBK40 amp WBK414 o 926896 Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules Connecting to the Device Interface Side WBK41 System Examples WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard To avoid possible injury and equipment damage turn off power to devices and connected equipment prior to setup 3 DBK21 Cards ina DBK10 emmm onma en DBK84 n DBK84 ee AS em a ma me mas mmf 33 4S 34 23 24S 2S SS SSS SS Ss Ses WBK41 m DIGITALO POWER CNTR TMR DACS WaveBook 516E SOO000000 00 e Ethernet Channel Input Side Device Interface Side A WaveBook 516E with a WBK41 two DBK84 Modules amp three DBK21 Cards in a DBK10 Device Interface Connections seen in th
62. as expansion ports 1 through 3 Each of these parallel ports can be attached to one of the designated acquisition devices via a parallel cable The ports cannot be used for auxiliary devices such as printers and scanners 919896 WBK235 s three parallel ports are labeled as expansion ports 1 through 3 They are used to connect to WaveBook DaqBook WBK40 and WBK41 systems via parallel cables The ports cannot be used for other parallel devices such as printers and scanners p n 1087 0901 rev 2 0 Description WBK25 pg 2 Front Panel The left side of the WBK25 front panel will include a MAC Media Access Control Address Label The label displays the device serial number in both barcode and base 10 formats The label also provides the Ethernet address MAC Address which is derived from the serial number in hexadecimal If prompted to enter a serial number in software use the base 10 number After doing so conversion to a hexadecimal number for use in addressing will be automatic Note If your network administrator asks you for a MAC number or a MAC Address provide him or her with the hexadecimal number that is located at the bottom of the label Rear Panel The WBK25 rear panel includes a power switch DIN5 power in connector Ethernet port 5 LEDs 2 of which are on the Ethernet port and three parallel ports These items are described below in order as they appear from left to right EXPANSION PORT 2 EXPANSION
63. assumes the Min Load value is equal to the quiescent load value Calibration Example using the Name Plate Method and a Load Cell The following example uses Name Plate calibration with a load cell Load cells come with amV V specification frequently referred to as sensitivity which means for each volt of excitation at maximum load the load cell will output a specific millivolt level Consider a 3000 pound load cell rated at 3 mV V using 10 V of excitation When the load cell is used a 10 pound platform will be placed on it Although the load cell is rated at 3000 pounds 1500 pounds is the maximum load that will ever be applied for this example From the above data we know the following parameters e Excitation Voltage 10 volts e Maximum Applied Load 1500 pounds e Quiescent Tare 10 pounds e Sensitivity 3 mV V e Full Rated Load 3000 pounds Note These 5 values are used in the following figure WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 33 WBK16 pg 34 To calibrate this load cell using the sensor calibration program L 0 0 i i i i D Enter the 5 necessary parameters see preceding bulleted list into the calibration spreadsheet These values are used in the following figure in which a load cell is connected to channel 7 1 Once the parameters are entered into the spreadsheet select Calibrated Enabled Channels either from the menu bar or from the tool bar After the calibration is complete
64. available for this column see Units This column is used for calibrating any sensor using the Shunt or 2 Point Automatic calibration method The number must equal the input value in mV of the first point in the calibration To change the value select the box and enter a number between 10000 and 10000 The fill option is available for this column see Units Point 1 This column is used for calibrating any sensor using the Shunt 2 Point Automatic or Units 2 Point Manual calibration method The number must equal the value in the selected units of the first point in the calibration To change the value select the box and enter a number between 1000000 and 1000000 The fill option is available for this column see Units Used for calibrating any sensor using the 2 Point Automatic calibration method The number must equal the input value in mV of the second point in the calibration To change the value select the box and enter a number between 10000 and 10000 The fill option is available for this column see Units Point 2 This column is used for calibrating any sensor using the 2 Point Automatic or 2 Point Units Manual calibration method The number must equal the value in the selected units of the second point in the calibration To change the value select the box and enter a number between 1000000 and 1000000 The fill option is available for this column see Units WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 27 dis
65. board surfaces and onboard components Only handle boards by their edges or ORBs if applicable Ensure boards do not come into contact with foreign elements such as oils water and industrial particulate Be careful to avoid component damage while the WBK16 is open Always remove the WBK16 LC from the unit before soldering resistors You can easily install a WBK16 LC as follows Note If a shunt calibration resistor is to be mounted on the WBK16 LC it should be done prior to the installing the WBK16 LC Shunt calibration resistors should be soldered in location R1 on the WBKIO6 LC 1 Review the preceding CAUTIONS 2 Remove the StrainBook or WBK16 from power and disconnect the unit from all external devices and signals 3 Observe proper ESD precautions Remove the cover from the StrainBook or WBK16 5 Locate the CN 115 channel header s in which the WBKI16 LC modules are to be installed 6 Remove one shunt jumper from each of the two 3 pin headers The 3 pin headers are located beside the CN 115 16 pin header sockets see figure 7 Remove the CN 115 1 or CN 115 to expose the header socket 8 Carefully plug the module into the header socket CN 115 Headers for CH1 and CH2 Re install the cover to the StrainBook or WBK16 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module Calibration Using WaveView Reference Note The Calibration Parameters Tab Selected section of Chapter 4 includes screen shots and text related to the f
66. companies such as Analog Devices and Texas Instruments This text aims to not supplant those resources but to provide most users with sufficient knowledge to avoid most alias problems through proper filter and sampling rate configuration For a given sampling rate Fs input signals of frequency up to Fs 2 will be processed correctly However input signals above Fs 2 are subject to aliasing For example a sampling rate of 100 kHz can process signals up to 50 kHz without aliasing An input signal of 90 kHz however will be aliased Specifically it will appear in the sampled data as a signal of frequency Fs Fyy which in this case is 100 kHz 90 kHz 10 kHz Aliasing and its prevention should be a consideration in all sampled data systems This is especially important in mechanical vibration measurements because most mechanical systems exhibit a resonance apart from their fundamental frequency That is there may be signal energy present that has the potential to be aliased that is unknown to the user And the worst part of aliasing is that its effects are indistinguishable from real input signals That is in the given example it is not apparent to the user whether the 10 kHz energy is real or an alias Aliasing Protection using the WBK18 The WBK18 provides alias rejection via its 8 pole filter This filter has an Gain dB extremely steep roll off characteristic very closely achieving an ideal brick wall response It consequently p
67. edge on the mapped channel Zeroes are returned in the scan until one complete time measurement has been taken At that point the value time in ticks is latched and output to the WaveBook until the next time measurement has been completed Rising edges on the input channel will clear the counter and falling edges on the mapped channel will latch the output of the counter at that time If the scan period is much slower than the rate of time frames coming available on the two channels then the data will miss some time frames The scan period can be decreased to capture more time frames The data returned is interpreted as time measured in ticks This data represents the number of ticksize intervals counted during the timing measurement There are four timebase settings 20 ns 200 ns 2 us and 20 us These are often referred to as tick sizes The WBK17 uses a 50 MHz 10 ppm oscillator as a timing source If the input signal has a poor slew rate the timing mode will provide variant results dependant upon the comparator threshold Channel Input n ee a ee a Mapped Channel Input i Gen a a Example of One Channel in Timing Mode WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 19 TIMING OPT2 This determines whether the time is to be measured with a 16 bit Counter Low or 32 bit Counter High counter Since time measurements always have the stop at the top option enabled this option dictates whether the measurement has a range of 0
68. example below CN 115 1 is being used to create a half bridge configuration with two Bridge Completion Resistors BCRs and three Shunt resistors The half bridge to the left using standard resistors 1s functionally the same as the half bridge on the right using precision resistors The center illustration represents an unpopulated card to permit reading of the silk screen za za A T Ya em ATY em Seen Aa a de ip ia ot cont Ste cnt Ste RAIH s0 HRC1 SCH HOO SO HOO SCH HOO Beoeseeee 7 Heeoeeee Heoeeeee IOtech Inc IOtech Ine IOtech Inc 2005 2005 MEE Baa BCR S eeesegesas amp SEEE Using Standard Resistors Shown Unpopulated Using Precision Type Resistor BCR at RGT Top Side of Cara BCR at RG Top Side of Cara Top Side of Cara J101 8 9 Hm ES ZOTCTOTNY 00o o _LHY O vu als J101 ONES Using Standard Resistors gt a A a Using Precision Type Resistors BCR at RH1 BCR at RH Shunts at RB1 RD1 RF1 Shunts at RB RD RE Plug In Side of Cara Plug In Side of Cara i For the functions listed in the preceding table internal WBK16 configurations still apply as indicated on pages 8 through 12 How to Interpret Resistor Connection Points The CN 115 1 plug in card s silk screen makes use of dual templates For example if we look at the RG RG1 section on the top side of the card we will see a small resistor image RG1 w
69. expressed as a percent of data lost A long ping round trip time for example gt 50 ms and or any packet loss indicates a slow network that is not optimized If the Pinging Device Test fails a lt Details gt button will appear just above the lt Resource Test gt button If this is the case click the lt Details gt button to obtain possible causes and possible solutions TCP Transmission Control Protocol Connection Test The result of the TCP test will be either passed or failed If the TCP test failed a lt Details gt button will appear If this is the case click the lt Details gt button to obtain possible causes and possible solutions This completes the procedure for connecting a WBK25 to the Ethernet At this point you should refer to the more detailed user documentation that applies to the other devices that are included in your data acquisition system e g WaveBooks WBK options DaqBooks and DBK options User manuals typically include pinouts information on system explanation data acquisition and links to software and programming documents in PDF format Reference Notes For additional device and system information gt DaqBook 2000 Series users should refer to the DagBook 2000 Series User s Manual p n 1103 0901 and the DBK Options Manual p n 457 0905 gt WaveBook and WBK option users should refer to both the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 and the WBK Options Manual p n 489 0902 gt Programm
70. in series Its 3dB cutoff frequency is settable as well from 10 Hz to 50 kHz in a 1 2 5 progression It provides tighter amplitude and offset accuracy than 8 pole mode at the expense of reduced alias protection due to its more gradual roll off It is most commonly used in proximity sensor measurements where the DC component of the input signal is critical Additionally the filter can be bypassed altogether resulting in a signal bandwidth of up to 200 kHz When the LPF Low Pass Filter is in the Bypass mode the bandwidth of the system depends on the coupling mode selected For the 0 1 Hz and 10 Hz selections the bandwidth is approximately 190 kHz For the DC selection the bandwidth is approximately 130 kHz For the 25 V range the bandwidth is approximately 120 kHz Reference Note Application information regarding the 2 pole and Bypass settings of the filter is provided in the section entitled Using the 2 Pole Filter and Bypass page 11 Overrange Detection Each WBK18 channel is equipped with overrange detection circuitry Use of this feature insures that all data collected during an acquisition did not exceed a user specified level set as a percentage of range In its most common use with the level set to 100 the user is notified if the input signal exceeded the input full scale range even momentarily This protection is critical for overrange signals result in clipped data that significantly corrupts FFT analysis This error is
71. input is ground referenced the input 1s non differential and pull down resistors are not required A floating source would still result in a truly differential input WBK16 pg 11 Connecting to the DB9 Channel Input Connector Remove the module from power and disconnect the unit from all externally connected equipment prior to connecting cables signal lines and or removing the cover to install or remove components Electric shock or damage to equipment can result even under low voltage conditions Take ESD precautions packaging proper handling grounded wrist strap etc Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components Only handle boards by their edges or ORBs if applicable Ensure boards do not come into contact with foreign elements such as oils water and industrial particulate The figure shows the pinout of the DB 9 connector used for channels 1 through 8 located on the front panel The strain gage will connect directly to these pin sockets unless the CN 189 DB9 Adapter option is used The CN 189 option is discussed in the following sub section WBK16 s DB9 Pinout A quality cable such as the CA 177 strain gage cable can improve performance of the system especially with long cable runs Use cable with an overall shield connected to the DB9 metal shell Twisted pair cable with paired leads for signal input excitation output and remote sense input is also beneficial The wires should be s
72. integral 6 ft to 10 32 Electrical Grounding Case Grounded Design In case grounded designs the common lead on the internal impedance matching electronics 1s tied to the accelerometer case The accelerometer base stud assembly forms the signal common and electrically connects to the shell of the output connector Case grounded accelerometers are connected electrically to any conductive surface on which they are mounted When these units are used take care to avoid errors due to ground noise lsolated Base Design To prevent ground noise error many accelerometers have base isolated design The outer case base of the accelerometer is isolated electrically off ground by means of an isolation stud insert The proprietary material used to form the isolation provides strength and stiffness to preserve high frequency performance Cable Driving WBK18 pg 20 Operation over long cables is a concern with all types of sensors Concerns involve cost frequency response noise ground loops and distortion caused by insufficient current available to drive the cable capacitance The cost of long cables can be reduced by coupling a short 1 m adapter cable from the accelerometer to a long low cost cable like RG 58U or RG 62U with BNC connectors Since cable failure tends to occur at the accelerometer connection where the vibration is the greatest only the short adapter cable would need replacement Capacitive loading in long cables acts like
73. internal half bridge may be any two matched values but the remaining resistor must match the external quarter bridge value precisely Three of these values may be installed simultaneously when connected as shown below the connector pins determine which resistor is used With all three values installed WBK16 can accommodate all three quarter bridge values without changing the internal resistors mooo Sense Excitation CN 115 Header rPFWOUMMMNY AT A 120 ohm resistor and its corresponding Switches shunt value may be installed as shown External accessed Bridge through Excitation Internal Bridge Completion Tarse Three Wire Quarter Bridge Using RA 120 Ohm nominal B Shunt Resistor lt lt a Sense Excitation CN 115 Header PFWOOUMMTNY AT A 350 ohm resistor and its corresponding shunt value may be installed as shown Switches External accessed Bridge through software Excitation Internal Bridge g Sense ompletion Three Wire Quarter Bridge Using RC 350 Ohm nominal D Shunt Resistor Moo Sense Excitation CN 115 Header rWOOUMMmMOT A 1000 ohm or other value resistor and 1 Switches its corresponding shunt value may be External accessed installed as shown Bridge through software Excitation Internal Bridge Completion Sense Three Wire Quarter Bridge Using RE 1 KOhm nominal F Shunt Resistor WBK16 pg 10 949794 WBK16
74. jE jE jE 0 Note Changing these values wall not change the LPF cutott frequencies Consult the StrainBook and WaveBook Manuals for installation of frequency cutoff selection resistors Cancel Accessing the LPF Corner Frequencies Dialog Box Note The LPF Corner Frequencies Dialog Box is accessed from WaveView s main window by selecting Advanced Features from the System pull down menu Reference Note If creating your own programs refer to the Programmer s Manual p n 1008 0901 as needed PDF Note During software installation Adobe PDF versions of user manuals automatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support The default location is in the Programs group which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 35 WBK16 User Tips There are some aspects of the WBK16 that can cause user difficulties if misunderstood The following tips should increase your level of understanding and help you get the most out of your WBK16 1 Keep things cool Operating 120 ohm bridges on 10 volts of excitation is possible with the WBK16 but the strain gages and bridge completion resistors must both be rated for this voltage or there will be excessive drift as the gages and resistors heat up The 120 ohm bridge completion resistors we offer part number R 17 120 are of insufficien
75. line is also visible This partial view of the data acquisition device shows its connection to the ground line It also shows two ferrite collars the foremost of which is clamped to the power cable The background collar is clamped onto the Ethernet cable p n 1077 0901 rev 1 0 928396 WBK30 WaveBook Memory Options Description lt WO lt Uol Ua FEE U e wl Ual Uo Acquired data Memory 4 Data to PC Controller connects to J101 in WaveBook U J HBE o lJ J J HBE U Ss U Sz UO S UO S WBK30 Block Diagram The WBK30 is a DRAM based memory board that installs inside a WaveBook There are three models of WBK30 available each significantly increases the capacity of WaveBook s standard data buffer of 64 K samples Capacities are as follows e WBK30 16 16 MB e WBK30 64 64 MB e WBK30 128 128 MB Benefits of using the larger and enhanced data buffer include The WBK30 Pre Trigger Mode compensates for a slow connection slow disk drive or limited memory in the host PC In addition there is a reduction of the host computer s CPU load during pre trigger acquisition This reduction is obtained by internal buffer management The WBK30 Overflow Protection mode prevents data loss when an acquisition is stopped deliberately or due to buffer overflow On disarm data in WBK30 is preserved an
76. makes externally connected shunt calibration a little less exacting if the shunt resistor is not connected directly across the desired bridge arm A shunt calibration resistor provided internally by the transducer manufacturer will usually require connection to an externally accessible node to activate the shunt The variations in connection requirements require the flexibility of a non committed dry contact as provided by the WBK16 LC module Shunt calibration generally is done by shunting one arm of a bridge with four active arms For this reason it is recommended that simulated signal levels be limited to about 20 of the full scale output of the transducer Attempting to achieve a high level output with a single resistor will introduce non linearity errors into the picture For example a 5000 pound load cell should be shunt calibrated with a resistance that will introduce about a 1000 pound output signal Attempting to produce a 4000 pound signal by shunting one of the bridge legs will generally not produce the same quality result Installation WBK16 pg 18 Remove the WBK16 module from power and disconnect the unit from all externally connected equipment prior to connecting cables signal lines and or removing the cover to install or remove components Electric shock or damage to equipment can result even under low voltage conditions Take ESD precautions packaging proper handling grounded wrist strap etc Use care to avoid touching
77. or WBK41 POWER Lights when power is available to the WBK40 or WBK41 and the Power switch is in the 1 Power ON position SYNC Ports 2 Two SYNC Ports are available to synchronize sampling with other connected devices that have SYNC ports for example the WaveBook 516E Cable CA 74 1 or CA 74 5 is typically used to provide a synchronization link from a WBK40 or WBK41 module to another device PARALLEL PORT The Parallel Port is a DB25 connector that is used to connect the WBK40 or WBK41 toa WaveBook 516E or WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module DBK84 Note 1 DBK 84 SSAA SA 699995 99 98 a e a See CA 37 1T j DBK84 TT DBKS CA 37 1T WBK41 e Eee 3 ZZA WBK41 k RR ee Re Q PARALLEL PORT CA 35 1 2 CA 74 1 WaveBook 516E E n WaveBook 516E Channel Input Side Device Interface Side One of Many Possible WBK41 Based Systems Note 1 Each DBK84 module requires a unique address setting as explained on page 13 pg 4 WBK40 amp WBK44 o 926896 Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules Reference Note For a quick set up involving connecting a WBK40 or a WBK41 to a WaveBook 516E or to a WBK25 refer to the WBK40 amp WBK41 Installation Guide p n 1066 0901 For convenience a copy has been placed after the specifications section of this document Hardware Setup for WBK40 and WBK41 WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard To avoid possible injury and equipment damage turn off power to devices and connected equipm
78. or output Input Characteristics TTL compatible Output Characteristics ALS TTL output in series with 33 ohms Output Updates Outputs may be changed via program control Input Output Protection Diode clamped to ground and 5V Period Counter Operation Internal counter calculates and reports the external clock s period counter can be read with each scan Clock Counter Accuracy lt 0 02 error Clock Counter Range 0 01 Hz to 100 kHz General Specifications Warm up 30 minutes to rated specifications Environment Operating 0 50 C 0 95 RH non condensing Storage 20 to 70 C Power Consumption 516E 1 8A max 15 VDC 1516 516A amp 512A 1 4A max 15VDC Input Power Range 10 VDC to 30 VDC Input Power Fuse F201 4A MINI ATO See chapter 9 for fuse replacement instructions Vibration MIL STD 810E Category 1 and 10 PC Communication 516E 10 100BaseT Ethernet 1516 516A amp 512A Enhanced Parallel Port EPP Channel Capacity 516E 8 built in voltage channels expandable up to 72 channels via WBK options In addition WaveBook 516E can accommodate up to 3 WaveBook 516A 512A or WBK4O0 options in any combination Each added on WaveBook can be expanded up to 72 channels The maximum WBK41 capacity is 224 T C channels 4 analog output channels 272 digital I O channels and 6 counter timer channels 516 516A amp 512A 8 built in voltage channels expandable up to 72 channels via WBK options Dimensions
79. rear panel s SDIN POWER IN connector If this fuse has blown the WBK40 or WBK41 module will not power up Factory Part Number FU 8 4 Littelfuse Part Number 297 004 Littelfuse Body Color Code Pink Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 23 You will need the following Phillips Screwdriver 3AG Fuse Puller or needle nose pliers 3 16 inch hex nut driver Grounding wrist strap and associated anti static pad e Replacement fuse F201 Needle nose pliers can be used to pull MINI ATO fuses but should not be used to insert fuses Observe the Caution and the important note on page 23 of this document module prior to beginning this fuse replacement procedure 1 Ifyou have not already done so turn OFF the power to and UNPLUG the WBK40 or WBK41 module and all connected equipment Remove all signal I O lines from the unit 2 Remove the Jackscrews from the P1 and PARALLEL PORT connectors In addition WBK41 users must remove Jackscrews from the P2 connector The following figure shows the screw locations 3 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the two Rear Panel Screws and the Bottom Panel Screw Rear Panel Screw P1 and P2 Jackscrews Rear Panel Screw Parallel Port Jackscrews Bottom Panel Screw WBK41 Rear Panel Screw Removal 4 Remove the Rear Panel from the rest of the chassis F201 Fuse Location pg 24 WBK40 amp WBK41 o 926896 Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules 5
80. reduce this effect Frequency Response An accelerometer s frequency response is the ratio of the sensitivity measured at frequency f to the basic sensitivity measured at 100 Hz This response is usually obtained at a constant acceleration level typically 1 gor 10 g Convention defines the usable range of an accelerometer as the frequency band in which the sensitivity remains within 5 of the basic sensitivity Measurements can be made outside these limits if corrections are applied Care should be taken at higher frequencies because mounting conditions greatly affect the frequency range see Mounting Effects in upcoming text Dynamic Range The dynamic measurement range is the ratio of the maximum signal for a given distortion level to the minimum detectable signal for a given signal to noise ratio The dynamic range is determined by several factors such as sensitivity bias voltage level power supply voltage and noise floor Bias Level Under normal operation a bias voltage appears from the output signal lead to ground There are two basic MOSFET configurations commonly used One exhibits a 7 8 V bias and the second a 9 12 V bias Operation of the two circuits is identical except for the available signal swing Thermal Shock Temperature Transients Piezoelectric accelerometers exhibit a transient output that is a function of a temperature s rate of change This thermal shock is usually expressed in g C and i
81. removed The lid must be securely screwed on during use Some things to remember e Before closing up an open WBK15 ensure no foreign objects are inside e Properly tighten all chassis screws before system use e Properly tighten the screw that retains the 5B module e Never plug in or unplug potentially hazardous connections with power applied to any connected equipment e Never attempt to change 5B modules or open the lid with power applied to the WBK15 You could short out internally exposed circuits and cause personal injury or equipment damage Reference Note Refer to the System Setup and Power Options chapter of the WaveBook User s Manual for detailed information regarding the power aspects of WaveBook systems Using Fastener Panels to Stack Modules WBK15 pg 4 For convenient mounting the WBK15 has the same footprint as other WBK modules and WaveBooks Fastener panels splice plates provide a means for stacking WaveBooks and modules Screw on handles are available for portable applications Reference Note For an illustration pertaining to mounting modules with fastener panels refer to the introduction of this manual When using WBK17 modules in conjunction with other WBK modules the WBK17 modules must be located closest to the WaveBook 516 or 516A due to the CA 217 cable length The order of the other WBK modules does not matter 988396 WBK15 5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module Fastener panels will parti
82. shows a good connection point for the PC ground b Use Washers the 6 32x5 16 screw and two 8 tooth washers orientated as illustrated to secure one Screw end of the ground line to the PC chassis T If using a notebook laptop PC connect one end of the ground line to a known earth i i ground Depending on the ground chosen you may need to use a screw other than the one supplied 2 On the data acquisition device locate an available threaded splice plate hole This will Line be used for attaching the ground line to the device as indicated in the second photo Ground 3 Use the 8 32x1 4 screw and two 8 tooth washers orientated as illustrated to secure the free end of the ground line to the chassis of the data acquisition device The second photo shows such a connection Install the Ferrite Inductive Collars 1 Place one ferrite collar at each end of the Ethernet cable Snap the two collars shut See photos 2 Place the remaining ferrite collar next to the DINS connector on the power cable Snap the collar shut 3 Use a tie wrap one per ferrite collar to secure each collar to its respective cable Tie wrap goes through lt lt this opening a 4 Optional Trim the excess tie wrap material While trimming use care to avoid cutting into the cables This completes the installation This partial view of the host PC shows the Ethernet cable with a ferrite collar The PC s connection to the ground
83. stop frequency over a selected sweep time duration The frequency sweep characteristic can be chosen to be linear or logarithmic and is distributed among 1280 discrete steps The transitions between steps are continuous in phase and in amplitude To configure make selections for the available parameters and then click the lt Start gt button Once a sweep is completed the waveform returns to its start frequency and is Swept again and again until stopped by the user or WaveView is terminated Note You can save output sine wave configuration files and open pre saved files as discussed in the upcoming section How to Save or Open Output Sine Wave Configuration Files page 17 926896 Wbk18 Output Sine Wave Configuration File i gt Output a continuous Sine Wave at a given amplitude and frequency Frequency in Hz 100 00 Amplitude in Volts pp 2o Continuous Tab Selected Wbkig Output Sine Wave Configuration File Sweep Time O Start Freg End Freg Output a continuous swept sine wave that changes from the Start frequency to the End frequency over the Sweep Time period Megs Start Freq End Freq ee 10 00 Hz s000 00 Hz fe aaa Sweep Time Amplitude 0 1 Sec fioo Vop Start Stop OF Sweep Tab Selected WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module Sweep Mode continued Cs T D g T 55 150 ms Example of a Linear Sweep Waveform 35 950 ms
84. switches represented in the schematics are controlled by software WBK16 pg 16 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module circuit BUT NEVER TO BOTH Doing so will create a short circuit that could damage equipment A Make the DB9 pin 2 connection to the low side or the high side of the External Shunt Resistor Low Side Connection S5ense Excitation External Bridge A see CAUTION WBK16 LC S Datla Excitation gt Sense Full Bridge with External Shunt Resistor DB9 Pin 2 Connected to the Low Side External Shunt Resistor High Side Connection ze A See CAUTION o Sense i Excitation External a T Bridge A gt WBK16 LC e Excitation 5ense Full Bridge with External Shunt Resistor DB9 Pin 2 Connected to the High Side circuit BUT NEVER TO BOTH Doing so will create a short circuit that could damage equipment A Make the DB9 pin 2 connection to the low side or the high side of the Note 1 The switches represented in the schematics are controlled by software WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 17 Caveats Transducers and load cells most often employ full bridges with four active strain gages to benefit from inherent temperature compensation and maximum output signal levels The mV V sensitivities vary from unit to unit but series resistors may be placed in the excitation lines to adjust them into a particular range window This technique
85. the value that gets returned is equal to 10 consecutive periods of the input channel 3 The number returned is 100 consecutive periods 4 The number returned is 1000 consecutive periods PERIOD OPT2 Determines whether the period is to be measured with a 16 bit Counter Low or 32 bit Counter High counter Since period measurements always have the stop at the top option enabled this option dictates whether the measurement has a range of 0 to 65535 ticks or 0 to 4 294 967 295 ticks PERIOD OPT4 Allows the mapped channel to gate the counter if desired When the mapped channel is high the counter is enabled When the mapped channel is low the counter is disabled but still holds the count value The mapped channel can be any other input channel or a detection signal 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module PERIOD OPT6 This allows a mapped channel s period to be measured instead of the input channel The mapped channel can be any other input channel post debounce or one of the detection signals on any channel This option allows the counter to be used with any other input channel post debounce or with one of the detection signals If the channel s input is used elsewhere for example gating another counter the counter for this channel does not need to go unused Period and Frequency Accuracy The WBK17 can measure the period of any input waveform It does this by counting the integral number of ticks that make
86. these measurements could be made in the acquisition along with the channel 4 position data and channel 5 period data It should be noted that the timing resolution of the Detect signals is the scan period Reduce the scan period if more resolution is needed Detect 5 can also be routed to a counter input of another channel that would otherwise go unused If Detect 5 was measured for pulsewidth the data returned in the acquisition would be the amount of time that the encoder velocity was greater than the setpoint If Detect 5 was measured for period the data returned in the acquisition would be the periodicity of the encoder velocity going beyond the setpoint If Detect 5 simply clocked a totalizing counter the data returned in the acquisition would be the number of times the encoder went beyond the setpoint velocity WBK17 pg 34 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Software Support WaveView contains special software features for WBK17 These features are discussed in the WaveView document module You can use WaveView s spreadsheet style GUI to select a specific counter mode AC DC coupling low pass filter cut off frequency and other WBK17 specific configuration parameters The WBK17 can be configured to make several different types of measurements at the same time but on different channels for example frequency period and quadrature encoder measurements A wide variety of setups is possible In addition to the Out of the Box W
87. to 10 V 5 to 5 V 2 to 2 V 1 to 1 V 0 5 to 0 5 V 0 2 to 0 2 V 0 1 to 0 1 V 05 to 05 V This range applies to WBK 10A only Programmable Gain Amplifier Gain Ranges x1 2 5 10 20 50 100 Weight 0 14 kg 0 3 Ib pg 2 WBK114A a 88B WK ITA SSH Card Accuracy and Noise Specifications a n Alone with a WBK11A Note 3 Voltage Input Noise Input Noise Range Accuracy Note 2 LSB rms Accuracy Note 2 LSB rms One Year 18 28 C DC 500KHz One Year 18 28 C DC 500KHz typical typical Note 4 reading range reading range owo orn oo 2 on oos 2 0 to 5V 10A 012 009 012 009 0 to 4V 516 Pow ome om 3 om ome 3 tam gt oe 10A onl otes oo oa o oe ea E C BE E vw owo o2 oo 2 o2 oo 2 50v 012 o8 2 012 osa 2 zov 012 009 2 012 o 2 onv o o 3 076 o1a o 5 to 5V 018 018 s 018 018 10A only piesa ara ator o Toa 0am tS ze O E 10A only Notes 1 Specifications assume differential input scan unfiltered 2 Accuracy specification is exclusive of noise 3 Unipolar ranges unavailable for a WaveBook 516 516A or 516E that has a WBK11A WBK12A or WBK13A option installed Unipolar mode is available with WBK10A and any option 4 Maximum limit is 1 3X typical WBK11A SSH Card 988396 WBK11A pg 3 WBK12A and WBK13A Progra
88. to both physical hardware connections and to setting up the WBK40 or WBK41 in the Daq Configuration control panel applet Setup information regarding complex systems is included in the WBK Options Manual p n 489 0902 and in the WaveBook User s Manual 489 0901 PDF versions of both documents can be accessed from the data acquisition CD from the lt View PDFs gt button on the CD s opening screen CAUTION Turn off power to the system devices and externally connected equipment before connecting cables Electric shock or damage to equipment can result even under low voltage conditions Take ESD precautions packaging proper handling grounded wrist strap etc Minimum System Requirements Reference Note Adobe PDF versions of user manuals will automatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product e PC system with Pentium Processor support The default location is in the Programs group which e Windows 2000 or Windows XP Note 1 can be accessed from the Windows Desktop You can also access documents directly from the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button located on the CD s opening screen Note 1 Consult the factory in regard to using other Windows operating systems e 64 Mbytes of RAM Power up Notice for WaveBook S16E and WBK25 Applications When powering up the data acquisition system it is important that the WaveBook S16E or WBK25 is powered last and that the most remote system components are p
89. within the data acquisition system s driver that includes function calls specific to the acquisition hardware and can be used with user written programs Several languages are supported A range of analog signals with positive and negative values e g 5 to 5 V see unipolar Buffer refers to a circuit or device that allows a signal to pass through it while providing isolation or another function without altering the signal Buffer usually refers to a A device or circuit that allows for the temporary storage of data during data transfers Such storage can compensate for differences in data flow rates In a FIFO First In First Out buffer the data that is stored first is also the first data to leave the buffer b A follower stage used to drive a number of gates without overloading the preceding stage c An amplifier which accepts high source impedance input and results in low source impedance output effectively an impedance buffer An amplifier used primarily to match two different impedance points and isolate one stage from a succeeding stage in order to prevent an undesirable interaction between the two stages Also see Buffer In reference to data acquisition channel simply refers to a single input or output entity In a broader sense an input channel is a signal path between the transducer at the point of measurement and the data acquisition system A channel can go through various stages buffers multiplex
90. you can configure any channel to bypass the programmable filter entirely resulting in a 1 pole low pass filter at about 500 kHz e Programmable Gain Amplifiers The cards programmable gain instrumentation amplifiers can be software selected to various gains on a per channel basis The gains are set prior to the beginning of an acquisition sequence and cannot be changed during an acquisition e Simultaneous Sample and Hold SSH WBK13 only In addition to the filtering capability of the WBK12A the WBK13A provides per channel SSH Simultaneous sampling of all channels occurs at the start of a scan sequence When using a WaveBook with an SSH channel enabled the per channel sample rates are reduced The rate reduction is the same as that which would occur if another channel were added The per channel rate with SSH enabled is 1 MHz nt where n is the number of active channels Programmable Low Pass Filter Cards 988396 WBK12A and WBK13A pg 1 P10 gt oi mates 500 Khz One of 8 Channels j gt REER Offset Adjust gt gai Diff Am LP Filter p with WaveBook i ps gt WaveBook E Anti Alias Switched Anti Clock gt J11 LP Filter Cap Filter LP Filter 9 44 gt Sample Hold on WBK13A not on WBK12A o bd 2 o 9 2 2 d kd o 9 2 9 6 oe so 9o og o4 oe oe og oe o 9o og oe o oe og LE XTD o Buffer Amplifier oo
91. 0 0 S H TOY 2 000 3000 0 0 0 S N 10 0 3000 0 S N 10 0 2 000 3000 0 0 0 S H 10 0 3000 0 0n 0 0 3000 0 no 2000A Scroll Bar is to the Right Li TE NLC Cakl Ty iss PSUR MSS Tule St Calibration Parameters Section of Window Two Views Obtained by Scroll Bar Movement Exc Volts Used to change the excitation voltage Choose between 10 0 5 0 2 0 1 0 5 and Off Changing the excitation voltage on any channel between one and four will change the value on all four lower channels Likewise changing the excitation voltage on any channel five through eight will change the value on all four upper channels Changing the Excitation Voltage here will also change the Source Level column in the WaveView Configuration main window Gage Factor Used for calibrating strain gages with the Name Plate calibration method To change this value select the box and enter a number greater than 0 and less than 1000 The fill option is available for this column see Units Sensitivity This column is used for calibrating a load cell or transducer using the Name Plate mV V calibration method To change this value select the box and enter a number greater than 0 and less than 1000 The fill option is available for this column see Units Shunt Resistor This column is used for calibrating any sensor using the Shunt calibration method The Ohm value must equal the value of the shunt resistor in ohms To change the value select the box and
92. 0 00 0 3 WaveBook 516 Off CHOS Yy 10 to 10 No 0 Bypass 20000 00 0 4 WaveBook 516 Off CHO4 y 10 to 10 No 0 Bypass 20000 00 0 5 WaveBook 516 Off CHO5 Y 10 to 10 No 0 Bypass 20000 00 0 6 WaveBook 516 Off CHO6 Yy 10 to 10 No 0 Bypass 20000 00 0 7 WaveBook 516 Off CHO y 10 to 10 No 0 Bypass 20000 00 0 8 WaveBook 516 Off CHOS Yy 10 to 10 No 0 Bypass 20000 00 St weKi8 On CHO3 0 g 51 04 to 51 04 No 0 2 Pole 200 00 DC Off HA wBK18 On CH10 0 toS No 0 8 Pole 5000 00 DC Off No 3 wBK18 Off CH11 g 25 52 to 25 52 No 0 Bypass 200000 00 DC Off Yes 4 weK18 Off CH12 y 5to5 No 0 Bypass 200000 00 DC Off 55 wBK18 Off CH13 g 5 1 to 5 1 No 0 Bypass 200000 00 DC Off Hee wBK18 Off CH14 y 5to5 No 0 Bypass 200000 00 DC Off 27 weK18 Off CH15 g 1 02 to 1 02 No 0 Bypass 200000 00 DC Off Yes 8 weK18 Off CH16 y 5to5 No 0 Bypass 200000 00 DC Off Li WaveView Configuration Window If no WBK18 channels are connected to a TEDS sensor the entire TEDS Data column including the heading will be grayed out When a channel Template Type IEEE 1451 4 template Template ID Accelerometer Manufacturer PCB does have a TEDS sensor it will have an associated cell You can click on the cell to access the Use TEDS Data pull down list which offers 3 Model Number 333 M O7 choices No Yes and Show Serial Number 16026 Sensitivity 97 9655 mV gq e No instructs WaveView not to use TEDS When TEDS is not used Fee i
93. 1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CHG CH7 CH8 LEDS Ready Power WBK16 Board Layout Configuration options on WBK16 include e Customization of low pass filter frequencies using resistor networks e Bridge completion resistor installation e Shunt calibration resistor installation Be careful to avoid component damage while WBK16 enclosure is open Always remove bridge completion headers CN 115 from the unit before soldering resistors in the headers WBK16 pg 4 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module A fan draws and exhausts air through vents in the WBK16 enclosure To maintain sufficient cooling it is important to keep the fan and vents free of obstruction Bridge Applications WBK16 can accommodate many different strain gage configurations All strain gage bridge configurations consist of a 4 element network of resistors The guarter half or full designation of a strain gage refers to how many elements in the bridge are strain variable A quarter bridge has 1 strain variable element a half bridge has 2 strain variable elements and a full bridge has 4 strain variable elements Full bridges generally have the highest output and best performance Output signal polarity is determined by whether the strain variable resistance increases or decreases with load where it is located in the bridge and how the amplifier inputs connect to it Configuration polarity is not important in WBK16 due to an internal software selected inversion stage This simpl
94. 1000 periods 16 bit or 32 bit 4 time bases to choose from 20 ns 200 ns 2 us 20 us any other channel can gate the period measurement Pulsewidth Mode Options 16 bit or 32 bit values 4 time bases to choose from 20 ns 200 ns 2 us 20 us any other channel can gate the pulsewidth measurement Timing Mode Options 16 bit or 32 bit values 4 time bases to choose from 20 ns 200 ns 2 us 20 us Encoder Mode Options x1 x2 x4 options 16 bit or 32 bit values Z channel clearing of the counter any other channel can gate the counter Digital Inputs Inputs 8 Digital Inputs Connector DB25 female Configuration 16TTL compatible pins Input Characteristics TTL compatible Input Output Protection Diode clamped to ground and to 5V Digital Outputs Outputs 8 Digital Outputs Connector Removable screw terminal block Output Type Open drain DMOSFET Output Pullup Resistor 27k Ohm to 5V Output Sink Current 150 mA output continuous 500 mA output peak lt 100 us 150 total continuous per bank of 8 outputs Output Voltage Range 0 to 5V no external pullup required 0 to 30V with external pullup resistor Output Resistance 10 Ohms maximum Note All digital outputs are fully programmable with masking Detection Circuit Digital Pattern Detection Choices Greater than value less than value inside the window outside the window Detection Setpoints Per Channel 16 Note that each detection setpoint can be asso
95. 2 988296 WBK30 Memory Options Software Setup Reference Note Refer to the WaveView Document Module for detailed information regarding WaveBook s out of the box data acquisition software If you intend to write your own applications programs refer to the WaveBook Programmers Manual 1008 0901 Both documents can be viewed directly from your data acquisition CD by using the lt View PDFs gt button located on the CD s opening screen WaveView WBK30 is supported by WaveView versions 7 2 and higher Check boxes in WaveView s Memory Module Tab allow you to enable or disable the Pre Trigger and or Overflow Protection modes You can access the Memory Module Tab as described below Note that both modes will be enabled by default when WaveView first detects the presence of a WBK30 System Options Performance Memory Module WBK17 To access the Memory Module Tab from WaveView s main window make the following selections 4 WBK30 Memory Module option card must be installed to enable these features 1 System pull down menu 2 Options 3 Memory Module m Pre Trigger Mode 53 m gemmage Made Allows you to use the full bandwidth of your instrument regardless of your computer s data transfer speed Some things you should know if you enable this mode the entire acquisition must fit within the WBK30 s memory the scan count will not update during acquisition this setting applies only when pre trigg
96. 220 mm D x 35 mm H 11 x 8 5 x 1 375 Weight 1 5 kg 3 1 Ibs Analog Inputs Channels 8 differential Input Connections COM CH high CH low Input Connectors Removable screw terminal blocks 2 channels per block Input Impedance 20K Ohm single ended 40K Ohm double ended Input Voltage ranges 50V to 50Volts specified 75 Volts to 75 Volts maximum Resolution 0 002307 V bit DC Accuracy 0 25 of reading 200 mV offset Noise 5 mVrms typical 10 mVrms maximum Common Mode Rejection 70 dB typical 0 to 60 Hz 40 dB guaranteed 0 to 60 Hz Coupling AC or DC programmable Analog Sampling Bandwidth DC to 1 MHz Filtering Programmable30 Hz 20 kHz 100 kHz Single pole low pass filter Comparator Input Threshold 12 5V to 12 5V referred to input programmable in 100 mV steps Threshold Accuracy 2 of setting plus 125 mV offset Input Hysteresis 50 mV minimum 100 mV maximum Input Frequency DC to 5 MHz Sensitivity 500 mVpp DC to 1 MHz 5 Vpp 1 MHz to 5 MHz Debounce Module Debounce Times 16 selections from 500 ns to 25 5 ms Positive or negative edge sensitive Glitch detect mode or debounce mode WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Five Programmable Modes Counter Period Pulsewidth Timing Encoder Counter Mode Options Totalize Clear on Read Rollover Stop at all Fs 16 bit or 32 bit any other channel can decrement the counter Period Mode Options Measure x1 x10 x100 or x
97. 4 is in encoder mode using channel 1 as the Z index therefore relative to Z position information will be acquired on channel 4 Channel 5 is the encoder s B signal input Channel 5 is in period mode the data being acquired will be inversely proportional to the encoder s velocity Two setpoints have been programmed one on channel 4 and the other on channel 5 Channel 4 s setpoint is a window setpoint Detect 4 will go high whenever the encoder s relative position is within the setpoint window Channel 5 s setpoint is a less than value setpoint Detect 5 will go high whenever the encoder s velocity is greater than the setpoint WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 33 ee 65545 Ch LowLlirut 527 OF Che HighLirmut Che LowLimut FO Detect3 Detection Example Channel 4 in Encoder Position Mode Channel 5 in Period Mode Detect 4 can be routed to the counter input of another channel that would otherwise be unused If Detect 4 was measured for pulsewidth the data returned in the acquisition would be the amount of time that the encoder position was within the setpoint window If Detect 4 was measured for period the data returned in the acquisition would be the periodicity of the encoder entering the setpoint window If Detect 4 simply clocked a totalizing counter the data returned in the acquisition would be the number of times the encoder entered the setpoint window Any or all of
98. 60 9 WBK15 pg 6 The user can then enter the values of m and b into the appropriate location using the facilities provided by compatible data acquisition software for example Wave View DaqView Personal DaqView LogView and TempView The software uses equation 9 to calculate signal values in engineering units from that point on 988396 WBK15 5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module WBK15 Specifications Name Function WBK15 Multi Purpose Isolated Signal Conditioning Module Connectors 2 BNC connectors mate with expansion signal input on the WaveBook 512 512A 516 516A 516E two 15 pin connectors mate with the WaveBook s Expansion Signal Control Module Capacity Eight 5B modules optional See atest catalog or contact your sales representative in regard to the types of 5B Modules available for your application Input Connections Removable 4 terminal plugs Weidmuller type BL4 PN 12593 6 or type BLTOP4 PN 13360 6 Power Requirements 10 to 30 VDC or 120 VAC with included adapter With 8 thermocouple type modules 12 VDC 0 25 A 15 VDC 0 20 A 18 VDC 0 2 A With 8 strain gage type modules 12 VDC 0 95 A 15 VDC 0 75A 18 VDC 0 65A Cold Junction Sensor Standard per channel Shunt Resistor Socket One per channel for current loop inputs Isolation Signal Inputs to System 1500 VDC 600 VDC for CE compliance Input Channel to Channel 1500 VDC 600 VDC for CE compliance Power Supply to System 50
99. 61010 1 1993 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory Use Part 1 General Requirements Environmental conditions include the following e indoor use e altitude up to 2000 m e temperature 5 C to 40 C 41 F to 104 F e maximum relative humidity 80 for temperatures up to 31 C 87 8 F decreasing linearly to 50 relative humidity at 40 C 104 F e mains supply voltage fluctuations not to exceed 10 of the nominal voltage e other supply voltage fluctuations as stated by the manufacturer e transient overvoltage according to installation categories overvoltage categories I II and III For mains supply the minimum and normal category is II e pollution degree I or II in accordance with IEC 664 Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 21 For clarification terms used in some Declarations of Conformity include pollution degree any addition of foreign matter solid liquid or gaseous ionized gases that may produce a reduction of dielectric strength or surface resistivity Pollution Degree I has no influence on safety and implies the equipment is at operating temperature with non condensing humidity conditions no conductive particles are permitted in the atmosphere warm up time 1s sufficient to avert any condensation or frost no hazardous voltages are applied until completion of the warm up period Pollution Degree II implies the expectation of occasi
100. CO DAC1 DAC2 and DAC3 Resolution 16 bits Data Buffer 256 Ksample Output Voltage Range 10V Output Current 10 mA Offset Error 0 0045V max Gain Error 0 01 Update Rate 100 kHz max 1 5 Hz min no minimum with external clock Settling Time 10 usec max to 1 LSB for full scale step Digital Feed thru a spike of up to 50 mV may occur on the DAC output each time that the DAC output is updated Clock Sources 4 programmable 1 Onboard D A clock independent of scanning input clock 2 Onboard scanning input clock 3 External D A input clock independent of external scanning input clock Digital I O 16 Channels accessed from front panel Terminal Block Connectors 24 channels accessed from the DB37 P2 connector on the on rear panel Channels 40 expandable up to 272 with external digital DBK options Input Scanning Modes 2 1 Asynchronous under program control at anytime relative to input scanning 2 Synchronous with input scanning Ports 3 x 8 bit from the rear panel DB37 P2 connector and 1 x 16 bit front panel screw terminal each port is programmable as input or output I O Levels TTL Sampling Update Rate 200 kHz max P2 Digital I O Characteristics Output Driver Resistor amp Pull up 33 series resistor with a 680 Q pull up to 5 V Current can only sink current source current from pull up resistor Output Voltage High Level 2 0 V min 4 mA 4 0 V min 1 mA Low Level 0 5 V min 4 mA Input Volta
101. EDS Support TEDS Transducer Electronic Data Sheet is a purchased option The TEDS feature enables a WBK18 module to access the calibration information that is stored within TEDS compatible sensors The WBK18 can read calibration information from sensors and automatically scale the readings from each sensor using the acquired calibration information TEDS support is a software option that can easily be added after the initial purchase of the WBK18 Reference Note Information regarding TEDS in relation to the WaveView software application begins on page 8 Excitation Source The WBK18 s AC excitation source is a sine wave based voltage source that is programmable in frequency from 1 Hz to 5 kHz and in discrete amplitudes from 100 mVp p to 10 Vp p Continuous sine sweep sine and custom sine modes are available It can be used as a test source for the input channels or as excitation for other system elements such as the amplifier for a shaker table All of its parameters are software controlled and its output is conveniently provided on a front panel BNC connection Detailed information on the excitation source and its operation can be found in the Software Setup section Do not confuse excitation source with the Source Level column in WaveView s main window as source level refers to transducer bias current see Source Level page 8 and not to the excitation source LEDs The right hand side of the WBK18 front panel includes 19 indicator
102. EEE E E REE CCEE EOS TEDS Microprocessor Communication and l Control Logic BNC 080 Excitation wae Filter and Waveform oa From Source Amplifier Generation Sy WaveBook Control Bus hag WBK18 Block Diagram Current Source with Transducer Fault Detection The WBK18 module provides constant current of 4mA to bias ICP transducers The bias current is sourced through the center conductor of the input channel BNC connector and returns to the WBK18 by the outer conductor The current source features an operating compliance of 24V and is short circuit and overvoltage protected Operating compliance refers to the highest voltage that can be applied without change of the current source value In the absence of a transducer the current source will output an open circuit voltage of 30V For applications that do not require bias the current source can be disconnected from the input via software control on a per channel basis When the current source is enabled the input voltage is continuously monitored with level detection circuitry Recognition of a voltage greater than 25V transducer open or less than 1V transducer short triggers a transducer fault condition for the affected channel This error is communicated to the user via a front panel LED and is also available through a software status request at the end of an acquisition When recognized an error is latched until the commencement of a new acquisition Consequently even intermittent faults are
103. Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 11 Timing Mode see page 19 OPT2 Determines whether the time is to be measured with a 16 bit counter Counter Low or a 32 bit counter Counter High Encoder Mode see page 20 OPT 1 0 Determines the encoder measurement mode 1X 2X or 4X OPT2 Determines whether the counter is 16 bits Counter Low or 32 bits Counter High OPT3 Determines which signal latches the counter outputs into the data stream going back to the WaveBook Start of scan or mapped channel OPT4 Allows the mapped channel to gate the counter OPTS Allows the mapped channel to clear the counter for Z reference Counter Totalize Mode The counter mode allows basic use of a 32 bit counter While in this mode the channel s input can only increment the counter upward When used as a 16 bit counter Counter Low one channel can be scanned at the 1MHz rate When used as a 32 bit counter Counter High two sample times are used to return the full 32 bit result Therefore a 32 bit counter can only be sampled at a 500kHz maximum rate If only the upper 16 bits of a 32 bit counter are desired then that upper word can be acquired at the 1MHz rate The first scan of an acquisition always zeroes all counters It 1s usual for all counter outputs to be latched at the beginning of each scan however there is an option to change this A second channel referred to as the mapped channel can be used to latch the counter output The mappe
104. Example of a Log Sweep Waveform WBK18 pg 15 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module Custom Mode In this mode the user can create customized waveforms built out of specified sine wave based components For example a waveform could be 1V 1 kHz for 2 seconds followed by 5V 100 Hz for 5 seconds and then 2V 500 Hz for 1 second Up to 1280 distinct points can be entered providing the capability to create a virtually unlimited waveform set Within this mode there is also an amplitude selection of 0 mV This corresponds to an active zero voltage and is used to create off time in a voltage waveform Programming of this mode is done by creating editing a list of output amplitude frequency points After the desired list is entered the waveform output is begun by clicking Start Once the waveform sequence completes it returns to the first entry in the list and cycles through again and again until stopped by the user Note You can save output sine wave configuration files and open pre saved files as discussed in the following section How to Save or Open Output Sine Wave Configuration Files Wbk18 Output Sine Wave Configuration File fe at 3 Same dt for all bursts max 1280 bursts Output one or more Sine Wave Bursts for the specified time duration fdt at a given amplitude and frequency The burst repeat rate is determined by the cycle time setting Cycle time and burst duration time are specified in seconds wi
105. F 20 kel AC Coupling 100 ke2 Input Coupling The input coupling stage shown in the figure above is compatible with encoder outputs that have balanced outputs driving both high and low The high and low voltages are required to be within the maximum input voltage range of 75V to 75V A wide range of input waveforms can be accommodated since the WBK17 s comparator threshold can be set anywhere from 12 5V to 12 5V Many encoders offer line driver outputs using 4469 or 8830 driver circuits The 8830 is a dual differential line driver with balanced TTL outputs capable of directly driving long lengths of coax or twisted pair cable The 4469 is a 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module CMOS output driver with high current outputs used with voltages of up to 15 V Balanced line drivers that are used at higher voltages e g 15 V and 24 V and used in differential mode are particularly immune to external noise sources Some encoder outputs will be open collector type These require a pullup resistor in order to operate In many cases the pullup resistor is already incorporated inside the encoder other times it must be supplied externally Since the open collector with pullup resistor output is inherently unbalanced drives strongly in the low direction weakly in the high direction the input differential amplifier will distort the input waveform This distortion can be easily viewed when the input channel is scanned by the Wa
106. From the WBK41 P1 connector to the DBK84 Module via one CA 37 1T Cable 2 From a WBK41 SYNC port to a WaveBook 516A SYNC Port via CA 74 1 Cable 3 From the WBK41 PARALLEL PORT connector to the WBK25 EXPANSION PORT 2 connector via a CA 35 12 cable 4 From the WaveBook 516A PARALLEL PORT to the WBK25 EXPANSION PORT 1 connector via a CA 35 12 cable 5 From the WBK25 ETHERNET port to the Ethernet via a CA 242 cable 6 Power Supply a TR 40U was connected to the POWER IN DIN 5 connector to supply power at 10 VDC to 30 VDC for the WBK41 and the WaveBook 516A 7 Power Supply From the WaveBook 516A s POWER OUT DIN 5 10 VDC to 30 VDC connector to the WBK25 s POWER IN DIN 5 connector via a CA 115 power cable The CA 115 is a 6 inch long cable which has a 5 pin DIN male connector at each end CAUTION An incorrect use of power can damage equipment or degrade performance Prior to connecting your devices to power calculate your system s power requirements Reference Note Information pertaining to connecting the system to power and calculating the amount of power needed can be found in the WaveBook User s Manual A PDF version is included on the data acquisition CD and can be accessed from the CD s intro screen by using the lt View PDFs gt button Information regarding the use of CA 37 T cables is provided on page 10 Using Fastener Panels to Stack Modules Fastener Panels are discussed on page 7 No
107. Gage Factor 2 Shunt Ohms 349 650 Bridge Ohms 350 Max Load 1000 Quiescent Load 500 Point 1 Units 200 The accuracy of Shunt Calibration is directly related to the tolerances of the Shunt resistor Gage s and Bridge Completion resistors used in the circuit In the event that a precision shunt resistor is unavailable Wave View provides an alternate way of calculating Shunt calibration constants This method is as follows a Install an appropriate non precision shunt resistor of a value that creates the degree of bridge imbalance desired b Press and hold the lt Alt gt key on the computer s keyboard then start the calibration process c Once the calibration process has started you release the lt Alt gt key This alternate Shunt Calibration method calculates the shunted load value from shunted and un shunted bridge voltage measurements and then performs the equivalent of a 2 Point Manual calibration WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 31 External Shunt Calibration 2 Pt Shunt This calibration method requires the use of a WBK16 LC option which is discussed elsewhere in the document The method supports the use of an external shunt resistor The resistor is shunted across the gage using the RF switch in the StrainBook or WBK16 The method appears simply as Shunt in the list of calibration methods when either Load Cell or Transducer is selected as the sensor type Note The WBK16 LC provides a
108. H he Sh PARALLEL FORT k WB K40 a E WADE H UA WBK41 Rear Panel Connectors Note that WBK40 s Rear Panel is identical except it has no P2 connector Page 1 includes a photo of the WBK40 rear panel Esl cD P1 P1 is an Analog Expansion Port This DB37 connector is used to connect the WBK40 or WBK41 to an see page 26 for optional DBK84 14 Channel Thermocouple Module The connection is typically made via a CA 37 x pinout ribbon cable where x equals the number of analog expansion devices P2 WBK41 Only P2 is a Digital Expansion Port which is available on the WBK41 but not on the WBK40 This DB37 see page 27 for connector can be used to connect the WBK41 to an optional DBK20 Series device The connection is pinout typically made via a CA 37 x ribbon cable where x equals the number of digital expansion devices If P2 is not used for DBK20 Series expansion it allows for 24 bits of Digital I O which is in addition to the 16 bits of Digital I O that are provided by front panel terminal blocks POWER switch Two position rocker switch with labels 0 for Power OFF and 1 for Power ON A DIN5 connector which accepts power of 10 to 30 VDC Power is typically supplied via a TR 40U power adapter ACTIVE Lights when a sample is being converted by the Analog to Digital Converter ADC that resides inside the WBK40 or WBK41 ONLINE Lights when software is communicating with the WBK40
109. K25 Dedicated Network using a Direct Cable Connection BeEPeeemwes fo araa SA i AA HAr NANN e E AY Al Dedicated Network making use of a network hub or switch In this scenario the WBK25 is connected to the Ethernet through a network hub or switch At least one computer is also connected to the hub Hub Switch LJ L Dedicated Network using a Hub Switch WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide 919896 WBK25 pg 5 Some network devices such as a wireless access point may act as a DHCP server If this is the case follow the instructions for the LAN with DHCP server For detailed information consult the documentation that is specific to your network device LAN with a DHCP Server Local Area Network with a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Many corporations use the LAN Server with DHCP arrangement for their networks In this type of setup several computers are typically connected to a network that makes use of a DHCP server In addition one or more WBK25 modules are connected to the network hub switch LAN Server with DHCP Hub Switch J N WBK25 WBK25 LAN with a DHCP Server Notes gt Using the WBK25 on a typical LAN may affect th
110. K41 The 14 built in TC channels can accept any type of thermocouple including types J K S T E B R and N The units can be expanded in 14 channel increments using DBK 84 TC expansion modules A total of 15 DBK 84s can be attached to one WBK40 or WBK41 for a total TC channel capacity of 224 channels If more than eight DBK84 modules are to be connected to one WBK40 or WBK41 additional power must be supplied The power can be obtained from DBK32A or DBK33 Auxiliary Power Supply Cards housed within a DBK10 expansion chassis WBK41 s Counter Timer functions and 16 bits of Digital I O are accessed via removable front panel screw terminal connectors see previous figure Additional Digital I O and expansion connectors are located at the rear of the WBK41 as indicated in the following figure The WBK41 can be easily expanded beyond its built in channel capacity WBK41 systems can include e up to 224 TC Input Channels by connecting to 15 DBK84 modules e up to 208 Digital I O Channels by connecting to 4 DBK20 Series cards or up to 272 Digital I O channels by connecting to 8 DBK208 expansion boards e 4 Analog Output channels when a DBK46 DAC option card 1s installed e 4 Counter Input channels and 2 Timer Output channels Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 3 Rear Panel Connectors ANALOG EX ANSKIN FORE i DaT EXP AMSKIK FORT Note POWER W ane The P2 Connector E Powe does not apply to ST
111. NTER OPT5 Allows the mapped channel to decrement the counter With this option the input channel for the counter will increment the counter The mapped channel can be used to decrement the counter COUNTER OPT 6 Allows the mapped channel to increment the counter instead of the main channel This option allows the counter to be used with any other input channel post debounce or with one of the detection signals If the channel s input is used elsewhere for example gating another counter the counter for this channel does not need to go unused Reference Notes For information on implementing Up Down Counters of any size refer to Application Example 2 on page 26 of this document module WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 13 Period Mode WBK17 pg 14 This mode allows for period measurement of the channel input The measurement period is the time from edge to edge either both rising or both falling Period data is latched as it becomes available and the data is sent to the WaveBook at the scan rate Therefore if the scan period is much faster than the input waveform there will be a great deal of repetition in the period values This repetition is due to the fact that updates take place only when another full period becomes available Low YWorcl High Word Increment Channel Input 20 ns 200 ns 2000 ns 20000 ns Fost Debounce OPT6 To Wavebooks146 Wlapped Channel Alls Channel Input
112. Oron Readings a ee Aange E Label E Units za Gets kode ERP Cutat a a 6 3 WBEI5 Off 0 5647 B 11 CH51 B 4 WiBETS On 0 5B 30 02 CHE leS WBK15 On gf5e30 06 _ CH53 my No ER WiBETS Off 0 5B 30 02 CH54 rei No A WaveView Configuration Main Window mX b an Example The Customize Engineering Units dialog box can be accessed via the WaveView Configuration main window by activating the Units cell for the desired feel Enter the slope M and offset B constants of ees the Me B formula used to calculate values in channel then clicking to select mX b aoe re ine From the Customize Engineering Units dialog box fT see figure at right you can enter values for m and b een il components of the equation that will be applied to Offset D the data There is also an entry field that allows you Peres to enter a label for the new units that may result from Enonesa J the mX b calculation OF Cancel An example of mX b equation use follows WBK15 5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module 988396 WBK15 pg 5 Engineering Units Conversion Using mx b Most of our data acquisition products allow the user to convert a raw signal input for example one that is in volts to a value that is in engineering units for example pressure in psi The products accomplish this by allowing the user to enter scale and offset numbers for each input channel using the software associated with the product
113. RG 134ho WBK17 s DB25 Pinout WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 29 Digital Outputs The WBK17 has 8 fully programmable digital outputs Each output has an open drain DMOS FET Double diffused Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor that can sink up to 150 mA and is capable of directly driving relays 5 Volts JEN To WaveBook S16 and Pattern Detection Circuit D Distal Gut D 22 EN te From Digital Control S and Pattern Detection 2 DMOSFET A i a COMEN Dei Ourus Typical of 8 Channels Snap In Terminal Block The WEE 17 has 5 of these on WEE17 Eear Panel COM circuits 1 fer each channel Digital Output Port The digital output port can be read back as part of the scan group of an acquisition If the DMOSFET is never turned on by the WBK17 then the digital output port can be used as an input port An external driver can drive any of the digital output bits high or low as long as the WBK17 s DMOSFET is not turned on The digital outputs can be directly updated by application software at any time The digital output port has an 8 bit Mask byte associated with the digital update byte The output port will be updated if the corresponding bit in the Mask byte is a 1 Otherwise the output port bit will be left unchanged The digital outputs can be updated based on the condition of any input channel value s Up to 16 set points each with two 16 bit compare values an 8 bit digital outp
114. Screw terminal LEDs Signal Plug WBK15 Board Layout Installation of 5B Modules WARNING Electric shock hazard Turn off power to WBK15 and all connected modules and devices before inserting or removing modules Failure to do so could lead to injury or death due to electric shock CAUTION Handle the 5B module carefully while inserting pins into the daughterboard Do not over tighten mounting screw The 5B modules plug into a daughterboard lt 2 on WBK15 s motherboard Rubber bumpers on one side and a tilted daughterboard allow the module to rest at a 5 angle to facilitate insertion and removal The adjacent daughterboard has a cut a way to allow room for a screwdriver see figure WBK 15 pg 2 988396 WBK 15 5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module Screwdriver 5B Module Daughterboard Screw Receptacle ma Pin x14 B Receptacles Rubber Rest Mounting Screw 5B Module Insertion Removal 5 angle to _ p facilitate installation Connection WARNING Electric shock hazard De energize circuits connected to WBK15 before changing the wiring or configuration Failure to do so could lead to injury or death due to electric Shock Signals are connected by screw terminal signal plugs that plug into the 4 pin jacks on WBK15 s front panel see figure EXC EXC EXC Negative excitation output only used on strain gage type modules Negative signal input Ce oe J Positive signal inp
115. USER S MANUAL WBK Options Requires a version of Windows Windows 7 32 or 64 bit a Windows Vista 32 or 64 bit Windows XP SP2 32 bit Windows 2000 SP4 Option Cards and Modules for WaveBook Systems Neither Windows Vista nor Windows 7 support WaveBook 512A 516 or 516A Windows Vista and Windows 7 both support WaveBook 516E Measurement Computing Corporation 10 Commerce Way Norton MA 02766 USA Phone 508 946 5100 AACA Fax 508 946 950 372187C 01 489 0902 rev 4 4 e mail info measurementcomputing com Warranty Information Your warranty is as stated on the product warranty card You may contact MCC by phone fax machine or e mail in regard to warranty related issues Limitation of Liability MCC cannot be held liable for any damages resulting from the use or misuse of this product Copyright Trademark and Licensing Notice All IOtech documentation software and hardware are copyright with all rights reserved No part of this product may be copied reproduced or transmitted by any mechanical photographic electronic or other method without prior written consent IOtech product names are trademarked other product names as applicable are trademarks of their respective holders All supplied IOtech software including miscellaneous support files drivers and sample programs may only be used on one installation You may make archival backup copies CE Notice Warnings
116. UX The filters have a nominal cutoff frequency of 10 Hz and 1 kHz Four SIP resistor networks allow you to determine two cutoff frequencies See the Hardware Configuration section for details If full bandwidth is required a filter bypass mode is software selectable Output Selection WBK16 pg 2 An AC coupling circuit with a 1 Hz cutoff frequency can be software selected by the MUX This MUX can also select an Inverting Amplifier for proper output signal polarity The Inverter avoids having to rewire the gage if the polarity is reversed Note that the Inverter option is not available for AC coupling modes 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module Front amp Rear Panels WBK16 s front panel has the following connectors and indicators as shown CH8 C eNews READY CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 Oa CO Gag OT GO OE CC EOC C Oem CE WBK16 8 CHANNEL STRAIN GAGE MADE IN USA SIGNAL CONDITIONING MODULE e 8 DB 9 connectors for bridge input e 3 LEDs to indicate system status Active Ready Power The rear panel has the power switch and the following connectors as shown POWER lt gt ae Tee OO OCHO BOER Or EXPANSION EXPANSION 0 1 POWER IN EXPANSION EXPANSION RAD me ae eee seg cesta connor ors SIGNAL IN SIGNAL OUT 2 5 pin DINS connectors for power input and power pass through 1 DB 15M expansion control input connector 1 DB 15F expansion control output connector e 2BNC connectors for analog expansion in and out
117. VDC Dimensions 221 mm x 285 mm x 36 mm 8 5 x 11 x 1 375 Weight 1 8 kg 4 Ib with no modules installed WBK15 5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module 988396 WBK 15 pg 7 WBK16 Strain Gage Module DESCHID 116 GEE RCe my ener nee CC Rene mCn ET mEmN ESSE MET or Be NED ents a uPIE ARE MEARE Re nea Bennie Sr Man nny E 1 EXCITATION COMIMOCH OM aissg ccs ecole enter Eaa a 6 Low Pass Filter Customization 11sccccssesseccecnnnsecneennnnnesseenaanncsseenaansessensanes 7 Configuration DiagramMS ss ssannrssnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 8 Connecting to the DB9 Channel Input Connectort 11 sccccseesseeneennenneees 12 CA 177 Sirain Gage Cale ninine a e E 12 GN 189 DBY Adapter ODUOM sareretan a e meee 13 Using the WBK16 LC Load Cell Shunt Cal Option cccccccsssssssseccseeeeesnnneees 15 Using the CN 115 1 User Configurable Plug In Card Option 000000 19 SOMWAlC SQUID sisir ona a aae iiaa dei 22 Sensor CalibratloN iann EA ARAR 22 The Five Methods of Sensor Calibration ccccccccseeceeeeeeceeeeseeeceeeeeeeneeeeaens 29 2 Point Manual Calibration tcacatesccovnsaataccbdanccosnuiatearsdeastavndekeceasancaceandates 30 2 POUit ALO C al MOF AT OND cates Sesh Fase siete Basia e asco datee Gs we pelea hostetaaieas any 30 shunt Internal SHUNT Calibration sssini teirinn adia 31 External Shunt Calibration 2 Pt Shunt ccccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee
118. View session is also loaded into WaveView during initial boot up If the default configuration file is found all the required setup information will be extracted from it and the application s main window will open When connection is established the application s main window will open with the default setting If these options fail a dialog box will ask if you want to open a different setup file Reference Notes o For detailed WaveView startup information refer to the Wave View PDF The document can be accessed from the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button on the CD s opening screen o The WBK16 LC Load Cell Shunt Cal internal option board may be required to calibrate load cells and transducers that have internal shunt cal resistors See the WBK16 LC section of chapter 6 for details 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module 3 WaveView WAVEVIEW CFG StrainBook_0 File Edit view WEK 2g i WEK i M Channel Configur Range Mode Select Device Options StrainBook616 WEE16 Sensor Calibration 16 Shroom Marde Seje a nee Esrar eiie H sill iii 5to5 L va woes at F E i Auto Zero LPF HPF Source Bridge CH On Off Label Readings Units Range ara laeti bade LPF Cutoff Cutat peecni tape Bees 55H ChrLo Ott CtrLo z CtrHi Ot CtrHi Dig OF Dig counts 0 1 Of CHO y toS No 0 Bypass 10 00 BC 10 0 FullBridge No Bypassed 0
119. a built in expansion bus Analog Expansion Module 8 Channels via BNC Connectors Up to eight WBK10A modules can be cascaded together for a system capacity of 72 differential channels Each module is capable of supporting a WBK11A WBK12A or WBK13A option card The WBK11A card can simultaneously sample 8 channels and can be installed inside a WaveBook or in a WBK10A module The cards allow for concurrent lt 150 ns capture of multiple input channels and virtually eliminate channel to channel time skewing The WBK11A option is factory install only WBK11A p y y Simultaneous Sample amp Hold Card 8 channels WBK12A and WBK13A are 8 channel programmable low pass filter cards for use with WaveBook data acquisition systems These cards install directly into a WaveBook or WBK10A module and provide programmable low pass filtering over all channels Multiple WBK12A and WBK13A cards can be installed in one system for up to 72 WBK12A channels All of the cards low pass filters and cutoff frequencies are Programmable Low Pass Filter Card configured via software 8 channels WBK13A cards have the additional capability of sampling all WBKI3A channels at the same time Programmable Low Pass Filter Card with SSH 8 channels The WBK12A and WBK13A options are factory install only The WBK 14 is a dynamic analog signal input module It enables WaveBooks to interface with piezoelectric transducers that include accelerometers microphones
120. ad Is the maximum load value that the gage will be expected to measure This value could be less than the max rated load of the gage Quiescent Load Is the minimum load value that the gage will be expected to measure This value could be greater than the min rated load of the gage Point I mV This is the output voltage generated by the gage at the Point 1 Units load Point I Units This is the load that is associated with the Point 1 millivolt value Point 2 mV This is the output voltage generated by the gage at the Point 2 Units load Point 2 Units This is the load that is associated with the Point 2 millivolt value No actual readings are taken when a 2 Point Auto Calibration is performed Calibration constants are calculated from the values entered by the user WBK16 pg 30 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module Shunt Internal Shunt Calibration The Shunt calibration method pertains to an internal shunt For this method two readings are acquired from a bridge The first reading is obtained with the bridge in its quiescent state the second is taken with one leg of the bridge shunted by one of three selectable resistors The resistors are located on a plug in header inside the StrainBook or WBK16 module Shunt calibration appears as Shunt RB Shunt RD and Shunt RF in the list of calibration methods The Internal Shunt Calibration requires that the user enter the following 7 parameters Excitation The value of the const
121. ages can cause death or severe injury Do not connect or disconnect the probes from WBK61 or WBK62 when the leads are connected to a voltage source WARNING Failure to properly connect a WBK61 or WBK62 to the acquisition device WaveBook or WBK10A and to ground will result in unsafe operation 1 Connect WBK61 62 to any input channel s of the WaveBook or WBK10A module using the supplied BNC to BNC coupler CN 110 Refer to the following figures 2 If connecting only one WBK61 62 connect the green stacking banana plug to analog common J12 on the WaveBook or WBK10A module CN 111 Banana Plug Alligator Clip Lead WBK10 or Go WaveBook lt 4 E ja To local earth ground a a Analog Common BNC to BNC Coupler Green Stacking Banana Plug A WBK61 Being Connected to a Channel 1 BNC If connecting two or more WBK61 62s connect the green stacking banana plug of the first WBK61 62 to analog common J12 on the WaveBook or WBK10A module Connect the other WBK61 62 stacking banana plugs to the adjacent WBK61 62 earth ground connections see following figure WBK61 and WBK62 pg 2 988296 WBK61 and WBK62 High Voltage Adapters EE Earth ground connection lt A Lead for connecting to analog common or to adjacent high voltage adapter s earth ground connection Banana plug with direction of plug in To local earth ground WaveBook Ch 3 e mee Ch 2 CEES Ch 1 mews Analog a Common
122. al measurements It is possible to apply global auto zero to previously calibrated channels that have auto zero enabled However the original requirement for the channel to have been externally nulled prior to performing nameplate calibration remains The overall settings for all of the channels can be stored as a configuration for re use but assuming the overall calibration and external system are unchanged between chronologically separated tests is risky and not recommended 4 Know an unbalanced bridge when you configure one Theoretically a strain gage bridge is balanced with zero output until strain is applied producing an output voltage linearly proportional to the strain In the real world the bridge is slightly unbalanced due to component tolerances There are two approaches to allow accurate strain measurements with the slightly unbalanced bridge 1 balance the bridge or 2 compensate for the error with correction factors Understand that if you do neither the bridge will provide erroneous results 5 Take it easy on the excitation regulators The excitation outputs of the WBK16 will deliver up to 90 mA without any degradation in output voltage If this level of current is exceeded the voltage is reduced to protect the regulator It is important to consider the current drawn by the internal reference node resistors These resistors are never switched off they continue to load the excitation regulator no matter what bridge configu
123. al noise of the amplifiers All information above the cutoff will also be lost due to the filter s function The 1 kHz filter provided is typically used as an anti aliasing filter or for slight noise reduction while still maintaining moderate bandwidth WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 7 Configuration Diagrams Full Bridge Configurations The full bridge has four strain variable elements and requires no bridge completion components Quarter and half bridge resistors may be left installed Any bridge resistance from 60 to 1000 ohms can be accommodated mooo a Sense Excitation I oc 3 JNO1 2 l Oo 9 o lt A Switches External DB 9 accessed Bridge Input through m o Auu O software E C E Excitation Internal Bridge Completion Sense Full Bridge Any Resistance from 60 to 1000 Ohms E Sense Excitation Switches External DB 9 accessed Bridge Input through m oOo Au Lu O software C C E Excitation Internal Bridge Completion Sense Full Bridge with Remote Sense ooo Sense Excitation I X 3 2 JNO1 t l DECI 6 1 l ae eile Switches External DB 9 accessed Bridge Input i through lt a O of w aR O software cone ip oc clr or Excitation Internal Bridge Completion Sense Full Bridge with B D or F Shunt WBK16 pg 8 949794 CN 115 Header PWOUMND AT In this connection excitation voltage is r
124. ally block the vents on WBK16 WaveBook 516 and WaveBook 516A when stacked This partial blocking of vents does not jeopardize the cooling process Software Setup You will need to set several parameters so WaveView can best meet your application requirements For detailed WaveView information refer to the WaveView Document PDF After the 5B module type is identified WaveView figures out the m and b of the mx b equation for proper engineering units scaling An example of the mx b equation follows shortly Reference Note gt For detailed WaveView information refer to the WaveView Document PDF gt The API does not contain functions specific to WBK15 Refer to related material in the Programmer s Manual p n 1008 0901 as needed PDF Note During software installation Adobe PDF versions of user manuals automatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support The default location is in the Programs group which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software Note that you can also access PDF documents directly from the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button on the CD s opening screen i WaveView WAVEVIEW_CFG il Ea File Edit View System Help f lm E i rhs 0 1 r Channel Configuration Range Mode ZOM aa 5630 06 kd alen E SFF ER EK WERE apiece ang co Module Type
125. ammable Gain Amplifier PGA The HPF removes the DC voltage from the input signal A PGA amplifies the AC voltage with flat response up to 500 kHz Each channel has a PGA with programmable gains 1 2 5 10 20 50 and 100 and a software controlled DAC for offset nulling The WBK14 measures only bipolar signals up to 5 V peak Programmable Low Pass Anti Aliasing Filter The first filter stage is a programmable 2 pole continuous time low pass filter The filter provides more than 65 dB alias protection to the next filter stage In addition it fine tunes the phase shift of the channel to optimize the phase matching between channels At calibration the phase shift of each channel is measured and stored in an EEPROM that is read at configuration WBK14 pg 2 988396 WBK14 Dynamic Signal Input Module Programmable Low Pass Filter Switch Capacitor Most of the signal alias rejection is performed by an 8 pole Butterworth filter This filter is implemented with a switch capacitor network driven by a programmable clock timebase control Each channel has an independent clock whose frequency determines the 3 dB cut off frequency of the filter The switch capacitor filter provides no attenuation at the clock frequency hence the need for the continuous time low pass filter Note The Low Pass Anti Aliasing Filter can be bypassed to process signals with a bandwidth higher than 100 kHz The External Clock input provides a path to externally contro
126. and force pressure transducers Each WBK14 channel has a e current source for transducer biasing e high pass filter Dynamic Signal Conditioning Module e programmable gain amplifier 8 Channels via BNC Connectors e anti aliasing low pass filter e simultaneous sample and hold SSH amplifiers WBK Option Cards and Modules 988397 Introduction 1 The WBK15 module provides for a diverse range of signals available through optional 5B modules Measurement types include LVDT potentiometer isolated current loop 10mV to 40V inputs linearized RTD thermocouple frequency to voltage and strain 8 Slot 5B Signal Conditioning Module gage CHAN Cievie DesMOGHIEs See latest catalog or contact your sales representative in regard to the types of 5B Modules available for your application WBK 16 is an 8 channel strain gage signal conditioning module Up to eight WBK16 modules 64 channels can be accommodated by the WaveBook and scanned at 1 us channel Almost all bridge configurations are supported via a bridge completion network and software High gain differential amplifier applications are also supported Software controls bridge configuration gain offset Strain Gage Module excitation voltage polarity filtering and the calibration process 8 channels via Standard Female DB9 The WBK17 is an 8 channel multi function counter encoder module for use with Wavebook 512A 516 516A and 516E Each of the high speed 32 bit counter chann
127. annel Selection MUX multiplexer for output to the WaveBook through the Analog Interface The Digital Interface controls the channel scanning process and allows digital configuration of all channels through the WaveBook s Serial Control Bus Excitation Source Excitation power is programmable from a dual source channels to 4 from one source and channels 5 to 8 from another source Each channel has a separate regulator with a fold back current limiter Up to 85 mA is provided at 10 V out decreasing to 30 mA when shorted This is sufficient current to operate 120 Q gages at any voltage Programmable output voltages of 0 0 5 1 2 5 and 10 volts are available Remote sense inputs are provided and should be connected at the strain gage for best accuracy If they are not used they need to be jumpered to the excitation output at the connector The remote sense inputs are fully differential and may even be connected across the completion resistor to form a constant current linearized quarter bridge configuration Bridge Configuration Amplifiers The strain gage is connected to the amplifiers through the Bridge Completion and Shunt Cal Network This network consists of user installed resistors for bridge completion Several combinations of resistors and three different shunt values may be installed simultaneously External connector tie points and the programmable Input Configuration amp Cal MUX determine the actual configuration in use Once th
128. ant voltage source used to excite the gage Gage Factor The Gage Factor value of the gage used in the bridge A Gage Factor of 2 1s typical Shunt Ohms The value in Ohms of the shunt resistor mounted on the header inside the StrainBook or WBK16 module Bridge Ohms The resistance value of the gage Typically 120 or 350 Ohms Max Load The maximum load value the gage is expected to measure This value could be less than the max rated load of the gage Quiescent Load The at rest value of the load applied to the gage If no load will be applied to the gage in its quiescent state enter 0 zero Point I Units The minimum load value the gage is expected to measure This value could be greater than the minimum rated load of the gage Example Excitation voltage is set to 2 volts A Quarter Bridge circuit employing a 350 Ohm strain gage with a Gage Factor of 2 and a full load rating of 1500 ue is connected to a StrainBook or WBK16 channel The gage will be used in an environment were the expected range of measurement is limited to 200 to 1000 ue This gage in its quiescent state has a 500 ue load A 349 650 Ohm precision resistor is available that will be mounted on the plug in header in Shunt location R B Instructions for installing shunt resistors are provided elsewhere in the document In this example the user would enter the following values in the Calibration Parameters spreadsheet Cal Method Shunt R B Excitation 2V
129. are possible WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 31 Setp curt Data Channel Data CH Low Liit DETECT oetpomt Data Setpoint Data OPTS Setpoint Data Distal Cnutput Port Diet omp DIG Pattern Detection Module Note OPT bits see figure are set by software options Example Setpoint Detection on a Totalizing Counter The figure below shows how 3 setpoints could be defined for channel 1 Channel 1 is shown in totalize mode the counter is simply counting upward The setpoints define points of change for Detect 1 as the counter counts upward The first setpoint High Limit1 Low Limit1 dictates channel 1 s detect output to be high when greater than Low Limit but less than High Limitl In this case the channel 1 setpoint is defined for the 16 lower bits of channel 1 s value Channel 1 could be in 16 or 32 bit mode the detect pattern would just repeat every time the lower 16 bit counter rolled over There is another setpoint set by High Limit2 Low Limit2 and then another set by High Limit3 Low Limit3 The last setpoint High Limit3 Low Limit3 dictates that channel 1 s detect output be high whenever Channel 1 s value is greater than HighLimit3 LowLimit3 is ignored The digital output port could be updated on each rising edge of Detect 1 WBK17 pg 32 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module pean ee ope eee eee ase ae eee eee ee E T 65535 HighLimit3 HighLimit2 LowLimit
130. asses frequencies of interest without 0 15 significant attenuation but significantly attenuates frequencies just above Its attenuation is so high that most alias frequency energy is reduced to a level below the noise floor of the measurement system However it must be configured correctly to achieve these results In general the cutoff frequency Fc of the filter should be set as close to but above the highest input frequency of interest This will maximize the alias rejection it provides 06 039 The 8 pole filter provides excellent filter response However no filter is perfect meaning that some signal attenuation occurs for frequencies just 08 0 68 below Fc and maximum attenuation is not exhibited for frequencies just above Fc For reference the typical response of the 8 pole filter 1s provided in the table at the right and the graphs that follow WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896 WBK18 pg 9 WBK18 pg 10 Gain of 8 pole Filter Mode 0 0 5 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 0 20 3 40 amp 60 80 100 FIN FC Gain of 8 pole Filter Mode 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 1 2 0 2 _ 4 6 c f 8 10 12 14 FIN FC Zoom in to Filter Cutoff Frequency Region As described above aliasing results from the relationship between input frequency and sampling frequency Configuring the filter correctly serves to attenuate undesired freq
131. at each counter is to free run and not be cleared during the read operation pg 18 WBK40 amp WBK41 o 926896 Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules Analog Output Channels The DBK46 Factory Install Option is Required When a WBK41 has a DBK46 option installed the module has the ability to output analog data to any of the four D A channels DACO DAC1 DAC2 and DAC3 Connection points are on a front panel terminal block Ifa D A channel is not being used for waveform output operations it can be asynchronously updated by an application WBK41 Front Panel Right Edge Terminal Block QOOUOVOUVUWO Control Circuit DACO DAC1 DAC2 DAC3 FACTORY INSTALL ONLY Internal DAC Pacer Clock External DAC Pacer Clock DPCR DBK46 Block Diagram WBK41 Application The DBK46 has a 256K sample buffer that can be used for one to four DACs If only one DAC is enabled for waveform output then the entire 256K sample memory can be used to store a waveform for that DAC If two DACs are enabled for waveform output then 128K of sample memory is available for each of the two DACs Use of all four DACs drops the available memory down to 64K per DAC Software loads the waveform s into the 256K sample buffer The waveform data drives the DACs at the rate of the specified DAC Pacer Clock The waveforms will repeat until the DACs are disabled by software The DBK46 provides an output range of 10V to 10V The card s 256 Kbyte of sampl
132. atch that is found terminates the search for that channel s current sample Once the match has been found the digital output port can be updated or NOT and the Detect1 signal for channel 1 will be taken high The following timing diagram represents detection setpoints being used to drive a Detection signal for channel 1 Detectl for Channel 1 Channel 9 in the scan PEEP PERRE fp Timing Diagram with Channel Detection Signal As shown in the diagram Detect for Channel 1 Channel 9 will go high for those samples that meet the setpoint criteria Ch1 data gt Low Limit Note that the Detect signal can get routed to another counter channel and be used at that channel to clock a counter This allows the user to count the number of times an encoder crosses a specified boundary As an alternative the Detect signal s pulsewidth could be measured giving the amount of time that the encoder spent beyond the setpoint criteria The channel s data stream will return data indicative of the time that Detect was active high and more importantly the time that the encoder s position was within the setpoint window Keep in mind that the timing resolution of the Detect signal is directly related to the Scan period not to the actual counter Therefore smaller scan periods result in better timing resolution for the Detect signal and for measurements based on the Detect signal Tr Having your Detect signal as a part of the scan group allo
133. ation now follows WBK21 Default Configuration WBK21 Jumper Settings JP1 WBK21 occupies the I O address space of one parallel printer port LPT1 LPT2 or LPT3 The factory default setting via JP1 is LPT1 amp h378 If an IBM Monochrome board is not installed then WBK21 would be designated as LPT1 or LPT2 my LPT ZiT 5 5 a ure pois H Enabled By Disabled 3 ay m vee Enabled a Disabled JP1 JP1 fem 2 a JP2 LPT1 LPT2 a ee JPI Configurations for JP2 Configurations for JP3 Configurations for Parallel Port Selection Parallel Port Enabled or Disabled Serial Port Enabled or Disabled If an IBM Monochrome display board with an on board parallel printer port is installed in your PC the Monochrome printer port will always be designated LPT 1 and have an address designation of amp h03BC Other parallel printer ports or WBK21s are then designated as LPT2 or LPT3 WBK21 ISA EPP Plug in Board 948198 WBK21 page 1 JP2 The JP2 configuration enables or disables the parallel port Enabled is the default JP3 The JP3 configuration enables or disables the serial port Enabled is the default JP4 JP4 s configuration determines the serial port COM port used COM1 is the default The COM port that designates WBK21 depends on two factors 1 WBK21 configuration and 2 other installed devices making use of COM ports JP4 COM1 z Jeowz COM3 l Jcoms COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 amp h3F8 amp h2F8 amp h3E8 amp h2E8
134. aveView software the WBK17 is supported by a complete set of language drivers and documentation for developing custom applications using high level languages such as Visual Basic C and Delphi for Windows 95 98 2000 Me NT and LabVIEW For applications that require sophisticated graphical analysis and control that go beyond the scope of WaveView icon based DASYLab software can be used The WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 discusses software options WBK17 support is only available with the 32 bit driver and 32 bit version of WaveView Reference Notes gt For information regarding software installation refer to the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 gt For detailed information regarding WaveView refer to the WaveView document module included as a part of the WaveBook User s Manual gt If creating custom programs refer to the Programmer s Manual p n 1008 0901 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 35 Fuse Replacement The WBK17 has three user replaceable fuses as follows FI Power Output Fuse for 15V Encoder Power 1 0 A Mini ATO Located near the center of the front panel see figure F2 Power Output Fuse for 5V Encoder Power 2 0 A Mini ATO Located near the center of the front panel see figure e F201 Input Power Fuse 4 0 A Mini ATO Located between the SDIN Power In connector and the DC DC Converter see figure WARNING Electric shock haza
135. battery module or the DBK34 uninterruptible power supply UPS battery module You must compute power consumption for your entire system and if necessary use auxiliary or high current power supplies Reference Note For details regarding power refer to the chapter System Setup and Power Options in the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 Assembly The WBK 14 shares the same footprint as other WBK modules and WaveBooks allowing for convenient mounting A fastener panel allows multiple units to be stacked vertically Screw on handles are available for portable applications For more assembly information refer to this manual s introduction WBK14 pg 4 988396 WBK14 Dynamic Signal Input Module Software Setup Depending on your application you will need to set several software parameters Proper settings will allow WaveView to organize data to meet your requirements Some items of importance to the WBK 14 are the low pass and high pass filter options that can be selected from the WaveView Configuration main window and the excitation source parameters that can be chosen from the Module Configuration window The Module Configuration window can be accessed from the View pull down menu or by use of the first toolbar button located just below the File pull down menu Reference Note For detailed WaveView information refer to the WaveView Document PDF The document can be accessed directly from the data acquisition CD via the
136. ble on the 25 pin DSUB connector Digital Inputs Trigger External Clock connector located on the WBK17 front panel as shown in the figure on page 1 of this document module The following signals are present on the DB25F high speed digital I O connector e16 High Speed Digital Input Lines DO through D15 eTTL Trigger Input TTLTRG e 15 V pin 23 15 V pin 22 50 mA max each etwo 5 V pin 19 and pin 21 250 mA max total eExternal Clock pin 20 etwo Digital Grounds pins 24 and 25 To sample just 16 digital input signals connect them directly to the digital Input data lines D15 is the most significant bit and DO is the least The following figure depicts WBK17 s DB25 connector rotated 90 degrees counter clockwise for convenience of labeling Note that an optional Clock and External Trigger cable CA 178 is available for use with the WBK17 The cable connects to the DB25 connector and terminates in two BNC connectors one for an external clock via pin 20 and the other to TTL external trigger via pin 13 Digital I O Connections for WBK17 mE TEE i D9 DO D15 High Speed Digital Input data lines D 3 l D10 TTLTRG TTL trigger input D2 4 o ae External Clock 16 bit mode read write strobe i i IDE NC 5 VDC 250 mA maximum ps 74 5V 15 15 VDC 50 mA maximum each D6 84 Fextema Clock Digital Grounds Pins 24 and 25 D 9 D13 10 0 15 VDC D14 1 4 D15 124 lt TTLT
137. both high and low channels serve as attenuators and provide a maximum current limit of 100 WA The WBK61 and WBK62 include Input HI safety style banana jack Input LO safety style banana jack 60 inch 152 cm cables with probe tips and alligator clips Green stacking banana plug for analog common CN 110 BNC to BNC Coupler CN 111 Banana Plug Alligator clip earth ground cable The following figure provides a simplified schematic for each model WBK61 with 200 1 Divider Ratio WBK62 with 20 1 Divider Ratio pay To channel ie To channel aa input ae input 50 KQ Note 1 50 KQ Note 1 Note 2 Note 2 g 50 KQ 1 50 KQ lt 1 Low 10 MQ Low 1M2 WBK61 and WBK62 Schematics Note 1 Channel input connections are made from the WBK61 62 BNC to a Channel BNC on the WaveBook data acquisition system or to the WBK10A analog expansion module A CN 110 BNC to BNC Coupler is used to make the connection Refer to the Hardware Setup section of this document module for information regarding channel and ground connections Note 2 The variable resistors are factory set at 50 KQ and are not user adjustable WBK61 and WBK 62 High Voltage Adapters 988296 WBK61 and WBK62 pg 1 Hardware Setup Refer to the following steps and figures to connect the high voltage adapter Note that we will use the term WBK61 62 to refer to both WBK61 and WBK62 since the installation of these models is identical WARNING High volt
138. buffer overflow due to limitations in computer resources such as parallel port speed memory allocation hard disk size or processor speed Otherwise the operation of the WaveBook is unaffected Do I need to upgrade my WaveBook before installing a WBK30 memory option It depends WaveBooks shipped before June 1998 do require a hardware upgrade before a WBK30 can be installed Any unit shipped after the June 1988 date is WBK30 ready WaveBooks with the following serial numbers will need an upgrade before a WBK30 can be properly installed 148010 and under and 148253 149322 150411 150412 150413 150415 150418 151597 153335 Is there any down side to the upgrade for the WBK30 install Once the unit has been upgraded it can not be returned to using the internal 64K FIFO i e a WBK30 card must remain in the unit Note that this is not true for units that did not need an upgrade In the later case the user can remove the WBK30 and revert back to the internal FIFO Do either the16 bit driver or the 16 bit versions of WaveView support the WBK30 memory option No The WBK30 is not available through the 16 bit driver or the 16 bit version of WaveView The 32 bit driver version 2 4 or high supports the WBK30 along with WaveView versions 7 2 and higher Like other enhancements the latest Wave View version is available from our web site What is the WBK30 s impact on existing software For many applications adding a WBK30 to the system w
139. can be External supported without opening the enclosure Each different value Bridge bridge would simply have the jumper in a different location when the gage is plugged in the proper resistor is then already R2 selected Configurations with the completion resistor on the a excitation are redundant due to the internal inversion stage and DB 9 not used EXC Input Kelvin Type Excitation Leads Ri The bridge configuration figures in the following text show various strain gage configurations divided into 4 groups Full bridge half bridge quarter bridge and high gain voltmeter Many of these configurations can coexist but are shown individually for clarity WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 5 Excitation Connection WBK16 pg 6 Remote sense inputs are provided for the excitation regulators The excitation voltage will be most accurate at points where remote sense lines are connected preferably at the bridge this is often referred to as a 6 wire connection Long cables will reduce the voltage at the bridge due to current flow and wire resistance if remote sense is not used If the 6 wire approach is not used the remote sense inputs must be jumpered to the excitation outputs at the input connector Internal 1 MQ resistors are also connected where the jumpers would be located to prevent circuit discontinuities These 1 MQ resistors are not suitable for high accuracy excitation voltage regulation 3
140. ce times from 500 ns to 25 5 ms The debounce module eliminates switch induced transients typically associated with electro mechanical devices including relays proximity switches and encoders From the following illustration we can see that there are two debounce modes as well as a debounce bypass In addition the signal from the comparator can be inverted before it enters the debounce circuitry The inverter is used to make the input rising edge or falling edge sensitive Edge selection is available with or without debounce In this case the debounce time setting is ignored and the input signal goes straight from the inverter or inverter bypass to the counter module There are 16 different debounce times In either debounce mode the debounce time selected determines how fast the signal can change and still be recognized The two debounce modes are trigger after stable and trigger before stable A discussion of the two modes follows Inverter Bypass Debounce Bypass From Comparator To Counters Inverter Debounce Model WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 7 Trigger After Stable Mode In the Trigger After Stable mode the output of the debounce module will not change state until a period of stability has been achieved This means that the input has an edge and then must be stable for a period of time equal to the debounce time Input Output Tl T2 T3 T4 T5 Debounce Module Trigge
141. cers that include accelerometers microphones force pressure transducers and others WBK18 CHANNEL DYNAMIC 8 SIGNAL CONDITIONING MODULE WBK18 Front and Rear Panel Views Each WBK18 channel features a 4 mA current source for transducer biasing hardware detection of a transducer fault AC 0 1 Hz or 10 Hz or DC coupling a programmable gain amplifier range selection hardware overrange detection an anti aliasing low pass filter a simultaneous sample and hold SSH amplifier support for optional TEDS Transducer Electronic Data Sheet if purchased All of these parameters are independently controlled in software on a per channel basis except for overrange detection level which is set on a per module basis WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896 WBK18 pg 1 The WBK18 module includes a built in programmable voltage excitation source This source can be used to stimulate dynamic systems for transfer function measurements and also serves as a test signal for the input channels Multiplexed CH 8 Analog Output to WaveBook Expansion CH 2 Signal BNC iki REE ARE RREN D AER EENES LEERE AEEA AE EESEL R ELLE OEA AELE ENL IEEE MUX v V One of eight channels Transducer Bias Current Source Filter Output i l i l i 1 1 1 Bypass C2 Sample CH 1 i lN and Hold 7 1 l i 1 i 1 i l BNC 3 eae F Programmable i Coupling Filter l l Cay Over range i Detection N PSANI E
142. ciated with a digital output port update with mask CE Compliance 987996 In regard to CE Compliance refer to the WBK17 Declaration of Conformity p n 1064 0740 As stated in that document one of the several requirements for CE compliance is the use of a WBK17 CE kit p n WBK17 CE Kit Contact the factory or your service representative should you desire detailed information The Declaration of Conformity is shipped with the WBK17 module WBK17 pg 37 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Conditioning Module Description 1 Software Setup 7 Current Source with Transducer Fault Detection 2 General 7 Input Coupling 2 Maximizing Alias Protection 9 Programmable Gain Amplifier PGA 2 Using the 2 Pole Filter and Bypass 11 Low Pass Anti Aliasing Filter 3 Module Configuration 13 Overrange Detection 3 Using Accelerometers 18 Simultaneous Sample and Hold 3 OVi 18 TEDS Support 4 Accelerometer Specification Excitation Source 4 Parameters 18 LEDs 4 Electrical Grounding 20 Hardware Setup 5 Cable Driving 20 Configuration 5 Fuse Replacement 22 Power 5 S ficati 24 Assembly 6 pecifications Input Connections 6 Description The WBK18 is a dynamic analog signal input module for the WaveBook data acquisition system The WBK18 provides a complete system to interface to piezoelectric transdu
143. communicated to the user via a front panel LED and is also available through a software status request at the end of an acquisition When recognized an error is latched until the commencement of a new acquisition Consequently even intermittent faults are detected and communicated However an overrange event does not stop the acquisition process or change the data providing the user with full control over the disposition of data An extension of the overrange capability could involve its integration into a process monitor application whereby the fault condition is used to monitor the stability of a previously characterized dynamic signal The overrange level is programmable from 1 to 100 of range on a per WBK 8 basis Overrange detection can be enabled or disabled on a per channel basis Simultaneous Sample and Hold All WBK18 channels are sampled simultaneously after which the WaveBook measures each output until all channels are digitized The time skew between sampling on all channels is 100ns regardless of the number of WBK 18s connected to the WaveBook This maximizes channel to channel phase matching When using WaveBook with an SSH channel enabled the per channel sample rates are reduced The rate reduction is the same as that which would occur if another channel were added The per channel rate with SSH enabled is 1 MHz n where n is the number of active channels WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896 WBK18 pg 3 T
144. cs approximates a single pole frequency response 3 dB Bandwidth 200 kHz minimum WBK61 Effective Voltage Ranges Bipolar 2000V 2000V Bipolar 1000V 1000V 400V 400V 200V 200V 100V 100V 40V 40V 20V 20V 10V Unipolar Not Available 0 to 2000V Unipolar Not Available 0 to 200V O to 1000V O to 100V 0 to 400V 0 to 40V 0 to 200V 0 to 20V 0 to 100V O to 10V 0 to 40V 0 to 4V 0 to 20V 0 to 2V Available through the WBK11A WBK12A or WBK13A option cards WBK62 Effective Voltage Ranges Measurement Errors The following values include total system error i e they include errors from WaveBook WBK10A WBK11A WBK12A and WBK13A The value for gain error does not include offset error Gain Error 0 1 FS unipolar 0 2 FS bipolar Offset Error 0 1 FS unipolar 0 2 FS bipolar WBK61 and WBK 62 High Voltage Adapters 988296 WBK61 and WBK 62 pg 5 Glossary Acquisition Analog Analog to Digital Converter ADC API Bipolar Buffer Buffer Amplifier Channel Common mode Common mode voltage Crosstalk Detection Signal Data Acquisition A collection of scans acquired at a specified rate as controlled by the sequencer A signal of varying voltage or current that communicates data A circuit or device that converts analog values into digital values such as binary bits for use in digital computer processing Application Program Interface The interface program
145. cy range given in the previous table set can be exceded If the input waveform goes under range by too much the counter value will top out at 65535 indicating you have reached the lowest possible frequency that can be measured on that range If the input waveform goes over range by too much the counter will return values that are very course and have a lot of sampling error The values returned will have a small number of counts for the period duration If an input waveform cannot fit within one of the 16 bit ranges shown above or requires much higher accuracy then a 32 bit range should be considered Full 32 bit Counter Option 15u 100 20000 ELES 15 5M Frequency Ranges for a 32 bit Value Sampling Error is Less than 0 2 The 32 bit ranges shown above are much wider than the 16 bit ranges but also require the full 32 bit value to be returned this requires two sample periods within each scan group The 32 bit frequency ranges can also be exceeded with a loss of accuracy or topping out at 4 294 967 295 counts Some measurements will require the accuracy of an input waveform to be free of sampling error having only the absolute accuracy of the internal timebase as the source of error Sampling error can be averaged out to give the required result In most cases the WBK17 can perform the required averaging on the values before they are returned to the PC The frequency ranges shown below will give a sampling error that is less than
146. d channel can also be used to e gate the counter e increment the counter e decrement the counter The mapped channel can be any of the eight input channels post debounce or any of the eight detection signals Each channel has its own detection signal that goes active when any of the sixteen counter value setpoints has been reached A detailed explanation of pattern detection begins on page 31 of this document module Low Word Channel Input High Word Fost Debource To Weavebooko16 start OF Scan Signal All Channel Inputs Post Debounce AS Detection mignals Counter Totalize Mode An explanation of the various counter options depicted in the previous figure follows WBK17 pg 12 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module COUNTER OPTO0 This selects totalize or clear on read mode Totalize Mode The counter counts up and rolls over on the 16 bit Low Counter boundary or on the 32 bit High Counter boundary See OPT2 in regard to choosing 16 bit or 32 bit counters Clear On Read Mode In WaveView the Clear On Read Mode is referred to as the Counter mode The counter is cleared at the beginning of every scan and the final value of the counter the value just before it was cleared is latched and returned to the WaveBook When using either an EXT CLK input or one or both SYNC ports the clear on read mode is not available In these instances the totalize mode should be used COUNTER
147. d on pages 8 through 12 WBK16 pg 14 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module Using the WBK16 LC Load Cell Shunt Cal Option Purpose of the WBK16 LC The WBK16 LC provides a non committed dry contact on two pins of a single StrainBook or WBK16 channel connector The WBK16 LC can be used for virtually all single value shunt calibration requirements some of which are not possible with the internal FET analog switch provisions in the standard channel configurations WBK16 LC Shunt calibrations of load cells and pressure transducers while conceptually equivalent to shunt calibration of strain gages do exhibit a few differences o Varying physical locations of the shunt cal resistor o The shunt resistors are often expressed in engineering units instead of ohms o A shunt switch contact with nominally zero ohms is required Any of the following situations can be accommodated by the uncommitted shunt contact of the WBKIO6 LC e A shunt calibration resistor may be provided internal to a load cell or transducer with an extra connector pin or additional wire in the cable with the requirement that the line be connected to one of the excitation lines to produce a signal equivalent to a specific physical stimulus applied to the transducer e A shunt calibration resistor with a defined physical equivalence may be supplied with a transducer giving specific instructions for connections to provide a signal output from the device e A user may
148. d transferred to the PC Data acquired from a WaveBook flows as fast as possible from the WaveBook to the host PC When a WBK30 is installed and you have selected high acquisition rates relative to the transfer rate then some delay in real time viewing may occur Hardware Setup CAUTION Turn power off to all connected devices before performing the setup To avoid pin damage make sure the WBK30 card is aligned correctly with the mating connector J101 pri pressing i CAUTION Components are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge Perform the setup in a static free work area using tools wrist strap containers and procedures that are ESD safe WBK30 Memory Options 988296 WBK30 pg 1 Note 1 Be sure to keep the three removed J101 jumpers in a safe place If you ever decide to remove the WBK30 the three jumpers must be installed in right most 3 positions Foam Pad Note 2 For WaveBook 512 the 262 0303 chip must be stamped MEM A If not WaveBook 512 must receive an upgrade before WBK30 can be used W Y Remove 3 jumpers from J101 Note 1 262 0303 chip Ni 2 Card guide on inside of WaveBook 516 front panel This illustration does not apply to WaveBook 516E With exception of the WaveBook 516E for which the WBK30 option must be factory installed if the option is selected use the following steps to install WBK30 into a WaveBook WaveBook 516E users will need to consult th
149. detected and communicated Detection of a fault does not however alter the acquisition process or its data Input Coupling Each WBK18 channel offers the selection of three coupling modes 0 1 Hz 10 Hz or DC The 0 1 Hz path is a 1 pole high pass filter with a 3dB point at 0 1 Hz The 10 Hz path is a 2 pole high pass filter with a 3dB point at 10 Hz The DC path provides a direct signal connection Programmable Gain Amplifier PGA The WBK18 provides programmable gains of 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 and 200 These correspond to bipolar input ranges of SV 2 5V 1V 500mV 250mV 100mV 50mV and 25mV Additionally there is a 25V DC coupled only range that is suitable for proximity sensor measurements Range selection is programmable on a per channel basis WBK18 pg 2 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module Low Pass Anti Aliasing Filter Each channel features a programmable low pass filter to provide alias protection and to allow for the removal of undesired frequencies from the measured response This filter is configurable within 3 modes 8 pole 2 pole and Bypass The 8 pole Butterworth switched capacitor filter offers the greatest alias protection and is most commonly used in vibration measurements Its 3dB cutoff frequency is settable from 10 Hz to 50 kHz in a 1 2 5 progression Application information regarding the proper setting of this filter is provided in Maximizing Alias Protection 2 pole mode utilizes two RC filters
150. differential mode a a pg 26 WBK40 amp WBK414 o gps s lt S Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules P2 DB37 Connector Pinout WBK41 Only Digital I O gt Digital 1 0 Port B gt B g a P2 does not apply to S amp Pins3 thru 10 eFeFegserse WBK40 gL SS SL SLSES as SES ES ESSEH OO CPRO CO CG G O Oy OVOw es gt SOKO oem VAN SI ISTIS SELES I FCLLY TFT FLA l x Digital I O Port C Digital I O Port A Q Pins 22 thru 29 Pins 30 thru 37 Pin SignalName Description for P2 Pin Use __ _ N A Digital I O P2 Digital Port B Bit 7 or P2 Expansion Address Bit 0 Out Digital I O P2 Digital Port B Bit 6 or P2 Expansion Address Bit 1 Out Digital I O P2 Digital Port B Bit 5 or P2 Expansion Address Bit 2 Out 16 PortB B4 Digital I O P2 Digital Port B Bit 4 or P2 Expansion Address Bit 3 Out Digital I O P2 Digital Port B Bit 3 or P2 Expansion Address Bit 4 Out 8 PotB B2 CC Digital I O P2 Digital Port B Bit 2 or P2 Expansion RESET Output 9 PotB B1 CC Digital I O P2 Digital Port B Bit 1 or P2 Expansion WRITE Output 5 Volt Supply Expansion 5 Volt Power Port C C7 igi P2 Digital Port C Bit 7 or P2 Expansion Data Bit 7 Port C C6 igi P2 Digital Port C Bit 6 or P2 Expansion Data Bit 6 Port C C5 P2 Digital Port C Bit 5 or P2 Expansion Data Bit 5 Port C C4 igi P2 Digital Port C Bit 4 or P2 Expansion Da
151. dule Detection signals can be scanned along with any other channel in the scan group Gating Any counter can be gated by the mapped channel When the mapped channel is high the counter will be allowed to count when the mapped channel is low the counter will not count but hold its value Mapped Channel A mapped channel is one of 16 signals that can get multiplexed into a channel s counter module The mapped channel can participate with the channel s input signal by gating the counter clearing the counter etc The 16 possible choices for the mapped channel are the 8 input signals post debounce and the 8 detection signals Start of Scan The start of scan is a signal that is internal to the WBK17 It signals the start of a scan group and therefore pulses once every scan period It can be used to clear the counters and latch the counter value into the acquisition stream Terminal Count This signal is generated by the counter value There are only two possible values for the terminal count 65 535 for a 16 bit counter Counter Low and 4 294 967 295 for a 32 bit counter Counter High The terminal count can be used to stop the counter from rolling over to zero Ticksize The ticksize is a fundamental unit of time and has four possible settings 20ns 200ns 2000ns 20000ns For measurements that require a timebase reference like period or pulsewidth the ticksize is the basic unit of time The count value returned in the scan is the numbe
152. dule These modules are discussed in the DBK Option Cards amp Modules User s Manual When using Digital I O expansion modules the local P2 Intel 8255 Digital I O becomes inaccessible in lieu of the expansion modules The expansion modules provide additional Intel 8255 ports as well as input isolation for applications that require the expanded capabilities Pulse Stream Output Using Timers The WBK41 allows for the generation of output pulses based upon a programmable setting These output timers can be set at any time regardless of the state of any synchronous or asynchronous operations which are currently taking place on other channels Connections for the two Timer Outputs designated as TMR 0 and TMR 1 are located on the front panel terminal blocks Counter Input Channels WBK41 modules have Counter Input capabilities for four channels CNTRO CNTR1 CNTR2 and CNTR3 Connection points are provided on a front panel terminal block Providing that a counter channel is not configured for synchronous acquisition it can be used to read counter input As in the case of synchronous operations the four 16 bit counter input channels can be used individually or can be cascaded into two 32 bit counter channels For either cascaded or non cascaded counter channels each channel can be configured for e Clear on Read Mode specifies that each counter should be reset to zero upon being read e Continuous Totalize Mode specifies th
153. e network is fully configured most bridge configurations and resistances can be accommodated without re opening the box The shunt resistors allow each bridge to be put into a known imbalance condition for setting or verifying channel calibration Shunt calibration allows a full scale gain to be set without physically loading the bridge Each channel has an amplifier consisting of two series connected stages The instrumentation amplifier PGIA has programmable gains of x1 x10 x100 and x1000 A programmable gain amplifier PGA follows with a gain range of 1 to 20 in 28 steps This results in a combined programmable gain range of 1 to 20 000 in 28 steps The optimal gain is automatically determined during the gage calibration process Offset Source A low drift programmable offset voltage source with a range of 3 0 V is used to balance the bridge during the gage calibration process This offset source will correct for mismatched bridge resistors and quiescent loads of the strain gage and still retain the full dynamic range Auto zero removes the static portion of the strain load and zeros the input to compensate for any input drift Because this is done electronically zeroing is independent of the user Simply select the channels that are to be auto zeroed and the WBK16 will complete the task automatically Filters Two different 4 pole Butterworth low pass noise rejection filters are selectable through software by the Output Selection M
154. e above example 1 From the WBK41 P1 connector to two DBK84 Modules via two CA 37 1T Cables 2 From a WBK41 SYNC port to a WaveBook 516E SYNC Port via CA 74 1 Cable 3 From the WaveBook 516E EXPANSION port to the WBK41 PARALLEL PORT via a CA 35 12 cable 4 From the WaveBook 516E ETHERNET port to the Ethernet via a CA 242 cable 5 From the WBK41 P2 connector to three DBK21 Cards in a DBK10 Chassis via a CA 37 3 cable 6 Power Supply a TR 40U was connected to the POWER IN DIN 5 connector to supply power at 10 VDC to 30 VDC for each of the following devices e WBK41 e WaveBook 516E Information regarding the use of CA 37 T cables is provided on page 10 Using Fastener Panels to Stack Modules Fastener Panels are discussed on page 7 Note 1 Each DBK84 module requires a unique address setting as explained on page 13 of this document module and in the DBK Options User s Manual p n 457 0905 Each DBK21 card also requires a unique address as dicsussed in the DBK Options User s Manual Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 11 DBK84 ee G p p 7 PP YP PP PY PP ay PP a AD V BK41 m DIGITALO POWER CNTR TMR DACS TESS BSS SE Cee Ce Ce SSS a WaveBook 516A COOCOO0O00O e ya amp AR ZA Q WBK25 PARALLEL PORT Ethernet Channel Input Side Device Interface Side A WaveBook 516A with a WBK25 WBK41 and DBK84 Device Interface Connections seen in the above example 1
155. e buffer memory can store waveforms from the PC When used to generate waveforms the DACs can be clocked in one of three modes These are e Internal DAC Pacer Clock The WBK41 programmable clock can generate updates ranging from 1 5 Hz to 100 kHz independent of any acquisition rate e Internal Acquisition Pacer Clock By using the WBK41 programmable clock the analog output rate of update can be synchronized to the acquisition rate derived from 100 kHz to once every 5 96 hours e External DAC Pacer Clock DPCR A user supplied external input clock can be used to pace the DAC entirely independent of other analog inputs This external clock input connects to the DPCR connector located on the Counter Timer Terminal Block Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 19 DBK46 is installed at the factory To verify that a DBK46 is installed simply check the acquisition software s Analog Output Window for the presence of DACO DAC1 DAC2 and DAC3 Note that the DBK46 does not require any setup in software Reference Note 7 N In regard to the out of the box software and analog output channels refer to the Wave View Document PDF However as of this document date the WaveView graphical user interface GUID does not specifically address WBK40 or WBK41 Using a Temperature Calibrator The thermocouple modules provide accurate and repeatable temperature measurements across a wide range of operatin
156. e factory should a WBK30 need added or removed 1 Turn off all system power and unplug the power adapter from the WaveBook 2 Remove the WaveBook s top cover plate 3 WaveBook 512 users only Verify compatibility WBK30 is compatible with all upgraded WaveBook 512s To determine WaveBook 512 compatibility locate p n 262 0303 the FPGA IC on the WaveBook s motherboard see figure For WaveBook 512 users only if the 262 0303 chip lacks a MEM A stamp then the WaveBook 512 is not compatible with the WBK30 memory option WaveBook 512s with the following serial numbers are not compatible 148010 and below 148253 149322 150411 150413 150415 150418 151597 153335 If a compatibility issue exists you can contact the factory to arrange upgrading your WaveBook 512 Note that after a WaveBook 512 is modified for WBK30 it must have a WBK30 to work properly as the internal FIFO is no longer available 4 Remove the three jumpers from the WaveBook s 40 pin connector J101 5 Align WBK30 so its P1 connector is directly over J101 In a WaveBook 516 before pressing the connectors together slip the opposite end of WBK30 into the plastic card guide above the D sub connector on the front panel Gently press the connectors together while being careful to avoid pin damage Note In WaveBook 512 the foam pad braces the WBK30 against the top cover plate 6 Replace and secure the cover plate 7 Power up the system WBK30 pg
157. e speed of the network and internet data transfer Because of this we recommend adding a network card to the computer and using one of the two dedicated network configurations gt Contact your network administrator before connecting a WBK25 to a corporate network LAN with no DHCP Server Local Area Network with no Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol This scenario looks the same as that shown in the previous illustration except there is no Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP In this type of setup one or more computers are connected to a network and each computer has a static IP address WBK25 pg 6 919896 WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide STEP 3 Connect the WBK25 to the Ethernet Reference Note For examples of system connections including cable use refer to the following documents as applicable gt For DaqBook 2000 Series systems refer to the section entitled Examples of System Expansion in the DagqBook 2000 Series Installation Guide p n 1103 0940 or the DagBook 2000 Series User s Manual p n 1103 0901 gt For WaveBook systems refer to the System Enhancement and Expansion section of the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 What you will need to connect a WBK25 to the Ethernet e An available connection to the Ethernet The connection can be either an Ethernet jack on a computer or an Ethernet jack on a hub that is connected to the Ethernet e An Ethernet patch cable e g a CA 242 1
158. ed documented voltage limits for power and signal inputs All wire insulation and terminal blocks in the system must be rated for the isolation voltage in use Voltages above 30 Vrms or 60 VDC must not be applied if any condensation has formed on the device Current and power use must not exceed specifications Do not defeat fuses or other over current protection Emissions Immunity Conditions The specific immunity conditions for CE compliance vary by product but general immunity conditions include pg 22 WBK40 amp WBK41 Cables must be shielded braid type with metal shelled connectors Input terminal connections are to be made with shielded wire The shield should be connected to the chassis ground with the hardware provided The host computer must be properly grounded In low level analog applications some inaccuracy is to be expected when I O leads are exposed to RF fields or transients over 3 or 10 V m as noted on the Declaration of Conformity 926896 Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules CE Enhancements for DBKs The following CE enhancements are described in the individual document modules of the DBK Cards and Modules User s Manual p n 457 0905 e DBK41 CE e Edge Guard for DBK5 DBK8 and DBK44 e Applicable cables and connectors CE Compliance for WaveBook System Expansion WaveBooks WBK40 WBK41 and other CE designated WBK and DBK boards and modules are CE Compliant at the time they leave the factory and
159. eed implications to WaveBook or other WBK measurements when a WBK40 or a WBK41 1s attached Measurements can be made synchronous with the WaveBook 516E providing precise time correlation between readings from both measurement devices Features common to WBK40 and WBK41 e Provides a means of adding from 14 to 224 thermocouple inputs to the WaveBook 516E or WBK25 e Provides linearized and cold junction compensated readings for all thermocouple types e Exhibits 1 0 C or better accuracy for most ranges and TC types e Consumes no measurement bandwidth from the WaveBook 516E e Detects open thermocouples Additional features of the WBK41 e 16 Digital I O Lines via front panel screw terminal blocks e 24 Digital I O Lines via a rear panel 37 pin connector P2 e 4 Counter Inputs via front panel screw terminal blocks e 2 Timer Outputs via front panel screw terminal blocks e 4 Channel 16 bit 100 kHz Analog Output via front panel screw terminal blocks but only when a factory installed DBK46 option is in place Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 1 Front Panel Connectors WBK471 Front Panel CHE CHIU E m GHz CHI a E HiS TS ES eo en a a ra py Gey a ee gee ee ee ao ee ee eee Meme ee ARE eS ee t THEAMIGOGLLE MULTIFUNCTION RHHNALE WBK41 Front Panel Connectors Note that the WBK40 s Front Panel is identical except it has no Screw Terminal Blocks see pg 3 DCOM The
160. eee ae e UA RES the associated channel will use the default range and units of volts Soe PENE V Meas Pos ID O Phase Inv 0 Deg User Data 0 e Yes instructs WaveView to use TEDS The channel s ranges will be automatically scaled according to the TEDS sensor s calibration data and the units will appear as g e Show accesses an Accelerometer TEDS Information box for the Stor associated channel An example is provided to the right The channel in this case channel 9 is identified in the title bar When the Accelerometer TEDS Information Box information box is closed the TEDS Data cell will indicate its previous status of Yes or No If you add remove or relocate a TEDS sensor at the WBK18 channel inputs the TEDS information and WaveView s range and units will not reflect the change until either a the WaveBook is reselected as a device or b WaveView is closed and then reopened WBK18 pg 8 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module Maximizing Alias Protection What is Aliasing Aliasing is a phenomenon of sampled data systems wherein a high frequency signal is misrepresented as a low frequency signal when the A D converter sampling rate being used is too slow This misrepresentation can result in severe data corruption and incorrect FFT results Aliasing 1s a well documented data acquisition effect and interested users are encouraged to research detailed information that 1s available on line from
161. eeeeas 32 Name Plate SC alID i Atl Morena a e a N 33 Changing Low Pass Filter Displays 11 sccccccsssssseseecssseensnnensneennneeesenensnnnes 35 WBK 16 US r Tips cist eee ee ees 36 WBK 16 SDCCITICAHONS iioa aa Ena A e AAAA EER 38 Description The WBK16 is an 8 channel strain gage signal conditioning module for the WaveBook system Up to eight of these modules 64 channels can be accommodated by a WaveBook and scanned at 1 us channel Almost all bridge configurations are supported via a bridge completion network and software High gain differential amplifier applications are also supported Software controls bridge configuration gain offset excitation voltage polarity filtering and the calibration process Refer to the following block diagram as needed while reading this section Gain Channel 1 of 8 x1 10 Gain 100 1000 x1 to 20 Programmable Excitation Regulator with Remote Sense Note Strain gage WaveBook Analog configuration may Expansion Bus lt a Vary see Bridge we Completion diagrams for Interface exe corresponding use L z of DB 9 pinouts E r TIAN DB 15he2 2s gt Digital Power Supply Serial Control Bus Interface kos DB 15 e o WaveBook Digital 5 Expansion Bus WBK16 Block Diagram WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 1 Channel Selection The eight independent channels are routed to the Ch
162. egulated at the connector This configuration should only be used for short cable lengths Output polarity may be altered by interchanging the and input or by selecting the software invert function CN 115 Header PWOUMTNOT In this connection excitation voltage is regulated at the strain gage This eliminates errors due to cable losses and is the preferred connection for longer cables CN 115 Header PWOUMNGD AT The B D or F shunt resistor may be software selected when installed as shown Output polarity during shunt calibration will be automatically corrected by software The shunt resistor value will typically be different for each value of bridge resistance WBK16 Strain Gage Module Half Bridge Configurations The half bridge has two strain variable elements and requires two internal bridge completion resistors BCRs Any bridge resistance from 60 to 1000 ohms can be accommodated for either the internal or external bridge TTT TCS Sense Excitation A zm oc 3 2 g ae D JNO1 Sa i Switches External DB 9 accessed Bridge Input through TE ae E oR software amy Excitation Internal Bridge Completion Sense Half Bridge Any Resistance from 60 to 1000 Ohms B D or F Shunt mooo Sense 4 Excitation I E a 3 JNOt2 XQ o r A f 8 e e l o l 1 6 l N 1 Q O ne lt Switches External DB 9 g accessed Bridge Input s throu
163. el T C Expansion Module WBK41 Block Diagram pg 14 WBK40 amp WBK41 926896 SNNN JFET 7 e n pe 7e yen en pen pe 7an e pae p pan 7an en pa p pan 7an 7an e p e an pan pe e e Pe p P y DBK46 Option 4 Channel 16 Bit 100 kHz Analog Output Factory Installed Only Control Logic 2 Timer Outputs P2 DB37 ny Digital I O Expansion Port Connects to an Optional DBK20 Series Expansion Module or to 24 bits of Digital I O Parallel Port DB25 Connects to WaveBook 516E or to a WBK25 Ethernet Interface Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules Mini T C Input Amplifier Connector and Filter pme mem ee ee ee ee CH 1 16 Bit 200 kHz A D Converter d 14 Channels per WBK40 Module Cold Junction Sensor Connects to WaveBook 516E or to a WBK25 Ethernet Interface WII Synchronization To From a WaveBook 516E Connects to an Optional DBK84 14 Channel T C Expansion Module WBK40 Block Diagram Thermocouple Measurements Each WBK40 and WBK41 module s internal circuitry includes cold junction compensation CJC for direct measurement of type J K T E N28 N14 S R and B thermocouples The following table provides the temperature range for each of these thermocouple types TiCTye J3 K T E N28 M4 S R B Temperature 200 to 200to 200to 270to 270to Oto 50 to 50 to 50 to Range C 760 1200 400 650 400 1300 1768 1768 1780 Temperature 328 to
164. els can be configured for counter period pulse width time between edges or encoder modes All WBKI17 channels are capable of measuring analog inputs that are digitized by Counter Input Module with Quadrature Encoder the WaveBook Support 8 channels via Removable Screw Terminal Blocks WBK 18 provides 8 channels of dynamic signal input for WaveBook systems Each channel on the WBK18 has independent software control for AC or DC coupling ICP biasing 0 or 4 mA and low pass filter cut off frequency The 8 pole Butterworth filter on each channel is programmable from 5 Hz to 50 kHz in a 1 2 5 progression The filter can also be bypassed resulting in a bandwidth of greater than Dynamic Signal Conditioning Module with 200 kHz Transducer Electronic Data Sheet support T E D S 8 channels via BNC Connectors WBK20A WBK21 and WBK23 Three Interface options that can be used to obtain an Enhanced Parallel Port oo z WBK20A PCMCIA EPP Interface Card and Cable aoa For linking WaveBook to a Notebook PC This interface provides an Enhanced Parallel Port via a PC Card Slot WBK21 ISA EPP Interface Plug in Board Scents a For linking WaveBook to a desktop PC This interface WBK20A Interface Card D provides an Enhanced Parallel Port via an ISA Bus slot WBK20A PC Card EPP ISA EPP Interface Interface amp Cable Plug in Board WBK23 PCI EPP Interface Plug In Board For linking WaveBoo
165. emory that is waiting to be transferred The equation is Maximum Acquisition Length Data transferred Memory Capacity Example You need to acquire 10 Msamples of data at 500K samples second and are considering a WBK30 16 because your PC is only capable of transferring 200Ksamples sec How much data could you stream to disk before the memory is full and data collection stops Is the WBK30 16 adequate WBK30 16 holds approximately 8 3 Msamples of data so Step 1 Determine how long it will take to fill the memory In this example T Capacity RateA RateB T 8 3M 500K 200K 27 6 seconds Step 2 Determine how much data will be transferred before the memory is full Data Transferred T Transfer Speed Data Transferred 2 7 6 secs 200K 5 52M Step 3 Determine the acquisition length Maximum Acquisition Length Data transferred Memory Capacity Maximum Acquisition Length 5 52M 8 3M 13 82 Msamples Since you needed to acquire 10 Msamples and our Maximum Acquisition Length with the WBK30 16 calculated out to be 13 82 Msamples the WBK30 16 is seen to be sufficient Note that this example does not take into account the data packing capabilities of the WaveBook 512 With data packing acquisition lengths would be 25 greater WBK30 pg 6 988296 WBK30 Memory Options WBK40 and WBK41 Thermocouple amp Multi Function I O Modules For use with WaveBook 516E and WBK25 Overview 1 So What are WBK40
166. ent prior to setup Connecting to the Channel Input Side WBK40 and WBK41 each have a row of 14 mini TC connectors These are for connecting thermocouples to channels 1 through 7 and to channels 9 through 15 Channels 0 and 8 have no mini TC connectors as these two channels are used for cold junction compensation CJC The connection information regarding thermocouples is included in the upcoming sub sections Thermocouple Connections page 6 and Open Thermocouple Detection page 7 In addition to thermocouple connections the WBK41 can accept signal lines for the following 16 Digital I O Lines via front panel screw terminal blocks 24 Digital I O Lines via a rear panel 37 pin connector P2 4 Counter Inputs via front panel screw terminal blocks 2 Timer Outputs via front panel screw terminal blocks 4 Channel 16 bit 100 kHz Analog Output via front panel screw terminal blocks but only when a factory installed DBK46 option is in place System Example 144 Digital I O via 3 DBK21 Cards in a DBK10 Chassis 14 Thermocouples can be connected to each DBK84 and to the WBK41 or WBK40 DBK10 with 3 DBK21 Cards DBK84 Note 1 DBK84 For WBK41 Digital I O Counter Input CNTR Timer Output TMR and Analog o naman 7 Output DACS lines can be connected to emaa sera E eee meee aes 1 WBK4 the associated terminal block screw connectors See following photo WaveBook 516E Channel Input Side Device Interface
167. ent wire size feeding the group Voltage drop in the wiring can also starve the WBK16 s toa greater degree as distance from the source increases It is strongly recommended that individual WBK16 units each operate from the TR 40U provided or from an individual power lead from an adequately sized source such as a large battery or power supply 7 Handle channel configuration headers carefully The 16 position machined pin IC sockets into which the bridge completion headers are inserted have demonstrated a tendency to become unreliable if the headers are rocked sideways to remove them or if resistors with larger leads than those we supply are plugged directly into them The unreliability manifests itself with widely fluctuating readings especially if touched or if the WBK16 enclosure is subjected to shock or vibration Cold solder joints on the headers have similar symptoms 8 Install internal reference node resistors if you plan to use half or quarter bridges There are internal 1 Meg ohm bias resistors located between the excitation rails that create a very high impedance reference node voltage in the WBK16 without installing the recommended resistors Do not attempt measurements using these default resistors even though it seems to work Install the previously recommended 1000 ohm components and use a calibration method which compensates for the slight bridge imbalance 9 Do not neglect the excitation regulator remote sense leads
168. enter a number greater than 0 and less than 1000000 The shunt value must not exceed the value entered as the maximum load The fill option is available for this column see Units Bridge Resistor Used for calibrating any sensor using the Shunt calibration method The value refers to the Ohm bridge arm that is shunted during shunt calibration To change the value select the box and enter a number from 60 to 1000 The fill option is available for this column see Units Full Rated Load This column is used for calibrating a load cell or transducer using the Name Plate Units calibration method To change this value select the box and enter a number greater than 0 and less than 100000 The full rated load must be greater than the value entered for the maximum applied load The fill option is available for this column see Units Max Applied Load Used for calibrating any sensor using any calibration method To change the value select Units the box and enter a number greater than 0 and less than 1000000 This value must be greater than the quiescent tare value The fill option is available for this column see Units Quiescent Tare This column is used for calibrating any sensor using any calibration method The value Units entered is the value of the quiescent load on the sensor To change the value select the box and enter a number between 1000000 and 1000000 This value must be less than the maximum applied load value The fill option is
169. er is used Overflow Protection I Enable Ovenow Protector Preserves and transfers all data in the instrument when an acquisition ends early due to an error or manual dis arm You might want to disable this setting if you never want to save data from incomplete acquisitions you want this to work like it does without the WBK30 Cancel Memory Module Tab Enable WBK30 Pre Trigger Mode causes WaveView to use the Pre Trigger Mode for high speed pre trigger acquisitions Pre trigger Mode allows local buffering of pre trigger acquisitions WBK30 manages finite length acquisitions entirely within its own buffer instead of using the host PC s resources During the acquisition the WaveBook begins acquiring data in advance of the trigger When the trigger occurs a specified amount of the most recent pre trigger data is preserved The post trigger data is then collected as specified Together pre trigger data and post trigger data comprise the entire acquisition Without a WBK30 pre trigger sample rates are limited by the transfer rate and pre trigger data including any to be discarded must be transferred into the PC s memory With WBK30 you can choose to buffer all data in the WBK30 until the acquisition is complete Then the PC at its own speed reads the entire correct acquisition When in the pre trigger mode WBK30 must have the capacity to hold all pre trigger and post trigger data Note Whe
170. erential Input Impedance 100 MQ Coupling AC and DC software selectable Accuracy Offset Drift 14V RTI C CMMR DC to 60 Hz 100 dB at gains gt 100 Cross Talk Rejection gt 90 dB less than 1 kHz Bandwidth 50 kHz gains lt 1 to 100 10 kHz gains gt 100 to 2000 1 kHz gains gt 2000 Bridge Configuration Full bridge 4 and 6 wire Half bridge Quarter bridge 2 and 3 wire Bridge Completion User supplied resistors on removable headers included Bridge Resistance 60 to 1000 2 Overall Gain 1 to 20000 software selectable in 86 steps Shunt Calibration software selection of 3 user supplied resistors Auto Balance Selected per channel Auto Calibration Either by actual measurement or by calculated load Offset Adjustment 3 V RTI gains 1 to 10 300 mV RTI gains 10 to 100 30 mV RTI gains 100 to 2000 3 mV RTI gains 2000 to 20000 Excitation Source Two independent banks can be set to 0 5 1 0 2 0 5 0 10 0 volts or off Excitation Accuracy 5 mV Excitation Capacity 85 mA per channel with fold back current limiting Filtering 4 pole Butterworth software selectable and factory set to 10 Hz 1 kHz or bypass field changeable Input Power Voltage Range 10 30 VDC Power Consumption 1 0A 15V min 1 7A 15V max Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature 0 to 70 C Humidity 0 to 95 RH non condensing Dimensions 221mm x 285mm x 35mm 8 5 x 11 x 1 375 Weight 1 32 kg 2 9 Ib
171. ermocouple input module for the WaveBook 516E and WBK25 WBK40 Multi function I O module for the WaveBook 516E and WBK25 WBK41 14 channel expansion module for the WBK40 and WBK41 DBK84 Accessories amp Cables Fastener panel kit for WBK Series Modules 262 0801 Fastener panel kit for DBK Series Modules 232 0810 Fastener panel handle HA 11 1 DB25M to DB25F 12 inch parallel cable CA 35 12 Expansion cable for connecting DBK84 options specify number of DBK84 options x to be connected CA 37 x Expansion cable for connecting to DBK expansion products 2 5 inch expansion cable CA 37 1T 4 5 inch expansion cable CA 37 3T 5 5 inch expansion cable CA 37 4T 11 5 inch expansion cable CA 37 8T SYNC cable for multi unit synchronization 1 ft CA 74 1 SYNC cable for multiunit synchronization 5 ft CA 74 5 5 pin male DIN to 5 pin male DIN provides convenient connection between WBK40 power input connectors and battery packs CA 115 5 pin DIN to automobile cigarette lighter power cable 8 ft CA 116 Male Connectors for Subminiature TC Jacks Type B male connector CN 144 BM Type E male connector CN 144 EM Type J male connector CN 144 JM Type K male connector CN 144 KM Type N male connector CN 144 NM Type R male connector CN 144 RM Type S male connector CN 144 SM Type T male connector CN 144 TM Copper to copper male connector CN 144 UM Related Products DBK20 48 Line General Purpose Digital I O Card with two DB37 male connectors for signal o
172. ernet via a CA 242 cable 5 Power Supply a TR 40U was connected to the POWER IN DIN 5 connector to supply power at 10 VDC to 30 VDC for the WBK40 and for the WaveBook 516E Using Fastener Panels to Stack Modules Fastener Panels sometimes referred to as splice plates p n 262 0801 and p n 232 0810 are typically used to stack modules to WaveBooks and or other modules Optional handles p n HA 111 may also be attached to a system The following figure illustrates the simplicity of the mounting process The fastener panels and associated screws are from fastener panel kit p n 262 0801 for connecting WBK modules or p n 232 0810 for connecting DBK84 modules Fastener Panels The optional handle is p n HA 111 Using Fastener Panels to Stack a WaveBook and two WBK Modules use of the handle is optional Note When used with a WBK16 WaveBook 516 WaveBook 516A or WaveBook 512A fastener panels will partially block the vents on the side of the module This partial blocking of vents does not jeopardize the cooling process pg 8 WBK40 amp WBK44 gpg s s lt s sSSSC Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules DBK84 DBK8 amp 4 DBK84 WBK40 WaveBook 516E WBKI17 WBKIO0A See DBK84 EEEE etc ee am DBK84 Recetas tanh TRENN EEE Pi DBK84 platens PARALLEL PORT DNS HAs sia poral ae me ore moo A EN r pe a arme l E XP CNTRL e OO CHC VEG xO a Drean E og Ox YHOO
173. ers or signal conditioning amplifiers and filters Input channels are periodically sampled for readings An output channel from a device can be digital or analog Outputs can vary in a programmed way in response to an input channel signal Common mode pertains to signals that are identical in amplitude and duration also can be used in reference to signal components Common mode voltage refers to a voltage magnitude referenced to a common point that is shared by 2 or more signals Example referenced to common Signal 1 is 5 VDC and Signal 2 is 6 VDC The common mode voltage for the two signals is 5 5 VDC 5 6 2 An undesired transfer of signals between systems or system components Crosstalk causes signal interference more commonly referred to as noise In relation to WBK17 a detection signal is one of 8 outputs of the pattern detection module Each input channel has an associated detection signal Detect 1 for Channel 1 Detect 2 for Channel 2 etc A channel s detection signal will go active high when that channel s counter value meets the setpoint criteria programmed into the pattern detection module Detection signals can be scanned along with any other channel in the scan group 969597 Glossary G 1 Digital Digital to Analog Converter DAC DIP switch Differential mode Differential mode voltage Encoder Mode ESD Excitation Gain Gating Isolation Linearization G 2 Glossary A digital s
174. ery fast but the scan period could be much slower so the acquired data may only show every 10th count or every 100th count or whatever If the counter input is sufficiently fast and the scan period much slower a detection setpoint could be completely stepped over and go unrecognized even though the counter clearly ran through the setpoint Application Example 1 Determining how many times an encoder goes beyond a certain position A user wants to know the number of times an encoder goes beyond a certain position We will refer to the position to be exceeded as Low Limit To find the answer he completes the following steps 1 Sets a detection setpoint on Channel of the WBK17 channel 9 in the scan The detection setpoint will be CH1 data gt Low Limit where Low Limit is a 16 bit value 2 Sets channel 9 in the scan to be in Encoder Mode Note that channel 9 is A channel 10 is B and channel 11 1s Z 3 Sets channel 12 to count the mapped channel 4 Sets the mapped channel to Detect 5 Starts the acquisition In this example the setpoint criteria is simple Ch1 data gt Low Limit Because of the criteria whenever the data on channel 1 goes beyond the value of Low Limit Detect1 will go high Note Detection setpoints are evaluated on a per sample basis for every scan Since each channel can have up to 16 different setpoints the WBK17 must cycle through 16 setpoints searching for a match every microsecond The first m
175. es discussions of power supplies other than the TR 40U How are WBK Modules Mounted to other Modules or to WaveBooks The fastener panels and associated screws are from fastener panel kit p n 262 0801 3 Fastener Panels HA N Wy AMATO Optional Handle p n HA 111 Using Fastener Panels to Stack a WaveBook and two WBK Modules use of the handle is optional WBK Option Cards and Modules 988397 Introduction 5 WBK modules can be stacked using fastener panels sometimes referred to as splice plates The panels provide a means of stacking modules to create one rigid assembly The Fastener Panel Kit p n 262 0801 is available from the factory and consists of two metal plates and the necessary mounting screws A Fastener Panel Handle p n HA 111 is also available from the factory HA 111 consists of 1 handle and two mounting screws The previous figure illustrates the simplicity of the mounting process Note When used with a WBK16 WaveBook 516 WaveBook 516A or WaveBook 512A fastener panels will partially block the vents on the side of the module This partial blocking of vents does not jeopardize the cooling process 6 Introduction 988397 WBK Option Cards and Modules WBK10A Analog Expansion Module The WBK10A Analog Expansion Module can be used to provide WaveBook with 8 additional differential analog inputs The WBK10A is equipped with a programmable gain instrumentation amplifier PGA and like the WaveBoo
176. es instructions for accessing Dag PConfig If needed refer to the upper right hand figure in regard to radio button and data entry locations r DagIPConfi a Enter the base 10 version of the Serial Number of the eee E Select a device to view or change its network settings WBK25 aici 2 Select a Device A Device Type IP Address Serial Number b Select the Manual IP Setting radio button WBK25 1012 53 00 800000 c Inthe IP Address field enter the IP address Device Properties d Click the lt OK gt button Serial Number feooong ooo MAC Address 005044003500 Partial View of DagIP Config Showing IP Addresses amp Serial Numbers Provide your network administrator with the information on the device s MAC label Also find out from the administrator if the IP Address will be changing If so see if you can obtain a permanent IP Address dedicated specifically to your device WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide 919896 WBK25 pg 13 4 Test the system connections Before testing the system make sure the device has been properly installed and powered on Make sure all cables are properly and securely connected If the unit does not respond within 30 seconds perform the following steps 1 reboot the system 2 upon power up re open the Dag Configuration applet 3 select another configuration setting 4 reinitiate the test How to run the TCP IP Test The TCP IP test is for Ethernet d
177. et waveform Sine or Random frequency The Module Configuration window can be accessed from the View pull down menu or by use of the first toolbar button located just below the File pull down menu Module Settings Excitation Source Tae E Apel Amplitude 5 90 Yop p ae Offset oo Y Waveform Sine Frequency 20 0 Hz Module Configuration Window WBK14 Dynamic Signal Input Module 988396 WBK14 pg 5 Using Accelerometers with WBK14 Overview A low impedance piezoelectric accelerometer consists of a piezoelectric crystal and an electronic amplifier When stretched or compressed the two crystal surfaces develop a charge variation that is related to the amount of stress shock or vibration on the crystal The amplifier outputs a corresponding signal and transforms the sensor s high impedance to a lower output impedance of a few hundred ohms Note that in addition to acceleration these sensors can also measure pressure and force The circuit requires only two wires coax or twisted pair to transmit both power and signal At low impedance the system is insensitive to external or triboelectric cable noise Cable length does not affect sensitivity The following figure shows a simple sensor WBK 14 connection The voltage developed across R is applied to the gate of the MOSFET The MOSFET is powered from a constant current source of 2 or 4 mA and 27 volts Sensor to WBK14 Ne Coaxial Cable Re
178. evices only The TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol test is for Ethernet devices only The test is accessed and initiated as follows a Open the Control Panel by navigating from the Windows Desktop as follows Start Menu gt Settings gt Control Panel From the Control Panel double click the Daq Configuration icon Select the device that you want to test from the Device Inventory configuration tree Click the lt Properties gt button The Properties dialog box will open Click the Test Hardware tab Click the lt TCP IP Test gt button 3 Dag Configuration WEK25 Test Hardware Prior to testing please make sure yow device is connected to the FC IF your computer does not respond for 30 seconds please reboot and change the settings in the configuration utility Test Results Pinging device gt Passed Round trip time gt lt 10 mes Packet Loss gt OF TCP connection test gt Passed LCPAIP Test Results of a TCP IP Test 919896 WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide WBk25 pg 14 What does the TCP IP test tell me The TCP IP test provides test results for Pinging Device and TCP Connection Test Pinging Device The Pinging Device test is an ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol ping test In addition to indicating either Passed or Failed the test displays a The round trip time of the ping for example lt 10 ms b Packet Loss
179. f Readings Range al Label E Units oe 0 1 WaveBook 516 On 0 Oto10 0 CHO my No D 2 2 WaveBook 516 On 0 10 0 to 10 04 CHO2 Ms B Mo 0 3 WweaveBook 516 On 0 10 0 to 10 04 CHOS 0 6 WaveB ook 516 On 0 10 0 to 10 04 CHOE 0 7 WaveBook 516 On 0 10 0to 10 04 CHOF 5 1 WEK14 On 0 5 0 to 5 0 CHH 2 customize Enoineerina Units 5 3 5 4 E Enter the slope M and offset B constants of Enter the slope M and offset B constants of 6 1 the Mx 6 formula used to calculate values in ri the Mx B formula used to calculate values in ae your engineernng units mi yaur engineering units Ebest rei 1625 Slope iM 200 E ET Slope tht 20 F5 Oifset B 0 Maat Offset BE 0 f 6 M Engineering Units lv OF Cancel Engineering Units fv 0K Cancel Hi For WGEK61 Applications set m to 200 For WEK6 Applications set m to 70 WaveView Configuration Main Window with Customize Engineering Units dialog boxes for setting Mx B and Engineering Units Note In actual applications only one Customize Engineering Units box is displayed To configure units for WBK61 and WBK62 you must use the Customize Engineering Units dialog box to ensure the units are correctly scaled This is done as follows 1 Right click on the Units column in WaveView s main window 2 Select mx b in the Units box The Configure Engineering Units dialog box will appear 3 For WBK61 set m to 200 see pre
180. f every scan The other option is to have the mapped signal latch the counter outputs This allows the user to have another signal control the latching of the count data so the exact value of the counter is known when an edge is present on another channel ENCODER OPT4 This allows the mapped channel to gate the counter if desired When the mapped channel is high the counter is enabled to count when the mapped channel is low the counter is disabled but holds the count value The mapped channel can be any other input channel or one of the detection signals ENCODER OPT5 This allows the mapped channel to clear the counter if desired OPTS implements the Z function described above allowing the encoder reference to clear the counter The counter is cleared on the rising edge of the mapped channel WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 21 Encoder Wiring Diagrams You can use up to four encoders with each WBK17 module in your WaveBook system Each A and B signal can be made as a single ended connection with respect to common ground or as a differential connection Encoder wiring diagrams and example setup tables are included in the following pages refer to them as needed For Single ended Connections For single ended applications the connections made from the encoder to WBK17 s front panel are as follows e Signals A B and Z connect to the H channel high connectors on WBK17 s Counter Input Terminal Blocks
181. f the encoder stops rotating but is vibrating due to the machine it is mounted to the debounce feature can be used to eliminate false edges An appropriate debounce time can be chosen and applied to each encoder channel Refer to the Debounce Module section on page 7 for additional information regarding debounce times Relative position and velocity can be obtained from each of the encoders However during an acquisition data that is relative to the Z position can not be obtained until the encoder locates the Z reference During an acquisition data that is relative to the Z position can not be obtained until the encoder locates the Z reference Note that the number of Z reference crossings can be tabulated If the encoder was turning in only one direction then the Z reference crossings will equal the number of complete revolutions This means that the data streaming to the PC will be relative position period I velocity and revolutions You can set detection setpoints on any or all channels Detection setpoints can be used as data markers digital port updates and as mapped channels Each of the WBK17 s eight channels has one detection signal For measurement purposes the detection signals can be routed to an unused counter The number of times a certain detection setpoint has been met can be the output data for this counter channel Reference Note For a complete discussion of setpoints see the section Pattern Detectio
182. ffset Adjust with WaveBook Diff Amp WaveBook J10 J11 Buffer Amplifier WBKIIA Block Diagram WBK11A SSH Card 988396 WBK11A pg 1 Hardware Setup Configuration All WBK11A configurations are controlled by software There are no hardware settings Reference Note For detailed WaveView information refer to the WaveView Document A PDF version of the document can be accessed from the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button on the CD s opening screen Installation There is no user installation permitted See notes on page 1 WBK11A Specifications Name Function WBK11A 8 Channel Simultaneous Sample and Hold Card Number of Channels 8 Connectors Internal to the WaveBook 512 series or WaveBook 516 series device a 36 pin socket connector mates with a 36 pin connector Accuracy 0 025 FS for WaveBook 512A applications For WaveBook 516 Series applications see the table on page 3 of this WBK11A document module Offset 1 LSB max Aperture Uncertainty 75 ps max Voltage Droop 0 1 mV ms max Maximum Signal Voltage 5 00 VDC x1 Input Voltage Ranges Before a scan sequence begins the input voltage ranges can be programmed via software The ranges can be expanded as follows Unipolar Unipolar applies to WBK 10A only 0 to 10 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 2 V 0 to 1 V 0 to 0 5 V 0 to 0 2 V 0 to 0 1 V Bipolar Bipolar applies to WaveBook 516 516A 516E 512A and WBK10A 10
183. first two terminal blocks include connections DCOM for DCOM Digital Common and Digital I O Digital I O CHO channels 0 through 15 24 additional Digital 1 O Digital I O CH1 lines are available from P2 on the rear panel Digital I O CH2 WBK41 only providing that P2 is not used for Digital I O CH3 DBK20 Series expansion Digital 1 O CH4 Digital I O CH5 DIGITAL I O Digital 1 O CH6 Digital O CH7 DCOM DCOM a Digital I O CH8 T Digital I O CH9 a Digital I O CH10 T Digital 1 O CH11 ra Digital I O CH12 a Digital 1 0 CH13 rm Digital 1 O CH14 T Digital I O CH15 DCOM DCOM In addition to DCOM Digital Common and ACOM 5V Analog Common Connections the Power 5V terminal block provides general use power POWER ACOM connections of the following values 5V 15V ACOM and 15V Power drawn from this terminal block 15V reduces the total power available for expansion 15V options 15V 15V DCOM DCOM The Counter Timer terminal block provides three Counter Input 0 Digital Common connectors four Counter Input COUNTER Counter Input 1 connectors two Timer Output Connectors and i Counter Input 2 one connector for an External DAC Pacer Clock TIMER gt Counter Input 3 DPCR i Timer Output 0 Timer Output 1 The DPCR connection allows the user to supply Q DCOM an external input clock to pace the DACs re DPCR E ACOM r ACOM The DACs terminal block includes six ACOM ACOM Analog Common connectors and four c
184. ft and right sides of the unit The following figure points out the screw locations 3 Remove the Cover Plate not shown Cover Plate Screw Locations Cover Plate Screw Locations F900 F900 Fuse Location in a WBK18 Module 4 Locate the F900 fuse It 1s located near the rear panel edge close to the DINS POWER IN connector 5 While wearing a grounded wrist strap remove and replace the bad fuse Ensure that the new fuse is fully seated 6 Replace the Cover Plate and secure it to the chassis with the 4 screws that were removed in step 2 7 Return the WBK18 module to normal service Should any problems be noted consult the factory WBK18 pg 22 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module Specif ications WBK18 Specifications are subject to change without notice General System Connectors BNC connector mates with expansion signal input on the WaveBook female DB15 connector mates with expansion control signal on the WaveBook Input Power Range 10 to 30 VDC Input Power Fuse F900 4A MINI ATO user replaceable refer to page 21 for details Power Consumption 12V 1 6A 15V 1 3A 24V 0 8A Environment Operating 0 to 50 C 0 to 95 RH non condensing Storage 0 to 70 C Vibration MIL STD 810E category 1 Dimensions 280 mm W x 216 mm D x 42 mm H 11 x 8 5 x 1 65 Weight 1 3 kg 2 9 Ibs Analog Inputs Channels 8 Signal Connection 1 BNC per channel Input Impedance 200k Oh
185. g TEE at ae 4 Fin dt Fin Falias Fclock As an example with the switched capacitor filter set to 10 000 Hz and the input frequency set to 6000 Hz Fin 6000 Falias 33554 Fclock 14848 Total amplitude loss sum of both errors 2 188 dB E1 20 log 6000 33554 E1 0 71446 E2 20 log 6000 14848 E2 1 47396 E1 E2 2 18843 Etot 20 log l SE 6000 6000 1 33554 14848 Etot 2 18843 Fx 1 2 8000 Fp 33554 Fc 14848 E Fx 20 log 1 is 1 Rs p Fc Programmable Low Pass Filter Cards 988396 WBK12A and WBK13A _ pg 5 0 25 0 75 1 1 25 1 75 2 25 2 75 3 0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000 Fx WBKI2A amp WBKI3A Amplitude Loss in dB due to Anti alias and Clock Filters Input signal is swept from 1 to 8000 Hz switched capacitor filter frequency 8 000 Hz anti alias filter cutoff 33 554 Hz clock filter 14 848 Hz pg 6 WBK12A and WBK13A 988396 Programmable Low Pass Filter Cards WBK14 Dynamic Signal Input Module Description 1 Current Source 2 High Pass Filter HPF 2 Programmable Gain Amplifier PGA 2 Programmable Low Pass Filter Phase Equalizer 3 Programmable Low Pass Anti Aliasing Filter 2 Simultaneous Sample and Hold 3 Excitation Source 3 Calibration 3 Hardware Setup 4 Configuratio
186. g and play any PCI I O address LPT Interrupts Plug and play Compliance FCC amp CE marked Port Standard IEEE 1284 Operating Temp 0 to 70 C 32 to 158 F Max Humidity 90 at STP WBK23 page 2 988696 WBK23 PCI EPP Plug in Board WBK25 Ethernet Interface User s Guide For Connecting a WaveBook DaqBook WBK40 or WBK41 to the Ethernet Features Description Operational Aspects 3 Connecting a WBK25 to the Ethernet Fuse Replacement 16 Specifications 17 Ethernet CE Kit Installation Instructions p n 1077 0901 Features 8XXXXX MAC Address 00 50 A4 YY YY YY WBK2 MADE IN USA ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE EXPANSION PORT 2 EXPANSION PORT 3 Jo o 8 mo o 3 A a PP ELASELALIL SERS BS PS t ovbe fo P ovoc The WBK25 Ethernet to Parallel Port Interface e Provides 10 100BaseT Ethernet connection for up to three WaveBook 512A 516 516A DaqBook 2000A DaqBook 2000X WBK40 or WBK41 devices in any combination e High speed performance guarantees continuous data transfer to the PC without data loss The WBK25 is an Ethernet to parallel port interface which provides high speed Ethernet connectivity for WaveBook DaqBook WBK40 and WBK41 systems Connection to the Ethernet is made via an Ethernet patch cable which links the WBK25 s 10 100BaseT Ethernet port to a PC s Ethernet jack or an Ethernet network hub The WBK25 includes three parallel ports labeled
187. g conditions However all instrumentation is subject to drift with time and with ambient temperature change If the ambient temperature of the operating environment is below 18 C or above 28 C or if the product is near or outside its one year calibration interval then the absolute accuracy may be improved through the use of an external temperature calibrator A temperature calibrator is a temperature simulation instrument that allows selection of thermocouple type and temperature For proper operation it must be connected to the WBK40 WBK41 or DBK84 with the same type thermocouple wire and connector that is used in normal testing The calibrator then generates and supplies a voltage to the module The supplied voltage corresponds to that which would be generated by the chosen thermocouple type at the selected temperature The temperature selected on the calibrator will be dictated by the nature of normal testing 0 C is usually the best choice Calibrators are the most accurate at this setting and the connecting thermocouple wire will contribute very little error at this temperature However if the dynamic range of the normal testing 1s for example 100 C to 300 C a selection of 200 C may give better results In either case the level of adjustment is determined by comparing the unit reading to the selected calibrator temperature For example if the calibrator is set to 0 C output and the unit reads 0 3 C then an adjustment of 0 3 C
188. ge valid range of 0 3 V to 5 0 V Note Specifications are subject to change without notice Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 31 Front Panel Digital I O Characteristics Note The following characteristics apply to the16 Digital I O lines that connect to the front panel s removable screw terminal blocks Output Driver Resistor amp Pull up 100 series resistor with a 10 KQ pull up to 5 V Current source 12 mA sink 12 mA Output Voltage High Level 2 5 V min 12 mA Low Level 0 5 V min 4 mA Input Voltage valid range of 0 3 V to 5 0 V Frequency Pulse Counters Counter inputs can be scanned synchronously along with analog and digital scanned inputs based either on internal programmable timer or an external clock source Counters can be configured to clear when read or to totalize and clear under program control Channels 4 x 16 bit cascadable as 2 x 32 bit Frequency Measurement Rate 10 MHz max Input Signal Range 15V to 15V Trigger Level TTL Minimum Pulse Width 50 ns high 50 ns low Frequency Pulse Generators Channels 2 x 16 bit Output Waveform Square wave Output Rate 1 MHz base rate divided by 1 to 65535 programmable High Level Output Voltage 2 0V min 3 75 mA 3 0V min 2 5 mA Low Level Output Voltage 0 4V max 2 5 mA pg 32 WBK40 amp WBK41 o 926896 Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules Ordering Information Modules 14 channel th
189. gh lt 1 O OAOuLua software C E clr Excitation Internal Bridge Completion Sense Half Bridge with Remote Sense gt Sense Excitation LT Da j i Switches External DB 9 accessed Bridge Input through camo A uku software clr coe clr ce Excitation Internal Bridge Completion Sense 3 Wire TC Half Bridge Software Invert amp B D F Shunt Available WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 rFPWOUMMTNYG TL In this connection excitation voltage is regulated at the connector This configuration should only be used for short cable lengths Output polarity can be altered by selecting the software invert function The B D or F shunt resistor may be software selected Output polarity during shunt calibration will be automatically corrected by software CN 115 Header rWBOOUMMmMOTZ In this connection excitation voltage is regulated at the strain gage This is the preferred connection for longer cables CN 115 Header rPrOOUMMMNOT This occasionally utilized connection can be made as shown Two resistors normally reserved for quarter bridge completion must be used For compatibility with other configurations use of one of the above two configurations is preferred over this one WBK16 pg 9 Three Wire Quarter Bridge Configurations The three wire quarter bridge has only one strain variable element and requires three bridge completion resistors BCRs The
190. gitally eliminating the need for all potentiometers and manual adjustments WaveCal a provided Windows based program simplifies the calibration process Reference Note The calibration program is detailed in the WaveCal Document Module WBK14 Dynamic Signal Input Module 988396 WBK14 pg 3 Hardware Setup CAUTION If the following two conditions exist simultaneously e operating WBK14s in a configuration of 4 or more modules e ambient temperature gt 40 C then you must mount the modules on their side vertically to facilitate air flow through the side plates Failure to due so could result in thermal related problems Configuration All WBK 14 configurations are controlled by software The WBK14 requires no hardware settings Reference Notes gt Setup information pertaining to power expansion control and expansion signal connections is contained in the chapter System Setup and Power Options in the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 gt For detailed WaveView information refer to the WaveView document PDF The document can be accessed from the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button on the opening screen Power Like the WaveBook the WBK14 contains an internal power supply The unit can be powered by an included AC power adapter or from any 10 to 30 VDC source such as a 12 V car battery For portable or field applications the WBK14 and the WaveBook can be powered by the DBK30A rechargeable
191. h DaqX Software gt DaqIPConfig WaveBook Users Start Menu gt Programs gt IOtech WaveBook Software gt DaqIPConfig 2 Open the DaqglPConfig Applet Click on the DaqIPConfig selection to open the applet WBK25 pg 10 919896 WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide DaglPConfig Select a device to view or change its network settings M Select a Device IP Address Serial Humber 10 12 53 00 SsUOOU0 Device Properties Serial Number MAC Address Internet Frotocol TCP IP Settings C Obtain an IF address automatically f Use the following IP address DagqIPConfig 3 Select the device that is to have the address change Note In the above figure there is only one device to select 1 e WBK25 4 Set the internet protocol TCP IP settings to be compatible with host computer a Select the radio button labeled Use the following IP address b Enter the new internet protocol settings If needed consult your network administrator for acceptable numbers c Click the lt OK gt button 5 Reboot the device The new IP address will not take affect until the device has been powered off then powered back on 6 Repeat steps 3 4 and 5 for other devices in the system After configuring the network settings for all devices proceed to Step 7 WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide 919896 WBK25 pg 11 STEP 7 Configure the System using the Daq Configuration Applet The Daq Configuratio
192. hannel that is not currently configured for synchronous acquisition The unit also allows for asynchronous output to any DBK46 D A channels that are not currently configured for waveform output Note that the DBK46 1s an option that must be installed for this to be true Likewise all 40 Digital I O channels 16 from front panel terminal blocks and 24 from the rear panel P2 connector can be used for both asynchronous input and output operations In addition the Timer Outputs from a front panel terminal block can be programmed at any time regardless of the current state of synchronous or asynchronous operations on other channels Digital I O Channels Rear Panel P2 Connector 24 Bit Digital I O The devices have an implemented Intel 8255 core in the digital I O logic on the P2 port With the Intel 8255 there are three 8 bit wide ports available for I O and one 8 bit wide port for configuration purposes The configuration port is used to configure the other three 8 bit ports for either input or output operations Front Panel Terminal Blocks 16 Bit Digital I O The WBK41 s front panel terminal blocks include a 16 bit Digital I O port With this port no configuration is required the port simply outputs when written to and inputs when read Expansion Digital I O The WBK41 has the ability to expand its Digital I O capabilities via the rear panel P2 port via the connection of applicable Digital I O expansion modules 1 e a DBK20 Series card or mo
193. hat Red this polarity be followed when connecting the Rea thermocouple wire Once wired the TC plugs will only Red mate into the unit s TC connectors in one orientation Red thus ensuring a correct connection R Black Red Bo Gay Red It should be noted that thermocouples output very small voltages and that long thermocouple leads can pickup a large amount of noise However both the WBK40 and WBK41 inherently provide a high level of noise immunity via their 4 Hz signal bandwidth and input filtering If desired further noise reduction can be achieved through the use of shielded thermocouples and or averaging Tr You can minimize the effect of noise by 1 using shielded thermocouples 2 averaging readings 3 employing both of the above practices To accommodate shielding grounded connections labeled Analog Common are provided A typical use of the connection would be to attach the shield of a shielded thermocouple Note that the Analog Common connector is removable to facilitate wiring If a thermocouple shield is connected to a WBK40 or WBK41 module leave the shield unconnected at the other end of the thermocouple pg 6 WBK40 amp WBK44 gpg s lt s sSS Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules Open Thermocouple Detection The WBK40 WBK41 and DBK84 modules are equipped with open thermocouple detection for each channel This means that a broken thermocouple wire or otherwise unc
194. he PDF documents Note that hardcopy versions of the manuals can be ordered from the factory WBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual The WBK Option Cards and Modules Manual discusses each of the WBK products available at the time of print The following documents are related PDF 489 0902 WaveBook User s Manual for WaveBook 512A 516 516A amp 516E Explains how to make signal and power connections and how to install software and PDF product support for the WaveBook 512A 516 S16A amp 516E 489 0901 WaveBook User s Manual for WaveBook 512 and 512H Explains how to make signal and power connections and how to install software and PDF product support for the WaveBook 512 and WaveBook 512H 481 0901 WaveView Discusses how to install and use this out of the box data acquisition program that PDF was designed for use with WaveBook systems Q Post Acquisition Data Analysis User s Guide PDF Programmer s Manual The programmer s manual pertains to developing custom programs using Applications PDF Program Interface API commands 1008 0901 Note that the install CD ROM includes WaveBook program examples 988296 WBK Option Cards and Modules Table of Contents An Introduction to WBKs WBK10A Analog Expansion Module WBK11A Simultaneous Sample and Hold SSH Card WBK12A and WBK13A Programmable Filter Cards WBK14 Dynamic Signal Conditioning Module WBK15 5B Isolated
195. he same connector Make sure that the current output spec is not violated or a fuse may blow The programming setup given below is just a representative of possible options Three Encoders Example Setup Encoder1 A Encoder Mode 1X option 16 bit counter Latch on SOS Encoder1 B Period Mode 1Xperiod option 16 bit counter Map channel doesn t gate Ticksize to 20000ns Encoder2 A Encoder Mode 2X option 16 bit counter Latch on SOS Encoder3 A Encoder Mode 4X option 16 bit counter Latch on SOS Encoder3 B Period Mode 1Xperiod option 16 bit counter Map channel doesn t gate Ticksize to 200ns Encoder1 Z Counter in Totalize mode stop at the top 16 bit counter Encoder2 Z Counter in Totalize mode stop at the top 16 bit counter 4 Encoder2 B Period Mode 1Xperiod option 16 bit counter Map channel doesn t gate Ticksize to 2000ns WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 27 WBK17 pg 28 With the encoders connected in this manner there is relative positioning information available on two of the encoders Encoder 1 and 2 but not on the third encoder since there is no Z signal connection for it Therefore only distance traveled can be measured along with velocity for the third encoder Setpoints can be done just like in the previous example The digital output port can be updated by any individual channel a set of selected channels or by all channels Wiring for 4 Encoders The follow
196. ible to power the WBK18 from the POWER OUT DINS connector on the WaveBook and to power other WBK expansion modules from the POWER OUT DIN5 connector on the WBK18 The following notes apply to those types of power connections Tables for determining amp load are provided in the WaveBook User s Manual chapter entitled System Setup and Power Options The following factors are very important e Calculate system amp load prior to creating a system daisy chain Although WaveBook device connectors and CA 115 power cables have 5 amp limits TR 40Us are limited to 2 2 amps If necessary use auxiliary or high current power supplies e If using an AC power adapter for the system power use separate adapters for the WaveBook and the WBK18 e The WBK18 has a5 amp current limit TR 40U power supplies are limited to 2 2 amps Power consumption calculations must be done to ensure that a particular daisy chain scheme does not exceed either of these current limits WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896 WBK18 pg 5 To ensure that the software recognizes all system components when powering up an Ethernet connected WaveBook system it is important that the WaveBook S516E or WBK25 is powered last and that the most remote system components are powered first Other power up sequences will result in software s failure to recognize all components e First power on the WBK expansion modules e Second power on WaveBooks or WBK modules that are connec
197. ic accelerometer consists of a piezoelectric crystal and an electronic amplifier When stretched or compressed the two crystal surfaces develop a charge variation that is related to the amount of stress shock or vibration on the crystal The amplifier outputs a corresponding signal and transforms the sensor s high impedance to a lower output impedance of a few hundred ohms Note that in addition to acceleration these sensors can also measure pressure and force The circuit requires only two wires coax or twisted pair to transmit both power and signal At low impedance the system is insensitive to external or triboelectric cable noise Cable length does not affect sensitivity The following figure shows a simple sensor WBK18 connection The voltage developed across R is applied to the gate of the MOSFET The MOSFET is powered from a constant current source of 4 mA and 30 volts Sensor to WBK18 ARR NR i Goasila Cabjg geamanenesneanesnegoeanesonngnoa AN gt NN l l ny MOSFET C Amplifier i i Input A Constant i i Bias atk Voltage me i R l 30 VDC Power l I i i GND Cy Macon a cat pet i a ts tt watt ese isn one l ee a Sensor WBK18 The MOSFET circuit will bias at approximately 12 V in the quiet state As the system is excited voltage is developed across the crystal and applied to the gate of the MOSFET This voltage will cause linear variation in the impedance of the MOSFET and a propor
198. ic circular patterns of alternating opaque and transparent windows through which an LED will shine There is one LED for each of the concentric circular patterns and likewise one phototransistor One phototransistor produces the A signal another phototransistor produces the B signal and the last phototransistor produces the Z signal The concentric pattern for A has 512 window pairs or 1024 4096 etc The concentric pattern for B has the same number of window pairs as A except that the entire pattern is rotated by 1 4 of a window pair Thus the B signal will always be 90 degrees out of phase from the A signal The A and B signals will pulse 512 times or 1024 4096 etc per complete rotation of the encoder The concentric pattern for the Z signal has only one transparent window and therefore pulses only once per complete rotation Representative signals are shown in the figure below Representation of Quadrature Encoder Outputs A B and Z 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module As the encoder rotates the A or B signal is indicative of the distance the encoder has traveled The frequency of A or B indicates the velocity of rotation of the encoder If the Z signal is used to zero a counter that is clocked by A then that counter will give the number of pulses the encoder has rotated from its reference The Z signal is a reference marker for the encoder It should be noted that when the encoder is rotating clockwise as viewed from the back
199. ifies bridge configuration Each WBK16 channel has locations for five bridge completion resistors These BCR s are for use with quarter and half bridge strain gages The resistors make up the fixed values necessary to complete the 4 element bridge design A full bridge gage requires no internal completion resistors but they may still be installed for other configurations in use The additional resistors will be ignored when the software has selected full bridge mode Both quarter and half bridge gages require an internal half bridge consisting of header positions Rg and Rh The recommended minimum values are 0 1 lt 5 PPM C drift 1 KQ and 0 25 watt resistors Lower values will dissipate more power and add heat Values gt 1KQ will increase the amount of drift and noise The same value half bridge resistors can be used for any resistance strain gage This internal half bridge will be automatically selected by the software when needed Internal 1 MQ shunt resistors are used to avoid open circuits These resistors are not suitable for high accuracy low noise applications A quarter bridge gage additionally requires a resistor of equal EXC value to itself Up to 3 different values may be installed simultaneously in header positions Ra Rc Re All of these resistors are connected to the excitation terminal An external jumper at the input connector determines which resistor is utilized Therefore 3 different quarter bridge values
200. ignal is one of discrete value in contrast to a varying signal Combinations of binary digits Os and 1s represent digital data A circuit or device that converts digital values binary bits into analog signals A DIP switch is a group of miniature switches in a small Dual In line Package DIP Typically users set these switches to configure their particular application The differential mode measures a voltage between 2 signal lines for a single channel Also see single ended mode Differential mode voltage refers to a voltage difference between two signals that are referenced to a common point Example Signal 1 is 5 VDC referenced to common Signal 2 is 6 VDC referenced to common If the 5 VDC signal is used as the reference the differential mode voltage 1s 1 VDC 6 VDC 5 VDC 1 VDC If the 6 VDC signal is used as the reference the differential mode voltage is 1 VDC 5 VDC 6 VDC 1 VDC The encoder mode allows the WBK17 to make use of data from optical incremental quadrature encoders When in the encoder mode the WBK17 accepts either differential or single ended inputs and provides power for up to four encoders When reading phase A phase B and index Z signals the WBK17 provides positioning direction and velocity data Electrostatic discharge ESD is the transfer of an electrostatic charge between bodies having different electrostatic potentials This transfer occurs during direct contact of the bodie
201. ill not require any changes to existing software The WBK30 is essentially a deeper FIFO When it is added to a WaveBook the software will function identically to the standard FIFO except that the time to buffer overflow will be greater Refer to program examples if detailed information is needed 988296 WBK30 pg 5 Question When using a WBK30 how do I calculate the length of the acquisition Answer Before we answer consider the following analogy the WBK30 can be thought of as a water bucket with a hole in it You fill the bucket at one rate and empty it at another The time to fill the bucket is determined by the size of the bucket and difference between these two rates Calculating the maximum acquisition length This calculation can be broken down into three steps Step 1 Determine how long it will take to fill the memory The following equation is used T Capacity RateA RateB Where T Time to fill the memory Capacity Memory Capacity RateA acquisition rate RateB transfer rate The time to full memory is simply the memory capacity divided by the difference in rate of filling and emptying This value T is used in step 2 Step 2 Determine how much data transfers before the memory is full Data Transferred T Transfer Speed The Data Transferred value will be used in step three Step 3 Determine the acquisition length This is a combination of the data transferred plus the data still in the full m
202. ing figure illustrates single ended connections for four encoders For differential connections we would simply make A B and Z signal connections to the respective channel low inputs With four encoders it should be noted that there are no channels available for Z Z signals In this scenario no encoder has a Z signal connection The WBK17 can receive input from up to four encoders however the WaveView data acquisition program can accept input from only one or two encoders To receive input from three or four encoders with one WBK17 refer to the Programmer s Manual p n 1008 0901 Encoder Power Power Out Terminal Block 15 VDC 5 VDC CH8H CH8L CH7H Encoder 4 Encoder 3 Counter Input Terminal Blocks Encoder 2 WBK17 Partial Encoder 1 Four Encoders with Single Ended Connections to WBK1I7 Connect four encoders to the WBK17 Refer to the above diagram and following table Four Encoders Example Setup as needed Each signal A B can be connected as a single ended connection with respect to the common ground or as a true differential input All four encoders can draw their power from the power output connector connect the encoder s power input to the 5V or 15V power connect the return to COM on the same connector Make sure that the current output spec is not violated or a fuse may blow The programming setup given below is just a representative of
203. ing information is contained in the Programmer s Manual p n 1008 0901 Note You can access PDF documents directly from the opening screen of the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide 919896 WBK25 pg 15 Fuse Replacement CAUTION Turn OFF the power to and UNPLUG the WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module and all connected equipment Electric shock or damage to equipment can result even under low voltage conditions Take ESD precautions to include using a grounded wrist strap Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components Ensure boards do not come into contact with foreign elements such as oils water and industrial particulate You should only replace a fuse if your device shows no sign of damage If your device appears damaged such as evidenced by a smoked component contact the factory as soon as possible If the replacement fuse blows contact the factory as this indicates a problem may exist with your WBK25 module Each WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module has one user replaceable fuse designated as F201 F201 Input Power Fuse 4 0 A MINI ATO This 4 amp fuse is located near the rear panel s SDIN POWER IN connector If this fuse has blown the WBK25 module will not power up Factory Part Number FU 8 4 Littelfuse Part Number 297 004 Littelfuse Body Color Code Pink You will need the following Phillips Screwdriver 3AG Fuse
204. ing of WBK16 s Input Amplifier Any one of the following four settings is possible x1 x10 x100 or x1000 Offset Null Volts The Voltage summed into WBK16s Scaling Amplifier The voltage is to compensate for any offset that is present in the sensor s output The Offset Null voltage is in the range of 3 to 3 volts Scaling Gain The Gain setting of WBK16 s Scaling Amplifier Any one of the following 13 gain settings can be used 1 0 1 28 1 65 2 11 2 71 3 48 4 47 5 47 7 37 9 46 12 14 15 58 or 20 0 A D In Volts The digital voltage value that is received as input by WaveView software This value is also referred to as sensor output voltage Units Scaling The Multiplier value used by the software for converting sensor output voltage into User Units Units Offset The Offset value that is added to Units Scaling for fine adjustment of what will be the final reading Bridge Units Bridge Units The Reading in User Units for example lbs psi kg that results from converting the initial sensor reading Bridge mV WBK16 pg 28 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module The Five Methods of Sensor Calibration Before proceeding with calibration remember to enter your password The password must be entered before channel parameters can be changed Unless all of the parameters for each channel to be calibrated are accurately entered into the spreadsheet the calibration will produce incorrect results
205. inout Specifications As indicated at let Cable DB9 numbering is opposite of that found on the WBK16 to allow for correct pin mating WBK16 pg 12 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module CN 189 DB9 Adapter Option connected equipment prior to connecting cables signal lines and or removing the cover to install or remove components Electric shock or damage to equipment can result even under low voltage conditions Remove the WBK16 from power and disconnect the unit from all externally Take ESD precautions packaging proper handling grounded wrist strap etc Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components Only handle boards by their edges or ORBs if applicable Ensure boards do not come into contact with foreign elements such as oils water and industrial particulate Be careful to avoid component damage while the WBK16 module is open Always remove bridge completion headers CN 115 from the unit before soldering resistors in the headers The CN 189 option consists of two 7 pad jumpers P3 and P4 a DB9 connector and a 9 slot screw terminal block The adapter plugs into channel input DB9 connectors on StrainBooks and WBK16 expansion modules With use of the terminal block and appropriate shorting of jumper pads the user can easily set up the desired bridge configuration A table indicating bridge types and the respective CN 189 jumper pad shorts follows shortly In some cases the user may wa
206. input signal has been stable for the debounce time and therefore any edge on the input after time period T6 will be immediately reflected in the output of the debounce module Mode Comparison The following example shows how the two modes interpret the same input signal which exhibits glitches Notice that the Trigger Before Stable mode will recognize more glitches than the Trigger After Stable mode Use the bypass option to achieve maximum glitch recognition Debounce i Debounce Debounce Time Time Time I 1 3 i l Input Trigger Before Stable Trigger After Stable o Example of Two Debounce Modes Interpreting the Same Signal WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 9 WBK17 pg 10 Debounce times should be set according to the amount of instability expected in the input signal Setting a debounce time that is too short may result in unwanted glitches clocking the counter Setting a debounce time too long may result in an input signal being rejected entirely Some experimentation may be required to find the appropriate debounce time for a particular application To see the effects of different debounce time settings simply view the analog waveform along with the counter output Use trigger before stable mode when the input signal has groups of glitches and each group is to be counted as one The trigger before stable mode will recognize and count the fi
207. ins and ensure that the card is oriented in relation to the DB9 connector as indicated below Jumper Pin Sections Must be Aligned No Card Installed Card Installed The main Pins Must be Aligned with Corresponding Sockets CN 115 1 Orientation Shown for Channel 1 WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 21 Software Setup WaveView contains special software features for WBK16 The WBK Sensor Configuration aspect of WaveView is discussed in the following pages WBK16 support is only available with the 32 bit driver and 32 bit version of WaveView Reference Note For detailed information regarding non WBK16 specific aspects of WaveView refer to the WaveView document A PDF version of the document can be accessed from the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button on the CD s opening screen Sensor Calibration WBK16 pg 22 To use the Sensor Calibration Program you must first launch WaveView This can be done from a shortcut on the desktop or by selecting WaveView from the Programs group accessed from the desktop Start menu WaveView holds user configured parameters that can be saved to disk The default configuration filename is WAVEVIEW CFG When WaveView starts up it proceeds to search the working directory for this file WaveView also holds a default sensor calibration file The WAVEVIEW CFG file holds the name of this calibration file so that all sensor calibration information from the last Wave
208. ions for safety EMI emissions and immunity from electromagnetic interference Products that are intended for placement in the European Union must meet or exceed the standards and bear the CE mark Although not required in the USA meeting or exceeding the CE standards is considered good engineering practice since doing so enhances safety while reducing noise and ESD problems In contracted and in house testing most Daq products met the required specifications In many cases products that were not originally in compliance were redesigned accordingly In noted instances alternate product versions shield plates edge guards special connectors or add on kits are required to meet CE compliance CE Standards and Directives The electromagnetic compatibility EMC directives specify two basic requirements 1 The device must not interfere with radio or telecommunications 2 The device must be immune from electromagnetic interference from RF transmitters etc The standards are published in the Official Journal of European Union under direction of CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization The specific standards relevant to Daq equipment are listed on the product s Declaration of Conformity and include CISPR22 1985 EN55022 1988 Information Technology Equipment Class A for commercial industrial use and EN50082 1 1992 for various categories of EMI immunity The safety standard that applies to Daq products is EN
209. ired With the optional DBK46 Analog Output card installed the WBK41 will allow synchronous output of D A channels at up to 100kHz for each channel The channels may have output streamed to them and be clocked out synchronously All waveform data is downloaded to a 256k sample buffer on the DBK46 The waveform can then be started and DAC updates made synchronous to the acquisition pacer clock Output Channel Configuration DBK46 Required Analog Output Channels Each D A channel of a DBK46 can be configured for waveform output individually If the D A channel is not configured for waveform output it then 1s available for asynchronous output operations Synchronous Output Clocking The devices allow clocking of the synchronized output by the acquisition clock source an internal programmable pacer clock or by an external clock source When the clock source generates a new clock signal all outputs are updated concurrently Regardless of the clock source the clock may not exceed the maximum update rate of 100kHz Synchronous Output Data Source Each device that has a DBK46 installed allows the data source for synchronized DAC output operations to be that of a memory based buffer on the DBK46 The output data for all the channels is contained in the buffer Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 17 Asynchronous I O Operations WBK41 The WBK41 allows asynchronous input of any counter or digital c
210. is required That is the adjustment value is determined by subtracting the device reading from the calibrator setting To implement the adjustment in Daq View 1 Ensure that the acquisition process is turned off 2 Click on the cell in the Units column for the channel that is connected to the calibrator The engineering units pull down menu above the grid becomes active 3 Click on the down arrow and select the mx b option This option allows post acquisition mathematical manipulation 4 For the example adjustment enter 0 3 for b The channel under calibration will now read 0 C Note that this adjustment is a mathematical operation only and in no way alters the hardware calibration of the product Moreover it operates on a per channel basis with the settings for a given channel having no influence on any other channels ZN Reference Notes KA For Additional mx b information refer to the mx plus _b pdf document which is included on the data acquisition CD pg 20 WBK40 amp WBK41 o 926896 Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules CE Compliance Overview Ce CE compliant products bear the CE mark and include a Declaration of Conformity stating the particular specifications and conditions that apply The test records and supporting documentation that validate the compliance are kept on file at the factory The European Union established CE standards in 1985 The standards include specificat
211. is isolated electrically off ground by means of an isolation stud insert The proprietary material used to form the isolation provides strength and stiffness to preserve high frequency performance Cable Driving WBK14 pg 8 Operation over long cables is a concern with all types of sensors Concerns involve cost frequency response noise ground loops and distortion caused by insufficient current available to drive the cable capacitance The cost of long cables can be reduced by coupling a short 1 m adapter cable from the accelerometer to a long low cost cable like RG 58U or RG 62U with BNC connectors Since cable failure tends to occur at the accelerometer connection where the vibration is the greatest only the short adapter cable would need replacement Capacitive loading in long cables acts like a low pass second order filter and can attenuate or amplify high frequency signals depending on the output impedance of the accelerometer electronics Generally this is not a problem with low frequency vibration 10 Hz to 2000 Hz For measurements above 2000 Hz and cables longer than 100 ft the possibility of high frequency amplification or attenuation should be considered The WBK 14 constant current source provides 2 or 4 mA to integral electronics Use the higher current setting for long cables high peak voltages and high signal frequencies The maximum frequency that can be transmitted over a given length of cable is a function of both
212. ith lines connecting to two solder points Thus we know the connection points for standard resistors If we are using a flat relatively square precision type resistor we would look at the square RG portion of the template right image in the following figure and ignore the RGI image We can see that the lower left solder point remains however the second point has changed Determining Solder Points for Resistor Leads WBK16 pg 20 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module Note that the two half bridges previously described are identical circuit wise to the one illustrated below which is being repeated from page 6 The A thru H bridge completion relations are the same regardless of whether or not you choose to use a CN 115 1 plug in option Refer to the configuration diagrams to set up your desired circuit s TTS Sense Excitation L oc 3 JNO12 1 a i j Switches accessed PwWoOoMmMNGd I External Bridge i A KR amp through gh O o Lu Hf gH software oc cH of o Y y Excitation Internal Bridge Completion Sense Half Bridge Any Resistance from 60 to 1000 Ohms B D or F Shunt Half Bridge Circuit Created by using the CN 115 Header Only i e no plug in card If present read the manufacturer s data that applies to your resistors Important soldering and lead bending information may be present CN 115 1 Mounting Orientation When installing a CN 115 1 be careful to avoid bending the p
213. itions Take ESD precautions to include using a grounded wrist strap Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components Ensure boards do not come into contact with foreign elements such as oils water and industrial particulate You should only replace a fuse if your device shows no sign of damage If your device appears damaged such as evidenced by a smoked component contact the factory as soon as possible If the replacement fuse blows contact the factory as this indicates a problem may exist with your WBK18 module Each WBK18 has one user replaceable fuse designated as F900 F900 Input Power Fuse 4 0 A MINI ATO This 4 amp fuse is located near the rear panel s SDIN POWER IN connector If this fuse has blown the WBK18 module will not power up Factory Part Number FU 8 4 Littelfuse Part Number 297 004 Littelfuse Body Color Code Pink You will need the following e Phillips Screwdriver e 3AG Fuse Puller or needle nose pliers e Grounding wrist strap and associated anti static pad e Replacement fuse F900 Needle nose pliers can be used to pull MINI ATO fuses but should not be used to insert fuses WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896 WBK18 pg 21 1 Ifyou have not already done so turn OFF the power to and UNPLUG the WBK18 module and all connected equipment Remove all signal I O lines from the unit 2 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the four Cover Plate Screws from the le
214. k has a built in expansion bus Up to eight WBK10A modules can be cascaded together for a system capacity of 72 differential channels Each module is capable of supporting a WBK11A WBK12A or WBK13A option card Note WBK10A can be ordered with a PGA WBK11A WBK12A or a WBK13A card installed k Channel 1 of 8 J10 J11 Differential OA N fi A analog SA II gt Tem ST Inputs PGA Card Level Shifter Expansion gt P _ Signal Enable uy Option Note The standard PGA card can be 10 to 30 VDC Input power from AC adapter DBK30A oe Control and DBK34 or 12 V car battery etc Timing Circuit ON OFF Power Supply IN Switch 5 15 EEPROM Expansion F 15 Unit Control use DC DC OUT DIN5s can be Converter daisy chained WBKIOA Block Diagram WBK10A Analog Expansion Module 988397 WBK10A pg 1 The front panel has the following connectors and indicators ACTIVE j WBK10 READY amp CHANNEL ANALOG POWER ANALOG INPUT CHASSIS COMMON 1 I ANALOG TRIGGER WBKIOA Front Panel e 1 Analog Common binding post for reference e 8 BNC connectors for analog inputs Channels are labeled 1 through 8 3 Status LEDs Active Ready Power The rear panel has a power switch and the following connectors O O 1 POWERIN POWER OUT EXPANSION EXPANSION EXPANSION EXPANSION 10VDC TO 30VDC CONTROL IN CONTROL OUT SIGNAL IN SIGNAL OUT WBKIOA Rear Panel e 2 DIN5 connectors one for Power In one f
215. k to a desktop PC Provides an Enhanced Parallel Port from a PCI Bus slot These three interfaces are shipped with separate documentation and are not detailed in this manual WBK23 PCI EPP Interface Plug In Board The WBK25 provides high speed Ethernet connectivity for WaveBook DaqBook and WBK40 series products The WBK25 N A En contains one 10 100BaseT Ethernet port for connection to a PC and three expansion ports that can attach to any model of WBK25 WaveBook DaqBook WBK40 Series option or any combination 10 100BaseT Ethernet Interface Module of these devices 2 Introduction 988397 WBK Option Cards and Modules WBK30 is a DRAM based memory board that installs inside a WaveBook There are three models of WBK30 available each significantly increases the capacity of a WaveBook s standard data buffer of 64 K samples Capacities are as follows WBK30 WBK30 16 16 MB WaveBook Memory Options WBK30 64 64 MB WBK30 128 128 MB Note For WaveBook 516E the WBK30 option if selected must be factory installed The WBK40 attaches to any one of the three expansion ports on the Ne es ee nes es ee nes ese ese ces mses eset ees WaveBook 516E or the WBK25 and provides 14 thermocouple input channels The 14 built in TC channels accept any type of WBK40 thermocouple including types J K S T E B R and N Mini TC connections make it quick and easy to attach thermocouples The WBK4O can be expanded in 14 channel increments u
216. l the cut off frequency of the Low Pass Anti Aliasing Filter The input waveform can be TTL or sinusoidal with an amplitude peak of at least 500 mV In this mode the cut off frequency is set to the input frequency divided by 50 Simultaneous Sample and Hold All WBK14 channels are sampled simultaneously after which the WaveBook measures each output at 1 us channel until all channels are digitized The time skew between sampling on all channels up to 72 is 150 ns regardless of the number of WBK 14s attached to the WaveBook When using WaveBook with an SSH channel enabled the per channel sample rates are reduced The rate reduction is the same as that which would occur if another channel were added The per channel rate with SSH enabled is 1 MHz n 1 where n is the number of active channels Excitation Source The excitation source includes a sine random waveform generator a programmable gain amplifier PGA a DC level DAC and a phase lock loop PLL The PLL is used to synthesize the frequency of a fixed amplitude sine wave and control the bandwidth of the random signals The PGA conditions the signal amplitude to a value between 0 V to 5 V peak The DC level of the signal is varied independently of signal amplitude by a software controlled DAC from 5 V to 5 V The DC level of the excitation signal can be used to balance static loads while the AC signal provides the dynamic excitation Calibration WBK 14 is calibrated di
217. ld set by the DAC The threshold can be set anywhere from 12 5V to 12 5V in 100mV steps referred to input Since the counter output and analog waveform can be scanned together the effects of different comparator switching thresholds can be easily observed This allows easy adjustment of the comparator switching threshold based on input waveform characteristics such as noise and ringing The following diagram shows two common input waveforms a square wave that has some ringing and a sine wave The comparator threshold should be set so that the ringing on the square wave does not cause extraneous switching of the comparator causing false counts to be measured Ideally the comparator threshold should be set so that the comparator switches at the point of fastest slew rate on the input waveform This occurs in the grayed regions of the waveforms Amplitude modulated noise may also cause false switching of the comparator The effects of amplitude modulated noise can be minimized by setting the threshold at the point of fastest slew rate on the input waveform The sine wave shown below has its fastest slew rate within the gray region Set the comparator threshold within the gray regions to avoid the effects of ringing and noise Set the threshold within the gray region Setting the Comparator Threshold 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Debounce Module Each channel s comparator output can be debounced with 16 programmable deboun
218. ll partially block the vents on WBK16s and the vents on WaveBook 512A 516 516A and 516E when the units are stacked This partial blocking of vents does not jeopardize the cooling process Functional Concepts Input Coupling WBK17 pg 4 Each WBK17 channel has a programmable input coupling feature Input coupling can be turned off or be selected for AC or DC coupling The type of coupling is determined after the input differential amplifier DC coupling makes use of the path going straight to the filter stage of the programmable analog filter where as AC coupling makes use of the path with the 1 uF capacitor The inclusion or exclusion of DC offsets is important when calculating the appropriate comparator threshold for the input waveform Use AC coupling to reject unwanted DC offsets In other words to prevent DC offsets from reaching the comparator AC coupling works well when the input is constantly changing If the input stops for longer than one second it will appear as DC and may cause the comparator to switch on the decaying DC input Use DC coupling when both AC and DC components are to be presented as input to the comparator DC coupling does not reject anything If the input can have periods of stability longer than one second use DC coupling so the comparator does not switch on a decaying DC input 4 koa Channel Input DC Coupling To Filter Channel Input Stage Differential Amplifier l u
219. llowing it to measure all channels of a fully configured 72 channel system in 72 us Other features of WBK15 include e Built in power supply that operates from 10 to 30 VDC and can power a full complement of 5B modules even with bridge excitation e Removable plug in screw terminal blocks for convenient connection of 5B modules e On board cold junction sensing for thermocouple 5B modules e For each 5B module 1500 V isolation from the system and from other channels Current Sense C lel SHE JET lt E i Analo lt E Output to WaveBook Expansion Control From WaveBook uP amp DC Power iO 5 15 VDC Control Logic Input amp Power Expansion Supply WBK15 Block Diagram WBK15 5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module 988396 WBK 15 pg 1 Hardware Setup Configuration The next figure shows the board layout within a WBK15 Note the channel number layout for the 5B modules and the location for plug in current sense resistors Only current input type modules require the plug in resistors The plug in resistors must be removed for all other module types Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Power ON OFF Signal Out Signal In Control Out Control In In Switch Fuse CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 3 CHANNEL 5 R20 6 QO O O CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 4 CHANNEL 6 CHANNEL 8 Status Front Panel signal inputs from 8 channels 1
220. lso of importance 2 pole mode may provide better results Proximity sensor measurements are an example of this This is because the 8 pole switched capacitor filter while providing excellent attenuation characteristics does not process DC signals with a high level of accuracy For accelerometer applications this is not a limitation as there is no information in the DC component of the input signal The 2 pole filter in contrast is formed by two 1 pole RC filters in series This filter provides excellent passband accuracy at the expense of a more gradual roll off characteristic as detailed below Gain of 2 pole Filter Mode 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Gain dB FIN FC Gain of 2 pole Filter Mode 0 0 5 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 4 5 5 0 5 S 10 15 20 25 FIN FC Zoom in to Filter Cutoff Frequency Region WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896 WBK18 pg 11 Bypass Mode Bypass mode also provides excellent passband accuracy and provides minimal signal attenuation up to very high frequencies for those applications that need to measure signals of frequency exceeding 20 kHz For reference the typical roll off characteristic of Bypass mode 1s the following Gain of Bypass Mode 0 25 50 15 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 0 5 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 4 5 Gain dB FIN kHz
221. m single ended Input Coupling AC DC software programmable per channel High Pass Filter 0 1 Hz or 10 Hz software programmable per channel Input Ranges 25V DC coupled only 5V 2 5V 1V 500mV 250mV 100mV 50mV 25mV software programmable per channel Overrange Detection Programmable from 1 to 100 of range Overrange Indication Front panel LED per channel software status Low Pass Filter software programmable per channel Type 8 pole Butterworth with simultaneous sample and hold SSH Cutoff Frequency Fc 10 Hz to 50 kHz in 1 2 5 progression Alias Rejection 75dB min Channel to Channel Phase Matching 1 typ 2 max Unit to Unit Phase Matching 1 typ 2 max SSH latency 100ns max Amplitude Accuracy 0 5dB Fin lt F 2 Total Harmonic Distortion 70dB typ ICP Bias Source 4mA 24V compliance on off software programmable per channel ICP Fault Detection Thresholds lt 1V short gt 25V open ICP Fault Indication Front panel LED per channel software status Conditions for Low Pass Filter Phase Matching 8 pole LPF mode 0 1 Hz or DC HPF mode 1 Hz lt Fin lt F 2 200 Hz lt F lt 20 kHz All WBK18 units connected to same WaveBook Condition for Amplitude Accuracy For Fin lt 20 kHz WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896 WBK18 pg 23 Excitation Source Channels 1 Signal Connection BNC Frequency Range 1 Hz to 5 kHz Frequency Resolution 0 01 Hz Amplitude Setti
222. make the cell active and then change its setting Options for WBK18 s LPF Mode are a 8 Pole selects the 8 pole low pass filter b 2 Pole selects the 2 pole low pass filter c Bypass bypasses the low pass filter LPF Cutoff Click on a cell in the LPF Cutoff column to make the cell active and then change its setting Options for LPF Cutoff in Hz are 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 and 50000 Note that when the LPF Mode is Bypass this parameter is fixed at 200000 Hz Reference Note Application information regarding the proper setting of LPF Mode and LPF Cutoff is provided in the sections entitled Maximizing Alias Protection page 9 and Using the 2 Pole Filter and Bypass page 11 HPF Cutoff This is used to select input coupling Click on a cell in the HPF Cutoff column to make the cell active and then change its setting Options for HPF Cutoff are a 0 1 Hz selects the 0 1 Hz 1 pole high pass filter b 10 Hz selects the 10 Hz 2 pole high pass filter c DC selects DC coupling Note that when the Range is 25V the HPF Cutoff is fixed at DC Range This is used to select the input range Click on a cell in the Range column to make the cell active and then change its setting Options for Range are 25V 5V 2 5V 1V 500mV 250mV 100mV 50mV and 25mV Note that when the Range is 25V the HPF Cutoff is fixed at DC WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896
223. measurement has a range of 0 to 65535 ticks or 0 to 4 294 967 295 ticks PULSEWIDTH OPT4 Allows the mapped channel to gate the counter When the mapped channel is high the counter is enabled to count When the mapped channel is low the counter is disabled but holds the count value The mapped channel can be any other input channel or one of the detection signals WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 17 WBK17 pg 18 Pulsewidth and Timing mode Accuracy Upper 16 bits of the 32 bit Counter Range S Ticksize Averaging Option 800 80000 20000 ize nS 80 8000 2000 s00m 80 Full 32 bit Counter Range S Ticksize nS Averaging Option 10m 80000 20000 1 1m 8000 2000 Pulsewidth and Time Ranges for a 32 bit Value Sampling error is less than 0 2 Full 32 bit Counter lt 10 ppm Range S Ticksize nS Averaging Option 2 80000 20000 200m 8000 2000 High Accuracy Pulsewidth and Time Ranges for a 32 bit Value that has little sampling error lt 10ppm lt Ippm 987996 PULSEWIDTH OPT6 This allows the mapped channel s pulsewidth to be measured instead of the input channel The mapped channel can be any other input channel post debounce or one of the detection signals on any channel This option allows the counter to be used with any other input channel post debounce or with one of the detection signals If the channel s input is used elsewhere for example ga
224. mediately changes state but will not change state again until a period of stability has passed For this reason the mode can be used to detect glitches Debounce Module Trigger Before Stable Mode The following time periods T1 through T6 pertain to the above drawing T1 In the illustrated example the Input signal is low for the debounce time equal to T1 therefore when the input edge arrives at the end of time period T1 it is accepted and the Output of the debounce module goes high Note that a period of stability must precede the edge in order for the edge to be accepted T2 During time period T2 the input signal is not stable for a length of time equal to T1 the debounce time setting for this example Therefore the output stays high and does not change state during time period T2 T3 During time period T3 the input signal is stable for a time period equal to T1 meeting the debounce requirement The output is held at the high state This is the same state as the input T4 At anytime during time period T4 the input can change state When this happens the output will also change state At the end of time period T4 the input changes state going low and the output follows this action by going low T5 During time period T5 the input signal again has disturbances that cause the input to not meet the debounce time requirement The output does not change state T6 After time period T6 the
225. mmable Low Pass Filter Cards Description The WBK12A and WBK13A are 8 channel programmable low pass filter cards for use with 1 MHz WaveBook data acquisition systems These cards install directly into a WaveBook or WBK10A module and provide programmable low pass filtering over all channels Multiple WBK12A and WBK13A cards can be installed in one system for up to 72 channels All of the cards low pass filters and cutoff frequencies are configured via software The WBK13A card has the additional capability of sampling all channels at the same time If more than one WBK13A card is installed within one system all channels will be sampled within 100 ns of each other Features of the WBK12A and WBK13A include e 6Anti Alias Low Pass Filters Each card provides 8 input channels arranged in two 4 channel banks the filter and cutoff frequency configurations are applied per bank The cards filters can be configured as either an 8 pole elliptic filter with cutoff frequencies of 400 Hz to 100 kHz or an 8 pole linear phase filter with 400 Hz to 50 kHz cutoff frequencies e 500 Khz Low Pass Filter You can individually configure channels to bypass the programmable filter The bypass option results in a 1 pole low pass filter at approximately 500 kHz o Cutoff Frequencies The WBK12A and WBK13A provide 748 discrete cutoff frequencies that can be determined exactly by the formula Fc 300 kHz N where the integer N 3 to 750 Alternatively
226. must be in the range of 10 VDC to 30 VDC and can come from an appropriate AC to DC adapter or a battery option The latter includes DBK power modules and batteries in the range of 10 VDC to 30 VDC Note Power supply input to the WBK25 Ethernet Module must be in the range of 10 VDC to 20 VDC Available AC to DC adapters include the TR 40U supplied which has an input of 90 264 VAC and a output rating of 2 2 amps 15 VDC Battery options include the DBK30A DBK34A and other 10 to 30 VDC sources such as car batteries The DBK30A provides 14 VDC and when fully charged has a storage capacity of 3 4 A hr car batteries have much higher capacities The basic formula for battery life is Runtime hr Battery capacity A hr Current load A System cards e g WBK11A WBK12A and WBK13A get power from their host WaveBook or their host WBK10A expansion module Before connecting your system to power you need to know the power requirements of your specific system A calculation method that incorporates the use of worktables is presented in Chapter 2 of the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 Reference Notes e Inthe WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 the System Setup and Power Options chapter includes examples of power connections for different WaveBook system scenarios In these examples the included TR 40U power adapters are used e Inthe WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 the WaveBook Operation Reference chapter includ
227. n 4 Power 4 Software Setup 5 Using Accelerometers with WBK14 6 Overview 6 Accelerometer Specification Parameters 6 Electrical Grounding 8 Cable Driving 8 WBK14 Specifications 9 Description The WBK14 is a dynamic analog signal input module for the WaveBook data acquisition system The WBK 14 provides a complete system to interface to piezoelectric transducers that include accelerometers microphones force pressure transducers and others Reference Note Information regarding accelerometers begins on page 6 of this document module Each WBK 14 channel has a current source for transducer biasing high pass filter programmable gain amplifier anti aliasing low pass filter simultaneous sample and hold SSH amplifiers The gain filter cut off frequencies and current biasing levels are software programmable WBK14 includes a built in programmable excitation source This source stimulates dynamic systems for transfer function measurements and serves as a reference signal for calibration WBK14 Dynamic Signal Input Module 988396 WBK14 pg 1 One of 8 channels Multiplexed Transducer Bias P AA Current Source Channel Input 10 Hz A BNC High Pass oj ce Filter Bi Q 0 1 Hz v 4 High Pass N Filter Programmable Programmable 7 Anti aliasing Low Pass Filter Low Pass Filter Switch Capacitor ve eral BNC pin j Timebase z uP rues X Control ontrol Logic
228. n Min TC Connector Jace WEES 16 Memory Cand Interface Module 1d Mbyte Memon Gard WEEE High Woltdge WEKE High Voltage ETE pie HE WEKA Bohan Serban Sample amp had Cant WEE TZ B Channe Prognarneracae LowePaess Fiter Card WERT fC hanes Programmable Low pass Fiber Card wth Simwineaus Samp amp Hood WlaweeP ort Rees Horii Pfalz Cea Acqustoen Sem 5 a 5 ee Lil 3 x WaKe1 Hok yoRag k CUO Adja WEKE2 High valia gp HOW Adaptor c te a i it Po Analog Expansion Introduction WaveBook System Components 988397 TU per 88 8880808 VER 206 h Po Carderr ET Te ee en ee oo eee WER 104 4 Channa Expansion Chasse WEE 11A A Channel Smiles Scarred Ge er el eel WRK 2A B Channel Prepreecnneiia Lie Pos Filer Carel mg PKSK ISA i amp Channel Programmable Low Paes Feber Cased ein Samutaneous Sample amp Hold WE 14 BAS haere Cy nam ic Stgrunt Input Raed uke Piezari Wek 15 B Charreed goid SE igna Medik WERK 18 Creare Sean Gage Module WEA ATT Cee Cine Tire Mad uke wath Ciia a Brose Bippen WERKIE Transducer Beinur Daka Sheet Compatioie Dy necro Signal Conditioning Wchuie mE TE WBK Option Cards and Modules How are WaveBook Systems Powered Power supply input voltage to the WaveBook and to the system modules e g WBK10A WBK14 WBK15 WBK16 WBK17 WBK18 WBK40 and WBK41
229. n and Data Markers beginning on page 3 lof this document module A typical acquisition might take 6 readings off of the WBK17 module as illustrated below The user determines the scan rate and the number of scans to take Note that the channel numbers shown assume that the WBK17 is the first expansion module acar l acar 2 ocan 3 ee ne ee eee a 4 WBK17 Acquisition of Six Readings per Scan In general the output of each channel s counter is latched at the beginning of each scan period called the start of scan Every time the WBK17 receives a start of scan signal from the WaveBook the counter values are latched and are available to be sourced down to the WaveBook as each WBK17 channel is selected during the scan period The WBK17 clears all counter channels at the beginning of the acquisition This means that the values returned during scan period 1 will always be zero The values returned during scan period 2 reflect what happened during scan period 1 The scan period defines the timing resolution for the WaveBook and the WBK17 If you need a higher timing resolution shorten the scan period 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module If more timing resolution is needed the scan period must be shortened This has an impact when setting a detection setpoint because the values coming back from the acquisition have the timing granularity defined by the scan period not the actual counter The counter may be counting v
230. n applet designed for 32 bit Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP systems is located in the Windows Control Panel It allows you to add or remove a device and change configuration settings 1 Open the Dagq Configuration Applet a Open the Control Panel by navigating from the Windows Desktop as follows Start Menu Settings gt Control Panel b From the Control Panel double click the Dag Configuration icon 2 Add the WBK25 to the list of installed devices The first level device is the device that will be connected directly to the Ethernet via a host computer s Ethernet jack or a jack on a network hub The WBK25 is a first level device Select the Computer image in the Device Inventory configuration tree following figure b Click the lt Add Device gt button The Select Device Type box will appear c Select the WBK25 from the list of devices as applicable d Click the lt OK gt button The Properties box will appear for the selected device Select Device Type l q C Device Inventory Device Type a O Comput ee _ DaqBook100 r Ca Ok Cancel Properties Add Device Remove Close Using Daq Configuration Device Inventory amp Select Device Type to Add a Device WBK25 pg 12 919896 WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide 3 Set the properties of the WBK25 In this step you will set the device properties according to one of the following two methods depending on
231. n be from either the WBK40 the WBK41 or from DBK84 expansion modules In addition to Thermocouple Input the WBK41 can receive Digital Input and Counter Input Data at up to 200kHz aggregate scanning rates The WBK41 can input Digital Data through its Digital I O terminal blocks on the front panel or via its DB37 P2 connector which can be used to expand to a DBK20 Series card or module Digital Input Channels The WBK41 allows for either synchronous scanning of digital input channels or asynchronous I O operations for all configured digital channels pg 16 WBK40 amp WBK44 o 926896 Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules Counter Input Channels The devices allow synchronous scanning of the 4 16 bit counter input channels The four 16 bit counter channels can also be cascaded into two 32 bit counter channels For either cascaded or non cascaded counter channels each channel can be configured for e Clear on Read Mode specifies that each counter should be reset to zero upon being read and placed into the input scan e Continuous Totalize Mode specifies that each counter is to free run and not be cleared during the input acquisition Reference Note Information pertaining to Synchronization and Scanning can be found in the WaveBook User s Manual A PDF version is included on the data acquisition CD and can be accessed from the CD s intro screen by using the lt View PDFs gt button Synchronous Output Operations DBK46 Requ
232. n for details regarding both hardware and software The PDF documents can also be read directly from the CD using the lt View PDFs gt button on the CD s opening screen A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader is included on your CD The Reader provides a means of reading and printing the PDF documents Note that hardcopy versions of the manuals can be ordered from the factory WBK Option Cards and Modules 967896 V An Introduction to WBKs What are WBKs7 1 How do WaveBooks and WBKs Interrelate 4 How are WaveBook Systems Powered 5 How are WBK Modules Mounted to other Modules or to WaveBooks 5 What are WBKs WBKs are WaveBook system options that exist in the form of cards or modules The WBK options can be used to enhance and or expand your WaveBook system Internally WaveBook has room for one signal conditioning card Externally one or more expansion modules can be used with a WaveBook Reference Note The WBK option cards and modules that follow are detailed immediately after this introduction The information is presented in alpha numerical order and includes product specifications WBK Options Note The items represented in the table are not shown to the same scale Each WBK10A module can be used to provide WaveBook with 8 X N additional differential analog inputs The modules are equipped with a programmable gain instrumentation amplifier PGA and like the WBKI0A WaveBook each has
233. n powering WaveBook systems refer to the WaveBook manual chapter entitled System Setup and Power Options WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 3 Stacking Modules For convenient mounting the WBK16 has the same footprint as other WBK modules and WaveBooks Corner brackets protective ears provide a means for stacking WaveBooks and modules Screw on handles are available for portable applications When using WBK17 modules in conjunction with other WBK modules the WBK17 modules must be located closest to the WaveBook 516 or 516A due to the CA 217 cable length The order of the other WBK modules does not matter Board Layout The following figure shows the WBK16 board layout for locating user accessible components You may need to refer to this figure to locate components referenced in the text The jumper positions are not user functions and are only shown for reference in case they are dislodged Expansion Expansion Signal Out Signal In Expansion Expansion Control Out Control In Power Out Power In Power Switch Jumper Default Low Pass Filter SIP Resistor Bank 2 per channel Jumper Default Included CN 115 Header 1 per channel a f a 1 i a St LLL a S88 F086 L ii PEE FHT ES feed Le I LLL 2868 08 8 E g a E E E So TETEL eepe etet j 2536 56 amp L A TLELLeELio Go hte TIE 286 88 amp TILERIIL ETA LELES LLL l A Adi CH
234. n using WBK30 s pre trigger mode the actual number of pre trigger scans acquired may be up to three scans less than the pre trigger scan count programmed in the acquisition configuration dialog box WBK30 Memory Options 988296 WBK30 pg 3 Enable Overflow Protection Mode causes WaveView to use Overflow Protection for all acquisitions Usually when buffer overflow occurs the acquisition stops and all data in the FIFO is purged Overflow Protection forces WaveBook to transfer all data that existed up to the time of the overflow Note that data is preserved if you cancel a transfer by selecting the STOP button in either the Scope or Direct to Disk window Note Disable the Overflow Protection Mode if you do not want data from a stopped acquisition DaqX Programming of WBK30 Programmers wanting to create their own programs should refer to the separate Programmer s Manual p n 1008 0901 Note that only DaqX version API versions 2 4 and higher supports WBK30 The older wbk prefixed commands cannot address the WBK30 WBK30 Specifications WBK30 pg 4 Name Function WaveBook Memory Option expands internal data FIFO from 64 Ksamples to 8 64 Msamples Memory Capacity M 1 000 000 16 7 M 67 1M 134 2 M Packed Samples 11 4M 44 7 M 89 4 M Maximum Acquisition Length Pre Trigger Acquisitions Same as memory capacity Post Trigger Acquisitions Depends on PC transfer rate acquisition rate both in samples per sec
235. nded wrist strap etc Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components Only handle boards by their edges or ORBs if applicable Ensure boards do not come into contact with foreign elements such as oils water and industrial particulate Be careful to avoid component damage while the WBK16 module is open Always remove bridge completion headers CN 115 from the unit before soldering resistors in the headers The CN 115 1 serves the same function as the CN 115 adapter plug and can be used for all of the same bridge configurations detailed in the Configuration Diagrams section of this chapter The CN 115 1 can be populated with either standard axial lead resistors or square precision resistors Each StrainBook and WBK16 channel has a on board 2x8 resistor socket with rows designated A through H CN 115 1 is a removable plug in board that can be pre configured for various bridge options It will often be the case that both the top and bottom plug in sides of the CN 115 1 card will need to have resistors installed to create the desired bridge configuration The configurations are illustrated earlier in the chapter In general note that O Half bridge completion resistors consist of RG and RH or RG1 and RH1 O Quarter bridge completion resistors consist of RA RC and RE or RA1 RC1 and RE1 O Shunt resistors consist of RB RD and RF or RB1 RD1 and RF1 WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 19 In the
236. ng auxiliary power Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 15 In regard to adding thermocouples to WBK40 WBK41 or DBK84 modules Channels through 7 are used for the first seven thermocouples and channels 9 through 15 are used for the second set of seven Channels 0 and 8 are not used for thermocouple input but instead measure the two CJCs In addition to thermocouple measurements each input channel can be configured for a fixed voltage gain of 100 When in this mode voltage can be measured in the range of 100 mV Built into the WBK40 and WBK41 1s a 16 bit 200 kHz A D converter that samples all of the TC inputs including inputs attached to the DBK84 expansion modules The SYNC connection between the WBK40 or WBK41 module and the WaveBook 516E ensures that thermocouple measurements on the module are synchronized with higher speed measurements on the WaveBook WaveBook software automatically compensates for the difference in sampling rates between the WaveBook and WBK40 or WBK41 ensuring that there is exact time correlation between readings from both devices The WBK40 and WBK41 automatically perform thermocouple linearization and cold junction compensation providing accurate and stable temperature readings in either C F or K Typical TC accuracy is better than 1 0 C with channel to channel variation and noise typically better than 0 2 C Digital I O WBK41 Only Forty Digital
237. nging 1s typically less than 1 ms Recoveries from quasi static overloads that generate high DC bias shifts are controlled by the accelerometer input RC time constant that is fixed during manufacture Power Supply Effects The nominal power supply voltage recommended by most manufacturers is 15 to 24 V Units may be used with voltages up to 28 volts Sensitivity variations caused by voltage change is typically 0 05 volt Power supply ripple should be less than 1 mVrms WBK14 Dynamic Signal Input Module 988396 WBK14 pg 7 Connector This parameter specifies the connector type and size 4 48 6 40 10 32 coaxial etc and the location on the sensor that is top or side usually on the hex base Where there is no connector on the sensor an integral cable is specified with the length and the connector that is integral 6 ft to 10 32 Electrical Grounding Case Grounded Design In case grounded designs the common lead on the internal impedance matching electronics is tied to the accelerometer case The accelerometer base stud assembly forms the signal common and electrically connects to the shell of the output connector Case grounded accelerometers are connected electrically to any conductive surface on which they are mounted When these units are used take care to avoid errors due to ground noise lsolated Base Design To prevent ground noise error many accelerometers have base isolated design The outer case base of the accelerometer
238. ngs p p 10V 5V 2V 1V 500mV 200mV 100mV OmV Waveform Modes Continuous sine Sweep sine Custom sine Output Impedance 50 Ohm Accuracy 0 1dB DC Accuracy Excluding Noise Applies to 2 Pole and Bypass Filter Modes Accuracy at 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Range igea Maximum Offset Range Typical Maximum _ These numbers are valid for 1 year after calibration and over the entire operating temperature range of the unit Specifications are continued on following page WBK18 pg 24 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module Typical Performance Characteristics WBK 18 Frequency Spectrums typical Each spectrum was taken from a WaveBook 516A that was sampling at 20kSamples sec 4096 point FFT B H Window 3 Vpp 1000Hz Sine wave input 5V range 10Hz High pass filter 10 kHz 8 pole Low pass filter 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 g 0000 dB normalized 8 Vpp 1000Hz Sine wave input 5V range 10Hz High pass filter 10 kHz 2 pole Low pass filter 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 Hertz Geel ip Ce mage ahi oe T E ee een Bees ER a s7 EAT PES SRATI AOR TU RTTA KEN 2 forded bey eae N OD x D hanen aa ty ty dB normalized do 120 bisa c s 8 Vpp 1000Hz Sine wave input 5V range 10Hz High pass filter 200 kHz Low pass filter Bypass mode 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 Hertz testy l l gt e N O O eee es tnai ere ze oes Avy oe gt bot gt F Rin
239. nnector to the WBK10A POWER IN DIN 5 connector via a CA 115 power cable The CA 115 is a 6 inch long cable which has a 5 pin DIN male connector at each end CAUTION An incorrect use of power can damage equipment or degrade performance Prior to connecting your devices to power calculate your system s power requirements Reference Note Information pertaining to connecting the system to power and calculating the amount of power needed can be found in the WaveBook User s Manual A PDF version is included on the data acquisition CD and can be accessed from the CD s intro screen by using the lt View PDFs gt button Information regarding the use of CA 37 T cables is provided on page 10 Using Fastener Panels to Stack Modules Fastener panels are illustrated and discussed on page 8 Note 1 Each DBK84 module requires a unique address setting as explained on page 13 Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 9 What are T Cables and how are they used CAUTION M Turn power OFF to the acquisition devices and to externally connected equipment prior to connecting cables Electrical shock or damage to equipment can result even under low voltage conditions A T Cable is a ribbon cable that extends the connections of one of the ports it plugs into thus allowing a second cable to plug into that port The following figure clarifies the concept T Cables are available in different lengths
240. non committed dry contact on two pins of a single StrainBook or WBK16 channel connector The WBK16 LC can be used for virtually all single value shunt calibration requirements some of which are not possible with the internal FET analog switch provisions in the standard channel configurations WBKI16 LC Make the DB9 pin 2 connection to the low side or the high side of the circuit BUT NEVER TO BOTH Doing so will create a short circuit that could damage equipment External Shunt Resistor Low Side Connection Sense Excitation External 4 Bridge a a r A See CAUTION WBK16 LC Excitation 56nse Full Bridge with External Shunt Resistor DB9 Pin 2 Connected to the Low Side Reference Note The WBK16 LC Load Cell Shunt Cal internal option board is detailed in an early section That section includes an alternate schematic for connecting Pin 2 to the High side WBK16 pg 32 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module The External Shunt Calibration method requires that the user enter the following 5 parameters Excitation The value of the constant voltage source used to excite the gage Max Load The maximum load value that the gage is expected to measure This value could be less than the max rated load of the gage Quiescent Load The minimum load value that the gage is expected to measure This value could be greater than the minimum rated load of the gage Point I Units The user supplied at res
241. not respond for 30 seconds please reboot and change the settings in the configuration utility c Click the Test Hardware tab Test Results d Click the lt Resource Test gt button joie Torun click Test Note The test results have two components Resource Tests and Performance Tests Each is described briefly Resource Test_ Daq Configuration Test Hardware Tab Resource Tests The resource tests are intended to test system capability for the current device configuration Resource tests are pass fail Test failure may indicate a lack of availability of the resource or a possible resource conflict Base Address Test This resource test checks the base address for the selected port Failure of this test may indicate that the port is not properly configured within the system See relevant operating system and computer manufacturer s documentation to correct the problem Interrupt Level Test Tests the ability of a parallel port to generate interrupts Failure of this test may indicate that the parallel port may be currently unable to generate the necessary hardware interrupt while other parallel port devices may work OK in this mode Some parallel port devices such as printers do not require interrupts to work properly See relevant operating system and computer manufacturer s documentation to correct the problem 1066 0901 rev 1 0 967896 WBK40 amp WBK41 IG 5 Performance Tests These ty
242. nt to install a resistor at location R1 The electrical relation of CN 189 components is shown in the following schematic P3 7 Pad Jumper a T 716 5 2 5 SEN a C J zeg 4 pam I Siih HH 0EB E P4 7 Pad Jumper CN 189 DB 9 Adapter Option The CN 189 is intended for convenience and is not shielded Higher signal quality will be obtained with the use of shielded cables such as the CA 177 strain gage cable WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 13 R1 Shunt or Load Resistor User Supplied P3 7 Pad Jumper na me dla aa oa Team cee 8 N 7 IN 6 SEN 5 EX 4 RE 3 RC 2 RA 1 EX iT T aoe Tad P4 7 Pad Jumper CN 189 Schematic tion In Resistor Used in R Short6and7 2 Bridge Using RA 2 Wire Short3and4 oo 3 Bridge Using RC 2 Wire ShortSand6 o J o o 4 Bridge Using RE 2 Wire Short6and7 o oo 5 High Gain Amp Ground Path Shor Shot5and6 Eee ee EXT 5 and 6 7 High Gain Amp RE Ground Path INT Shor1and2 8 High Gain Amp RC Ground Path ANT Short2and3 9 High Gain Amp RA Ground Path ANT Shor4and5 10 Current Measurement Differential Shuntresistor in RI Differential Load Resistor S Load resistor in R1 For the functions listed in the preceding table internal WBK16 configurations still apply as indicate
243. nter These values of n were used to derive the frequency range tables below Sampling error can also be reduced by averaging many samples together Assuming the input signal is asynchronous to the WBK17 s internal timebase sampling error can be divided by the square root of the number of samples taken The averaging can be done with PC based software The WBK17 has the ability to measure 1 10 100 or 1000 periods dividing the sampling error by 1 10 100 or 1000 This is done inside the WBK17 and may eliminate the need for any averaging to be done in the PC For high accuracy on high frequency inputs multiple period measurement and PC based averaging can be done The WBK17 has the ability to provide various frequency ranges that are based upon different ticksizes averaging options and counter size 16 bit or 32 bit values The frequency ranges are designed to fit a wide array of possible applications Within each range the sampling error decreases dramatically as the input period increases The ranges will get smaller as required accuracy increases Upper 16 bits of the 32 bit counter Lower 16 bits of the 32 bit counter Range Hz Ticksize Averaging Range Hz Ticksize nS Averaging nS Option Option 15u 1500u 20000 1 100 20000 150u 15m 2000 10 1k 2000 Frequency Ranges for a 16 bit value sampling error is less than 0 2 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 15 WBK17 pg 16 Each frequen
244. ol based on acquisition data The WBK17 pattern detection module looks at the 16 bit data being returned on a given channel and generates another signal for each channel Detect1 for Channel 1 Detect2 for Channel 2 etc These signals act like data markers for each channel s data whether that data is counts period pulsewidth timing or encoder position A channel s detect signal will be high when the channel s data meets any one of 16 pre programmed setpoint windows the detect signal will be low when the channel s data does not meet any of the setpoint windows The detect signal has the timing resolution of the scan period as seen in the diagram below The detect signal can change no faster than the scan frequency 1 scan period Detectl Detect Detect a E E Acquisition streat ocan Group Ch 1 2 3 4 ete acar Period Example Diagram of Detection Signals for Channels 1 2 and 3 Each channel can have 16 detection setpoints Detection setpoints act on 16 bit data only Since the WBK17 has 32 bit counters for each channel data is returned 16 bits at a time The lower word the higher word or both lower and higher words can be part of the scan group Each channel has 16 detection setpoints for the counter s lower 16 bit value and 16 detection setpoints for the counter s higher 16 bit value Any mix of setpoints can be programmed to drive the detect signal
245. oldered to the DB9 to eliminate noise created by contact resistance variations The protective hoods should be installed over the 9 pin connectors during use to avoid draft induced thermal electric noise in the connector solder joints Molded cables wider than 1 23 inches will not fit WBK16 s connector spacing CA 177 Strain Gage Cable Use cable with an overall shield connected to the DB9 metal shell Twisted pair cable with paired leads for signal input excitation output and remote sense input are also beneficial The wires should be soldered to the cable s DB9 connector to eliminate noise created by contact resistance variations The protective hoods should be installed over the 9 pin connectors during use to avoid draft induced thermal electric noise in the connector solder joints Molded cables wider than 1 23 inches will not fit the DB9 connectors due to available space between the unit s connectors Cable Pinout CA 177 Strain Gage Cable Pinout Cable CA 177 Specifications DB9 Male End P1 _Unterminated End P2 fo Pin 1 Brown wire hood with thumbscrews Folder cup DB9 P2 Cable End Unterminated blunt cut P1 Cable End DB9 male assembled metal Cable Type Belden 9614 or equivalent Wire Gauge 24 AWG Outer Shield Foil and 65 braid Pnz Pupewre Number of Conductors Nine 9 plus drain J Dimensions Length 72 4 Ping Whiewe Connector width 1 220 maximum hell DISINI P1 to P2 P
246. ollowing steps Select load cell or transducer from the pull down Sensor Type menu Select shunt from the pull down Calibration Method menu Enter a maximum intended value in the Maximum Applied Load cell in engineering units ee A Enter a value slightly below zero engineering units in the Quiescent Tare cell in engineering units Note if the transducer must measure bi directionally for example pressure and vacuum enter the maximum anticipated negative engineering units 5 Enter the physical equivalence in engineering units in the Point 2 cell of the shunt calibration resistance 6 This method assumes the 0 00 engineering units already in the Point 1 cell is the intended physical equivalence of the non shunted transducer or load cell Possible exceptions are atmospheric pressure transducers and load cells installed under load in which the relative change is not the measurement of interest 7 Push the channel calibrate button and wait for the window verifying successful calibration Using the CN 115 1 User Configurable Plug In Card Option Remove the WBK16 module from power and disconnect the unit from all externally connected equipment prior to connecting cables signal lines and or removing the cover to install or remove components Electric shock or damage to equipment can result even under low voltage conditions Take ESD precautions packaging proper handling grou
247. on Properties _ 2 General Sharing Connect using BA 3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast Ethernet Controller 3C 905 Components checked are used by this connection Y NwLink NetBIOS M NwLink IPS SPS NetBIOS Compatible Transport Proto UE E ntemet Protocol TCPYIP Install Uninstall Properties Description Transmission Control Protocolelnternet Protocol The default Wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in taskbar when connected Local Area Connection Properties 5 Double click the Internet Protocol TCP IP component previous figure The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties box will appear following figure Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 3 x General fou can get IF settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Othenvise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings f Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address F address Subnet mask Default gateway C Use the following ONS server addresses Prefered DHS server Alternate DHS server Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide 919896 WBK25 pg 9 Configure the Computer s TCP IP settings as follows Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties i 2 x General
248. onal condensation overvoltage installation category classification with limits for transient overvoltage dependent on the nominal line voltage to earth Category I implies signals without high transient values Category II applies to typical mains power lines with some transients Safety Conditions Users must comply with all relevant safety conditions in the user s manual and the Declarations of Conformity This manual and Daq hardware make use of the following Warning and Caution symbols If you see either of these symbols on a product carefully read the related information and be alert to the possibility of personal injury i This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible injury or death from electrical shock under noted conditions damage under noted conditions f This warning caution symbol is used to warn of possible personal injury or equipment Daq products contain no user serviceable parts refer all service to qualified personnel The specific safety conditions for CE compliance vary by product but general safety conditions include The operator must observe all safety cautions and operating conditions specified in the documentation for all hardware used The host computer and all connected equipment must be CE compliant All power must be off to the device and externally connected equipment before internal access to the device is permitted Isolation voltage ratings do not exce
249. ond and capacity as follows Maximum Acquisition Length T x acquisition rate Where T Time to overflow Capacity acquisition rate transfer rate Example Acquiring 500 K unpacked samples per second with a WBK30 16 and a PC capable of transferring 200 Ksamples second overflow will occur in T 8 3M 500K 200K 27 6 seconds thus Acquisition Length 27 6 seconds x 500K 13 8 million samples Pre Trigger Mode Allows indefinite pre trigger duration regardless of PC resources and transfer rate Environmental 0 C to 70 C compatible with WaveBook internal environment User Installation Requires main board modification for Wavebook 512 shipped before July 1998 Plug in compatible with Wavebook 512 shipped after July 1998 Mechanical Mounting Friction fit with 40 pin header Fit with foam rubber spacers in Wavebook 512 Power 300 mA maximum 200 mA typical at 5 V Dimensions 2 6 x 4 1 inches 988296 WBK30 Memory Options WBK30 Frequently Asked Questions Question Answer Question Answer Question Answer Question Answer Question Answer WBK30 Memory Options How does the addition of the WBK30 memory module affect the operation of a WaveBook The WBK30 memory option plugs into the WaveBook and expands the standard 64K of FIFO memory up to 128 megabytes of RAM By increasing the FIFO size a user can sample at higher speeds for a longer period of time before encountering a
250. onnected input that is measured will result in an off scale reading This is accomplished by applying a small bias current to each of the channel inputs Whenever a valid input is absent the bias current saturates the input amplifier resulting in the off scale reading When in this off scale state however the input amplifier draws more current from the power supply Specifically the power draw of the module from 15 V will increase by 0 75 mA for each open channel Tr If available power is limited insert shorted TC plugs into unused channels This will minimize power consumption Note that it is not enough to simply avoid scanning unused channels to minimize power consumption the channels must be physically shorted in the hardware The power requirements detailed in the product specification assume worst case connection conditions Digital I O Power Counter Timer and DAC Connections WBK41 Only The front panel of the WBK41 includes removable plug in screw terminal blocks for Digital I O Power Counter Timer and DAC see following picture Note that the DACs are only available if the DBK46 option is installed Signal assignments are provided on page 2 CHi CHA CHS Ha CHS CHE CH7 CHa CHI CH1 GHIZ GHZ His CHIS erle rle ele ey eles ele le ele ee ele rie res Li oy COAINTEN Ta OF Oo TAL LO AIST A Or os gate Ai set yo ge oR edt i ada se W See ier ane won s a oo 8 tors al pt iM i i ai ia gh i al DGA
251. onnectors DACO for DACs Digital to Analog Converters The S ACOM DACs are designated DACs H DAC1 DACO DAC1 DAC2 and DAC3 They are only F ACOM available if the DBK46 analog output option is z DAC2 installed Note that the DBK46 option is a Factory z ACOM install option only Refer to the DBK46 section of DAC3 this document module for additional information pg 2 WBK40 amp WBK41 926896 Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules WBK40 Front Panel CHE GHil a CHI CHIa CHI GHIA H h GH Che CHa CHS LHe CHF i kF WEBEKAQ LE MODULE AJE WBK40 Front Panel Connectors The Mini TC and Analog Common Connectors exist on both the WBK40 and WBK41 Modules CH1 through CH15 This row contains 14 mini TC connectors These are for connecting thermocouples to channels 1 through Mini TC Connectors 7 and to channels 9 through 15 Channels 0 and 8 have no mini TC connectors as these two channels are used for cold junction compensation CJC Analog Analog Common This is a dual pin receptacle located next to the Channel 15 TC connector Common A typical use of the ACOM connection would be to attach the shield of a shielded thermocouple If a thermocouple shield is connected to a WBK40 or WBK41 module leave the shield unconnected at the other end of the thermocouple to avoid a ground loop The modules built in TC channels are accessed via mini TC connectors on the front panel This is true for both the WBK4O0 and the WB
252. ons shipped with the device prior to installation Reference Note The WBK23 is shipped with separate installation instructions Refer to that documentation prior to installing a WBK23 plug in board PARAEEEE PCt Ce ASGOGAEEEED SESS PIGSIV 406 re re was 070 ULF a i re The WBK23 PCI EPP Interface Plug In Board Features e Provides high speed data transfer between desktop PCs and WaveBook or DaqBook systems e Easy jumperless plug and play installation e 100 PCI 2 1 compliant The WBK23 is a PCI EPP Enhanced Parallel Port interface that enables high speed data transfer between a WaveBook or DaqBook system and a desktop PC with an available PCI slot With typical transfer rates of up to 550 Ksamples s with a sample size equal to 2 bytes the WBK23 is up to five times faster than the standard parallel port WBK23 PCI EPP Plug in Board 988696 WBK23 page 1 WBK23 is plug and play compatible with all versions of Windows operating systems to automatically configure I O addresses and IRQ s Because the WBK23 is 100 PCI 2 1 compliant it can share IRQ s with other PCI devices The WBK23 is backward compatible with standard 4 and 8 bit bi directional parallel ports The board can be used with other parallel port devices including scanners and tape backup systems Specifications Bus Interface PCI 2 1 Compliant Connector DB25 female Transfer Rates 1 Mbyte s typical LPT Address Plu
253. ook systems refer to the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 The PDF versions of these documents can be accessed from the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button on the CD s opening screen STEP 5 Configure the Computer s Network Settings Applies to dedicated networks only If using a LAN Local Area Network which has a DHCP server skip this section and continue with STEP 7 Configure and Test the System using the Daq Configuration Applet page 12 If using a LAN Local Area Network which has no DHCP server skip this section and continue with STEP 6 Configure Device Network Settings using DaqIPConfig page 10 1 Open the Control Panel by navigating from the Windows Desktop as follows Start Menu gt Settings Control Panel 2 Double click the Network and Dial up Connections icon 3 Double click the Network Connection icon for the network that the WBK235 is connected to Local 4rea Connection Status i ajx General Connection Status Connected Duration 06 26 28 Speed 100 0 Mbps Sent am i Recerved L the 182 650 162 359 i Disable Local Area Connection Status 4 Inthe Local Area Connection Status box previous figure click on the lt Properties gt button The Local Area Connection Properties box will appear following figure WBK25 pg 8 919896 WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide Local Area Connecti
254. opra E 15 MHz o tia nterface WBK1I2A and WBKI3A Block Diagram Hardware Setup Configuration All WBK12A and WBK13A series configurations are controlled by software There are no hardware settings Installation There is no user installation permitted See notes on page 1 Software Setup Reference Notes gt Setup information pertaining to power expansion control and expansion signal connections is contained in the System Setup and Power Options chapter of the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 gt For detailed WaveView information refer to the WaveView Document PDF that is included on the data acquisition CD The document can be accessed using the lt View PDFs gt button on the CD s opening screen pg 2 WBK12A and WBK13A 988396 Programmable Low Pass Filter Cards WBK12A and WBK13A Specifications Name Function Low Pass Filter Frequency Cutoff Range WBK12A Programmable Low Pass Filter Card 100 kHz 75 kHz 60 kHz 400 Hz WBK13A Programmable Low Pass Filter Card With bypass defined as Fc 300 kHz N where N 3 to 750 SSH Anti Alias Frequencies determined by software control Number of Channels 8 Accuracy 0 03 FS DC for WaveBook 512A Connector Internal to WaveBook 512A 516 516A For WaveBook 516 Series see the table on 516E and WBK10A page 4 of this document module two 36 pin sockets mate with 36 pin connectors Offset 1 LSB max for WaveBook 512A Programmable Gain Amplifier Ranges Aper
255. or Power Out e HD 15M Expansion Control In e HD 15F Expansion Control Out e 2 BNC connectors one for analog Expansion Signal In one for analog Expansion Signal Out Reference Notes gt Setup information pertaining to power expansion control and expansion signal connections is contained in the System Setup and Power Options chapter of the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 gt For detailed WaveView information refer to the WaveView Document PDF that is included on the data acquisition CD The document can be accessed using the lt View PDFs gt button on the CD s opening screen pg 2 WBKIOA gggggz WBKAOA Analog Expansion Module Specifications WaveBook 516 516A 516E and WBK10A Analog Specifications For either a stand alone WaveBook or for a WBK10A with a WaveBook Channel Capacity WaveBook 516E 8 built in voltage channels expandable up to 72 channels via WBK options In addition WaveBook 516E can accommodate up to 3 WaveBook 516A 512A or WBK40 options in any combination Each added on WaveBook can be expanded up to 72 channels The maximum WBK41 capacity is 224 T C channels 4 analog output channels 272 digital O channels and 6 counter timer channels WaveBook 516 and 516A 8 differential expandable up to 72 differential BNC Input Connectors Center conductor is Channel Hi outer conductor is Channel Low Input Voltage Ranges DC Specifications a Standard Unit With WBK11A Note
256. or WaveBook applications where data transfer speeds may be critical A single WaveBook attached to a WBK25 can operate at its maximum Msamples s sampling rate while transferring data continuously to the PC If the application requires that more than one WaveBook be attached to one WBK25 with each operating at its maximum 1 Mreading s sampling rate contact the factory for the latest information on data transfer rates We will continue to improve the WBK25 s data transfer rates as PCs and networks themselves increase in speed Users will be able to perform the upgrades in the field If the WBK25 is used with DaqBook 2000A DaqBook 2000X and or WBK40 series options then up to three of these devices can be attached to one WBK25 and will be capable of simultaneously transferring data at their maximum sampling rate If the WBK25 is attached to a shared Ethernet network the data transfer rates will be dependent on the network traffic at the time It is not possible to guarantee maximum data transfer rates in this mode However the WaveBook offers internal memory option cards WBK30 series for applications such as this so that the acquired data can be locally stored in the event that the shared network traffic prohibits the WaveBook from transferring data at the same rate at which it was acquired Note It is possible to attach multiple WBK25 units to a single PC that has more than one Ethernet port It is also possible to attach several WBK25 uni
257. owered first Other power up sequences will result in software s failure to recognize all components e First power on the WBK expansion modules e Second power on the WBK40 or WBK41 or DBK modules that are connected to the expansion ports of the WaveBook S516E or WBK25 e Finally power on the WaveBook 516E or WBK25 An exception to this power up scheme is to power on the entire system at once 1066 0901 rev 1 0 967896 WBK40 amp WBK41 Installation Guide IG 1 These instructions begin with the assumption that the following two conditions are satisfied 1 the WaveBook S16E or WBK25S is already connected to the Ethernet and 2 the associated software from the data acquisition CD is installed If needed refer to the documents associated with those devices STEP 1 Connect the WBK40 or WBK41 to an Expansion Port on the WaveBook 516E or on the WBK25 FEEFEE EEEE bl To Ethernet er WBK40 Connecting a WBK40 to a WaveBook S16E What you will need One parallel port cable e g a CA 35 2 2 foot or a CA 35 12 1 foot cable DB25 Parallel Port Connector How to make the connection 1 Place the WaveBook 516E or WBK25 power switch in the OFF 0 position if it is not already OFF 2 Connect the parallel port cable to the parallel port connector on the rear panel of the WBK40 or WBK41 See the preceding picture 3 Connect the other end of the cable to one of three expansion port
258. pears from the output signal lead to ground There are two basic MOSFET configurations commonly used One exhibits a 7 8 V bias and the second a 9 12 V bias Operation of the two circuits is identical except for the available signal swing The low voltage version typically exhibits 5 10 uVrms versus 10 20 uVrms for the high voltage Thermal Shock Temperature Transients Piezoelectric accelerometers exhibit a transient output that is a function of a temperature s rate of change This thermal shock is usually expressed in g C and is related to e Non uniform mechanical stresses set up in the accelerometer structure e A pyroelectric effect in piezoelectric materials an electrical charge is produced by the temperature gradient across the crystal This quasi static effect produces a low frequency voltage input to the MOSFET amplifier This voltage is usually well below the low frequency corner but the effect can reduce the peak clipping level and cause loss of data This effect does not affect the accelerometer s basic sensitivity or the data unless the thermal shift in the operation bias level results in clipping Where drastic thermal shifts are expected use 12 V bias models The effect s severity is related to the mass of the accelerometer In 100 mV g industrial units the effect is usually negligible Using rubber thermal boots can reduce the effect significantly Overload Recovery Recovery time from clipping due to over ra
259. pes of tests are intended to check various device functions using the current device configuration Performance tests provide quantitative results for each supported functional group Test results represent maximum rates the various operations can be performed The rates depend on the selected parallel port protocol and vary according to port hardware capabilities Testing the WBK40 or WBK41 may in some cases cause the system to hang If test results are not displayed in 30 seconds or the system does not seem to be responding reboot the system Upon power up re enter the Daq Configuration and change the device configuration settings to those that work properly This completes the instructions for connecting a WBK40 or WBK41 to a WaveBook 516E or WBK25 At this point you should refer to the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 and to the WBK40 amp WBK41 section of the WBK Options Manual p n 489 0902 for additional system information The document includes pinouts information on system expansion data acquisition and links to software and programming documents in PDF format You can access the documents directly from the opening screen of the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button A Reference Notes Q gt Ifyou experience difficulties please consult the additional user documentation before calling technical support User documentation is included on your data acquisition CD and is installed automatically as
260. play it in the Sensor Configuration Calibration window First click on the Channel Values tab Then click on the Take a Single Reading button on the tool bar or choose Take a Single Reading from the Calibration menu item Displaying a Single Reading In the sensor calibration program it is possible to take a single reading and Displayed readings are based on the most recent calibration Changing the calibration parameters without calibrating the system will not affect the channel values Channel Values Tab Selected Calibration Parameters Channel Values Bridge Input Hie scaling A D In Units Units Bridge ri Gain alt ts Gain Moks Scaling Offset Unita 1 cooo 1 00 2 500 1 000 25 aooo f 7 goood f 100 250 1 000 2 500 500 000 1 0 0000 1 00 2 500 1 000 2 500 s500 000 1 booa I 1 00 2500 tooo 3500 f 2500 00 1 0 0000 I 1 00 Spo 000 2 500 4 2500 00 1 0 0000 1 00 ooo 2 500 1 0 0000 1 00 000 L 1 o 0000 1 00 oo l 1 r Yi Offset Sca ing Null Bridge Units StrainBook WaveView Software Channel Values Simplified Block Diagram The simplified block diagram above can be used to better understand the relationship of channel amplifiers and their corresponding user interface columns visible in the Channel Values Tab These columns are represented in the tab figure and in the following table Bridge mV The input value from the bridge The value is in millivolts Input Gain The Gain sett
261. plays the time and date that the channel was w i the rene A not been calibrated Not Calibrated appears in the box To change the units highlight the desired box type in the new parameters and then press lt Enter gt on the keyboard or select another box with the mouse Up to 5 characters can be entered into this column To fill the entire column with the value of channel one make sure yes is selected in the Calibrate column Then click on the column label with the mouse A message box will appear Click on yes All channels with the calibrate function enabled will be filled Changing the units here will also change the units column in the WaveView Configuration main window Used to label channels Sensor Label A serial number or other identifying label for the sensor can be entered here Up to 39 characters may be entered and 16 will be displayed The fill option is available for this column see Units WBK16 pg 26 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module Calibration Parameters Channel Values Calibration Parameters Channel Values Exc Gage Sensitivity Shunt Bridge Full RA Full Rated Max 4 Quiescent Point Faint 1 Point 2 Point 2 Sensor Label Volts Factor Resistor Resistor Loe Load Load Tare ae i Amv Ohm Ohm ni pff Units rits nits v Units mv Units S H 100W 2 000 19850 350 3000 0 0 0 S N 10 0 3 000 30 3000 0 3000 0 i S N 10 0 3000 0
262. ply options Reference Notes gt The WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 provides tables for calculating system power requirements and discusses power supply options gt Encoder wiring diagrams are included in the Encoder section of functional concepts These drawings begin on page 23 CE Kit If your WBK17 is to be part of a CE compliant system you will need to use part number WBK17 CE KIT The kit includes the terminal block headers and cable housings that are needed to cover exposed sections of connectors and wiring thus bringing your WBK17 up to meet or exceed CE standards For a list of applicable CE Safety and EMC standards as well as the CE Compliant Operating Conditions that have been specified for WBK17 refer to the WBK17 Declaration of Conformity p n 1064 0740 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 3 Using Fastener Panels to Stack Modules For convenient mounting the WBK17 has the same footprint as other WBK modules and WaveBooks Fastener Panels sometimes referred to as splice plates provide a means of stacking WaveBooks and modules Optional screw on handles are available for portable applications Refer to this manual s introduction for assembly information When using WBK17 modules in conjunction with other WBK modules the WBK17 modules must be located closest to the WaveBook due to the CA 217 cable length The order of the other WBK modules does not matter Fastener panels wi
263. possible options 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Four Encoders Example Setup Channel Programming Setup Encoder1 A Encoder Mode 1X option 16 bit counter Latch on SOS Encoder1 B Period Mode 1Xperiod option 16 bit counter Map channel doesn t gate Ticksize to 20000ns Encoder2 A Encoder Mode 2X option 16 bit counter Latch on SOS Encoder2 B Period Mode 1Xperiod option 16 bit counter Map channel doesn t gate Ticksize to 2000ns Encoder3 A Encoder Mode 4X option 16 bit counter Latch on SOS Encoder3 B Period Mode 1Xperiod option 16 bit counter Map channel doesn t gate Ticksize to 200ns Encoder4 A Encoder Mode 4X option 16 bit counter Latch on SOS Encoder4 B Period Mode 1Xperiod option 16 bit counter Map channel doesn t gate Ticksize to 200ns With the encoders connected in this manner there is no relative positioning information available since there is no Z signal connection Therefore only distance traveled can be measured on the A channels This means that for each encoder we can only know distance traveled and velocity of travel Setpoints can be done just like in the previous example The digital output port can be updated by any individual channel a set of selected channels or by all channels Digital Inputs The WBK17 has 16 general purpose digital inputs that can be scanned into an acquisition along with any other channel on the WaveBook system These are availa
264. r After Stable Mode The following time periods T1 through T5 pertain to the above drawing In Trigger After Stable mode the input signal to the debounce module is required to have a period of stability after an incoming edge in order for that edge to be accepted passed through to the counter module The debounce time for this example is equal to T2 and TS T1 Inthe example above the input signal goes high at the beginning of time period T1 but never stays high for a period of time equal to the debounce time setting equal to T2 for this example T2 At the end of time period T2 the input signal has transitioned high and stayed there for the required amount of time therefore the output transitions high If the Input signal never stabilized in the high state long enough no transition would have appeared on the output and the entire disturbance on the input would have been rejected T3 During time period T3 the input signal remained steady No change in output is seen T4 During time period T4 the input signal has more disturbances and does not stabilize in any state long enough No change in the output is seen T5 At the end of time period T5 the input signal has transitioned low and stayed there for the required amount of time therefore the output goes low WBK17 pg 8 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Trigger Before Stable Mode In the Trigger Before Stable mode the output of the debounce module im
265. r of ticks that make up the time measurement Counter Options The following mode options are available with the WBK17 and are detailed in the upcoming pages A separate block diagram has been created for each mode Note that the OPT numbers relate to sections of the block diagrams Counter Totalize Mode see page 12 OPTO Selects totalize or clear on read mode OPT1 Determines if the counter is to rollover or stop at the top OPT2 Determines whether the counter is 16 bits Counter Low or 32 bits Counter High OPT3 Determines which signal latches the counter outputs into the data stream back to the WaveBook Start of scan or mapped channel OPT4 Allows the mapped channel to gate the counter OPT5 Allows the mapped channel to decrement the counter OPT6 Allows the mapped channel to increment the counter Period Mode see page 14 OPT 1 0 Determines the number of periods to time per measurement 1 10 100 1000 OPT2 Determines whether the period is to be measured with a 16 bit Counter Low or 32 bit Counter High OPT4 Allows the mapped channel to gate the counter OPT6 Allows the mapped channel to be measured for periods Pulsewidth Mode sce page 17 OPT2 Determines whether the pulsewidth is to be measured with a 16 bit counter Counter Low or a 32 bit counter Counter High OPT4 Allows the mapped channel to gate the counter OPT6 Allows the mapped channel to be measured for pulsewidth WBK17 Counter
266. ration View of window with scrollbar to the right 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module Changing Low Pass Filter Displays To change the LPF display choose Advanced Features from the System menu item Enter desired values in the LPF Corner Frequencies Settings dialog box The frequency range for the first LPF setting is 2Hz to 200Hz The frequency range for the second LPF setting is 200 Hz to 20000 Hz Making changes to the LPF Settings or the LPF Cutoff Column of WaveView s Main YJ Window will not result in any change to the actual filter You must physically change frequency cutoff selection resistors so they correspond with the values indicated by the software or visa versa Reference Note For information on customizing the Low Pass Filters refer to Low Pass Filter Customization in Chapter 6 Bridge Configurations StrainBook616 WBK16 LPF Corner Frequency Settings Select Device l J Options Erop aJi Ifyou have changed the comer frequency on any of the StrainBook616 WEK16 Sensor Calibration yi StrainBook 616 or WweETE channels by installing a different nBioo J resistor pack please enter the new comer frequencies below Pe Sept ow Beet 1000 00 CHO 10 00 000 00 CHO 10 00 000 00 CHOS 10 00 000 00 CHO4 10 00 1000 00 CHOS 10 00 1000 00 CHOE 10 00 1000 00 CHO 10 00 1000 00 CHOS StrainBookbi6 f WBE16 LPF Corner Frequencies C 25 OO om OT e d d 0 ie je
267. ration is chosen If these resistors are 120 ohm resistors which they never really need to be they draw 41 7 milliamps at 10 volts An external full bridge of 120 ohm resistors and requiring an additional 83 3 milliamps will definitely overload the regulator and result in a reduced excitation level and an incorrect signal level For two reasons the best choice for the reference node resistors is 1000 ohms The parts will draw less excitation current helping the regulators and the lower degree of self heating will result in less drift WBK16 pg 36 949794 WBK16 Strain Gage Module 6 Provide adequate input power to each WBK16 in a system Providing the proper level of input supply voltage is very important Insufficient input voltage can cause the WBK16 to exhibit channel to channel excitation interaction All individual channels can be set properly and then begin to lose voltage as additional channels are connected It is imperative that the WBK 16 not be starved for input voltage This can very easily happen if more than one WBK16 is powered from the supplied TR 40U power adapter or some other smaller and inadequate source A WBK16 can require as much as 25 watts of input power if configured for eight channels of 120 ohm bridges at 10 volts of excitation The 15V 2 4A 36 watts output of the TR 40U is not sufficient for two WBK16 s A variation of this problem can occur if a group of WBK16 s is daisy chained together with an insuffici
268. rd Remove the WBK17 and all devices connected to it from power before removing the WBK17 s cover plate Failure to do so could result in electric shock and possible death CAUTION Be careful to avoid component damage while WBK17 enclosure is open Expansion Expansion PTAL CUE SAUNE Expansion Expansion Ea al Control Out Control In Power Aa Power il a al E Digital Outputs Out Switch O BNCE BNC DBIS BPP he Eo Ta Tre Input Power Fuse 4Amp Mini ATO User Replaceable DC DC Converter pontine Output Power Fuse Output Power Fuse 2A 5V Mini ATO 1A 15V Mini ATO User Replaceable User Replaceable Locations of WBK17 s User Replaceable Fuses WBK17 pg 36 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module WBK17 Specifications General Power Consumption 520 mA 15V input 310 mA 25V Counter Module Time Base Accuracy 10 ppm 0 to 50 C input assuming no load on power output Input Power Range 10 to 30 VDC Input Power Fuse F201 4A Mini ATO user replaceable Power Output to Quadrature Encoder 5V 10 1000 mA and 15V 10 500 mA Output Power Connector Removable screw terminal block 15V Output Power to Encoder Fuse F1 1A Mini ATO user replaceable 5V Output Power to Encoder Fuse F2 2A Mini ATO user replaceable Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature 0 to 70 C Vibration MIL STD 810E Category 1 Humidity 0 to 95 RH non condensing Dimensions 285 mm W x
269. reading Scan Sequencer Simultaneous Sample and Hold Single ended mode Start of Scan Terminal Count Ticksize Trigger TTL Unipolar Data Acquisition In relation to the WBK17 a mapped channel is one of 16 signals that can get multiplexed into a channel s counter module The mapped channel can participate with the channel s input signal by gating the counter clearing the counter etc The 16 possible choices for the mapped channel are the 8 input signals post debounce and the 8 detection signals A device that collects signals from several inputs and outputs them on a single channel The value of a signal on a channel at an instant in time When triggered the ADC reads the channel and converts the sampled value into a 12 or 16 bit value The channels that are selected for sampling A programmable device that manages channels and channel specific settings An operation that gathers samples from multiple channels at the same instant and holds these values until all are sequentially converted to digital values The single ended mode measures a voltage between a signal line and a common reference that may be shared with other channels Also see differential mode In relation to the WBK17 start of scan is a signal that is internal to the WBK17 It signals the start of a scan group and therefore pulses once every scan period It can be used to clear the counters and latch the counter value into the acquisi
270. requency testing levels and temperature An example 100 mV g at a frequency of 100 Hz level 1 g at 72 F Note that although a sensor may have a typical sensitivity of 100 mV g its actual sensitivity could range from 95 to 105 mV g when checked under stated conditions Manufacturers usually provide sensor calibration values Transverse Sensitivity An accelerometer is designed to have one major axis of sensitivity usually perpendicular to the base and co linear with its major cylindrical axis The output caused by the motion perpendicular to the sensing axis is called transverse sensitivity This value varies with angle and frequency and typically is less than 5 of the basic sensitivity Base Strain Sensitivity An accelerometer s base strain sensitivity 1s the output caused by a deformation of the base due to bending in the mounting structure In measurements on large structures with low natural frequencies significant bending may occur Units with low base strain sensitivity should be selected Inserting a washer smaller in diameter than the accelerometer base under the base reduces contact surface area and can substantially reduce the effects of base strain Note that this technique lowers the usable upper frequency range Acoustic Sensitivity High level acoustic noise can induce outputs unrelated to vibration input In general the effect diminishes as the accelerometer mass increases Use of a light foam rubber boot may
271. rically isolate the input transducers from earth ground WBK18 pg 6 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module Software Setup General Depending on your application you will need to set several software parameters Proper settings will allow WaveView to organize data to meet your requirements Some items of importance to the WBK18 are the low pass and high pass filter options that can be selected from the WaveView Configuration main window and the excitation source and overrange detection parameters that can be chosen from the Module Configuration window The Module Configuration window can be accessed from the View pull down menu or by use of the first toolbar button located just below the File pull down menu Reference Note For detailed WaveView information refer to the WaveView Document PDF 15 x EE 4X 201 104 4 amp amp 0 1 Channel Configuration Current Source Level A men merr ft a TE M E e e E uto ero LPF HPF zi Module Type Ea Label Readings A Range er Clifset Made T LPF ont HE 1 WBK18 On CHOS 1 489 Y Fto 0 Bypass 200000 00 Dc 2 WwBK18 On CH10 5 ow to5 vE 0 Bypass 200000 00 DC Arn 3 WBK18 On CH11 I W to No 0 Bypass 200000 00 DC 4m 4 WaveView Configuration Window In the WaveView Configuration main window see figure the following columns are applicable to the WBK18 LPF Mode Click on a cell in the LPF Mode column to
272. rnet connectivity if your operating system is other than Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP WBK25 pg 4 919896 WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide STEP 1 Install the Software 1 Remove previous version Daq drivers if present You can do this through Microsoft s Add Remove Programs feature 2 Place the Data Acquisition CD into the CD ROM drive Wait for PC to auto run the CD This may take a few moments depending on your PC If the CD does not auto run use the Desktop s Start Run Browse feature to locate and run the CD s setup exe file 3 After the intro screen appears follow the screen prompts STEP 2 Determine the type of Network Connection To properly connect a WBK25 you must determine the type of network that it will become part of This is because the type of network used has a direct bearing on the IP address that will be assigned Briefly the four network types are as follows e Dedicated Network with a direct cable connection from the PC to the device e Dedicated Network making use of a network hub or switch e LAN with a DHCP Server Local Area Network with a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol e LAN with no DHCP Server Local Area Network with no Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dedicated Network with a direct cable connection from the PC to the device In this scenario the WBK25 is connected directly to an Ethernet jack on a host computer Ethernet Cable WB
273. rst glitch within a group but reject the subsequent glitches within the group if the debounce time is set accordingly The debounce time should be set to encompass one entire group of glitches as shown in the following diagram Debounce Time I I Input EE LL LLU Trigger Before Stable l Trigger After Stable Trigger after stable mode behaves more like a traditional debounce function rejecting glitches and only passing state transitions after a required period of stability Trigger after stable mode is used with electro mechanical devices like encoders and mechanical switches to reject switch bounce and disturbances due to a vibrating encoder that is not otherwise moving The debounce time should be set short enough to accept the desired input pulse but longer than the period of the undesired disturbance as shown in the diagram below Debounce Time i i Trigger Before Stable l Trigger After Stable 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Terms Applicable to Counter Modes The following terms and definitions are provided as an aid to understanding counter modes Detection Signal A detection signal is one of 8 outputs of the pattern detection module Each input channel has an associated detection signal Detect 1 for Channel 1 Detect 2 for Channel 2 etc A channel s detection signal will go active high when that channel s counter value meets the setpoint criteria programmed into the pattern detection mo
274. s Post Debourice Alls Detection mignials Period Mode An example One channel s acquired data might be 0 0 0 0 80 80 80 80 79 79 79 79 81 81 81 81 This data represents the number of ticksize intervals counted during the period measurement The first value s returned will be zero since the counters are cleared at the beginning of the acquisition The data comes in sets of four since the scan period is about one fourth as long as the input channel s period Every time the period measurement is latched from the counter the counter is immediately cleared and begins to count the time for the subsequent period If the scan period is a lot slower than the input period the acquired data will be missing some periods To obtain greater resolution you can increase the scan period or use an averaging option see OPT 1 0 The data returned is interpreted as time measured in ticks There are four timebase settings 20 ns 200 ns 2 us and 20 us These are often referred to as tick sizes The WBK17 uses a 50 MHz 10 ppm oscillator as a timing source PERIOD OPT 1 0 Determines the number of periods to time per measurement This makes it possible to average out jitter in the input waveform sampling error noise etc There are four options 1 The channel s measurement is latched every time one complete period has been observed 2 The channel s measurement is latched every time that 10 complete periods have been observed
275. s or when induced by an electrostatic field ESD energy can damage an integrated circuit IC so safe handling is required Some transducers e g strain gages thermistors and resistance temperature detectors RTDs require a known voltage or current Typically the variation of this signal through the transducer corresponds to the condition measured The degree to which an input signal is amplified or attenuated to allow greater accuracy and resolution can be expressed as lt n or dB In relation to the WBK17 any counter can be gated by the mapped channel When the mapped channel is high the counter will be allowed to count when the mapped channel is low the counter will not count but hold its value The arrangement or operation of a circuit so that signals from another circuit or device do not affect the isolated circuit In reference to data acquisition isolation usually refers to a separation of the direct link between the signal source and the analog to digital converter ADC Isolation is necessary when measuring high common mode voltage Some transducers produce a voltage in linear proportion to the condition measured Other transducers e g thermocouples have a nonlinear response To convert nonlinear signals into accurate readings requires software to calibrate several points in the range used and then interpolate values between these points 969597 Data Acquisition Mapped Channel Multiplexer MUX Sample
276. s channel inputs Latency 300ns Multi Channel Analog Trigger up to 72 channels Range Selectable per channel to input range Latency 2us channel plus 4us maximum TTL Trigger Input Signal Range 0 5V Input Characteristics TTL compatible with 10K ohm pull up resistor Input Protection Zener clamped 0 7 to 5V Latency 300ns Software Trigger Latency 100us typical Pulse Trigger Input Signal Range 0 5V Input Characteristics 75 ohms Input Protection 10V maximum Minimum Pulse Width 100ns Latency 300ns External Clock pg 4 WBK10A Connector Available on DB25 digital input Input Signal Range 5V TTL compatible Input Characteristics 50K ohms pull up to 5V in parallel with 50pF Input Protection Zener clamped 0 7 to 5V Delay 200ns Signal Slew Rate Requirement 20V us minimum Rate Up to 1MHz Divisor ratio Divide by 1 through 255 selectable Clock Counter Accuracy lt 0 02 error Clock Counter Range 0 01Hz to 100KHz 988397 WBK10A Analog Expansion Module Sequencer Operation Programmable for channel gain and for unipolar bipolar range in random order Depth 128 location Channel to Channel Rate 1 0 1 1us channel all channels equal Maximum Repeat Rate 1MHz Minimum Repeat Rate 100 seconds per scan Expansion Channel Sample Rate Same as on board channels High Speed Digital Inputs General Purpose Outputs Connector DB25 Female Configuration 16 TTL compatible pins selectable for input
277. s on the WaveBook 516E or WBK25 IG 2 WBK40 amp WBK41 967896 Installation Guide STEP 2 Connect the WBK40 or WBK41 to Power What you will need A power supply with a range of 10 VDC to 30 VDC The power supply needs to have a male DINS connector Note The switching mode power supply that is commonly used has an input range of 100 VAC to 240 VAC at 50 Hz to 60 Hz The power supply s output to the device is 15 VDC 2 7 amps via a DINS5 connector Note Various AC adapter models support power grids of USA Europe Japan and Asia Reference Note It is possible to use a VDC power source other than the commonly used switching mode power supply often referred to as an adapter However you should consult the Power Management Section of your WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 before doing so Dict EXPANSION PORT PARALLEL FORT f a a ee Nig DIN5 POWER IN Connector 10 to 30 VDC How to make the connection 1 Place the WBK40 or WBK41 power switch in the OFF 0 position if it is not already OFF 2 Connect the DINS end of the adapter s cable to the power in connector on the WBK40 or WBK41 see preceding figure If using a power source other than the adapter consult the Power Management Section of your WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 before doing so 3 Connect the adapter s plug to a standard AC outlet 4 If your adapter has a power switch position it to ON
278. s related to e Non uniform mechanical stresses set up in the accelerometer structure e A pyroelectric effect in piezoelectric materials an electrical charge is produced by the temperature gradient across the crystal This quasi static effect produces a low frequency voltage input to the MOSFET amplifier This voltage 1s usually well below the low frequency corner but the effect can reduce the peak clipping level and cause loss of data This effect does not affect the accelerometer s basic sensitivity or the data unless the thermal shift in the operation bias level results in clipping Where drastic thermal shifts are expected use 12 V bias models The effect s severity is related to the mass of the accelerometer In 100 mV g industrial units the effect is usually negligible Using rubber thermal boots can reduce the effect significantly WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896 WBK18 pg 19 Overload Recovery Recovery time from clipping due to over ranging is typically less than 1 ms Recoveries from quasi static overloads that generate high DC bias shifts are controlled by the accelerometer input RC time constant that is fixed during manufacture Connector This parameter specifies the connector type and size 4 48 6 40 10 32 coaxial etc and the location on the sensor that is top or side usually on the hex base Where there is no connector on the sensor an integral cable is specified with the length and the connector that is
279. saved calibration file will be recorded in the WAVEVIEW CFG default configuration file and will be loaded into WaveView whenever a new session is started The current configuration can also be saved from the toolbar or File menu item WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 29 2 Point Manual Calibration In the 2 Point Manual Calibration method two readings are taken from the gage with different loads applied for each reading For this method the user must enter the following 5 parameters Excitation The value of the constant voltage source used to excite the gage Max Load The maximum load value the gage is expected to measure This value could be less than the max rated load of the gage Quiescent Load The minimum load value the gage is expected to measure This value could be greater than the min rated load of the gage Point I Units The load that will be placed on the gage for the first calibration measurement Point 2 Units The load that will be placed on the gage for the second calibration measurement Example Excitation voltage is set to 10 volts A strain gage with a full load rating of 1000 ue is connected to a StrainBook or WBK16 channel However the gage will be used in an environment were the expected range of measurement is limited to 0 to 600 ue Two certified loads of 50 ue and 500 ue are available for calibration In the Calibration Parameters spreadsheet the user would enter the values as follows Excita
280. setpoint criteria is met The setpoint criteria could be a simple greater than limit forcing the counter to rollover on 1000 for example The following steps show how to set up a counter so that it will rollover on the count value of 1000 1 Configure Channel 1 as Encoder mode 1X option 16 bit counter Map channel clears the counter option set the Map channel to Detect 1 Select desired coupling low pass filtering comparator threshold and debounce 2 Configure Channel 2 as e Analog mode e Coupling OFF e LPF 30Hz e Comparator threshold 12 0V Tr If you want to observe the terminal count on pulsing high scan the Detect signals 3 Program a setpoint on channel 1 to be greater than 1000 This will take Detect 1 high whenever channel 1 s acquired counter data is greater than 1000 4 Take 10 000 scans at a scan rate of 2 kHz 5 Connect a 1kHz signal to channel 1 s input Make sure it meets the comparator threshold setting 6 Take the acquisition The counter on channel 1 will count up and rollover on the count of 1000 Since the pattern detection circuit works on data that is latched into the data stream the scan rate must be greater than the input edge rate If the scan rate is less than the input edge rate then the counter will actually count up beyond 1000 before the count value is sampled detected and then cleared back to zero It is important to realize that the Detect signals have the timing re
281. settings Reference Notes gt Encoder setups for WBK17 applications begin on page 22 of this document module gt Refer to the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 in regard to power expansion control and expansion signal connections gt When using WaveView you will need to set several parameters so WaveView can best meet your application requirements For software information refer to the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 Power Power In io the WBK17 The WBK17 can be powered by an included AC power adapter or from any 10 to 30 VDC source such as acar battery Check the WBK17 specifications for current requirements For portable or field applications the WBK17 and the WaveBook can be powered by the DBK30A Battery Module or the DBK34 UPS Battery Module Both devices contain rechargeable battery packs The WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 includes details Power Out io the Encoders The WBK17 provides output power of 5V at 1A and 15V at 500 mA to supply power to encoders Power connections from the WBK17 to up to 4 encoders are made on the snap in screw terminal block located on the WBK17 s front panel Example wiring diagrams for encoders begin on page 23 You must compute power consumption for your entire system You may need to use auxiliary or high current power supplies The WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 includes tables for calculating system power requirements and discusses power sup
282. should be selected Inserting a washer smaller in diameter than the accelerometer base under the base reduces contact surface area and can substantially reduce the effects of base strain Note that this technique lowers the usable upper frequency range Acoustic Sensitivity High level acoustic noise can induce outputs unrelated to vibration input In general the effect diminishes as the accelerometer mass increases Use of a light foam rubber boot may reduce this effect Frequency Response An accelerometer s frequency response is the ratio of the sensitivity measured at frequency f to the basic sensitivity measured at 100 Hz This response is usually obtained at a constant acceleration level typically l gor 10 g Convention defines the usable range of an accelerometer as the frequency band in which the sensitivity remains within 5 of the basic sensitivity Measurements can be made outside these limits if corrections are applied Care should be taken at higher frequencies because mounting conditions greatly affect the frequency range see Mounting Effects in upcoming text Dynamic Range The dynamic measurement range is the ratio of the maximum signal for a given distortion level to the minimum detectable signal for a given signal to noise ratio The dynamic range is determined by several factors such as sensitivity bias voltage level power supply voltage and noise floor Bias Level Under normal operation a bias voltage ap
283. sing the WBK40 DBK84 TC expansion module A total of 15 DBK84s can be attached Thermocouple Input Module to one WBK4O for a total TC channel capacity of 224 channels 14 channels via Mini T C Connectors The WBK41 attaches to any one of the three expansion ports on the WaveBook 516E or WBK25 and provides 14 thermocouple inputs 40 digital I O lines 4 counter inputs and 2 timer outputs The SEERE EEEE ETE Sn peepee WBK41 can also be supplied with an internal 4 channel 16 bit 100 kHz analog output option WBK41 The built in TC channels on the WBK41 are accessed via mini TC connectors on the front panel The counter timer functions and 16 Multi Function I O Module bits of digital I O are accessed via removable front panel screw 14 Thermocouple channels via Mini T C Connectors terminal connectors Additional digital I O and expansion connectors 40 Digital I O Lines are located at the rear of the WBK41 4 Counter Inputs 2 Timer Outputs Optional 4 Analog Channel Outputs The WBK41 can be easily expanded beyond its built in channel capacity A maximum WBK41 system can include up to 224 TC input channels 272 digital I O channels 4 analog output channels 4 counter input channels and 2 timer output channels WBK61 and WBK 2 are single channel high voltage adapters that can be used with the WaveBook or with a WBK10A expansion module In addition WBK61 and WBK62 can be used in conjunction with WBK11A WBK12A and WBK13A cards WBK61
284. solution of the scan period and that the pattern detection module only looks at acquired data not the actual counter value WBK17 pg 26 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Wiring for 3 Encoders The following figure illustrates single ended connections for three encoders For differential connections we would simply make A B and Z signal connections to the respective channel slots With three encoders it should be noted that there is no separate channel for a third set of Z Z signals thus in the following figure Encoder 3 has no Z signal The WBK17 can receive input from up to four encoders however the WaveView data acquisition program can accept input from only one or two encoders To receive input from three or four encoders with one WBK17 refer to the Programmer s Manual p n 1008 0901 15 VDC 5 VDC Encoder Power Power Out Terminal Block 15 VDC E GND Encoder 3 Counter Input Terminal Blocks Encoder 2 Encoder 1 WBK17 Partial Three Encoders with Single Ended Connections to WBK1I7 Connect three encoders to the WBK17 as shown in the table below Each signal A B can be connected as a single ended connection with respect to the common ground or as a true differential input All three encoders can draw their power from the power output connector Connect the encoder s power input to the 5V or 15V power connect the return to COM on t
285. t Debourice Alls Detection migznals Pulsewidth Mode An example one channel s acquired data might be 0 0 0 0 80 80 80 80 79 79 79 79 81 81 81 81 This data represents the number of ticksize intervals counted during the pulsewidth measurement The first value s returned will be zero since the counters are cleared at the beginning of the acquisition In this example the data comes in sets of four because the scan period is about one fourth as long as the input channel s period Every time the pulsewidth measurement is latched from the counter the counter is immediately cleared and enabled to count time for the next pulsewidth If the scan period is much slower than the input period then the acquisitions will miss some pulsewidths Decreasing the scan period will increase the number of different pulsewidths received The data returned is interpreted as time measured in ticks There are four timebase settings 20 ns 200 ns 2 us and 20 us These are often referred to as tick sizes The WBK17 uses a 50 MHz 10 ppm oscillator as a timing source If the input signal has a poor slew rate the pulsewidth mode will provide variant results dependant upon the comparator threshold PULSEWIDTH OPT2 Determines whether the pulsewidth is to be measured with a 16 bit Counter Low or 32 bit counter High counter Since pulsewidth measurements always have the stop at the top option enabled this option dictates whether the
286. t applies to all channels of the WBK18 unit being configured After channel enable and level selections are made the Apply button must be clicked to accept the changes Module Settings Channel Over range detection Percent Module Configuration Window When configuring overrange detection after channel enable and level selections are made the lt Apply gt button must be clicked to accept the changes WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896 WBK18 pg 13 WBK18 pg 14 Excitation Source In order to configure the excitation source click on the Configure Sine Wave Output button in the Module Configuration window This brings up a secondary window in which the excitation source is configured Do not confuse excitation source with the Source Level column in WaveView s main window Continuous Mode Continuous mode refers to a continuously running sine wave of the selected amplitude and frequency To configure select a frequency and amplitude and then click Start The selected output will begin and continue running until the lt Stop gt button is clicked or WaveView is terminated Note You can save output sine wave configuration files and open pre saved files as discussed in the upcoming section How to Save or Open Output Sine Wave Configuration Files page 17 Sweep Mode Sweep mode refers to a constant amplitude sine wave that is being swept in frequency from a selected start frequency to a selected
287. t power rating for 10 volt bridges If the excitation level is set to 5 volts drift is not a problem with our 120 ohm resistors An alternative is to purchase higher quality higher power and higher cost bridge completion resistors part number S 120 01 from the Measurement Group 2 Understand the difference between calibration and set up Calibration requires measurements of channels with external wiring and gages connected to establish computational data on which to base gain and offset settings The two point manual and shunt cal menu choices provide calibration Set up uses manually entered parameters to computationally choose gain and offset settings The two point automatic and nameplate menu choices provide channel set up The nameplate menu selection for strain gages cannot effectively calibrate field configured strain gage bridges which have not been externally hardware nulled because the software algorithm assumes the zero point and computes the other settings based on the excitation voltage gage factor and full scale value entered by the user Nameplate calibration is intended for packaged and pre calibrated devices such as load cells and pressure transducers with nameplates listing their output sensitivity in mV V and full scale output in engineering units 3 Do not attempt to calibrate all the channels simultaneously Although desirable it is not possible to globally calibrate all the channels without making any actu
288. t value of the load applied to the gage If no load is applied to the gage in its quiescent state enter O zero Point 2 Units The user supplied effective load value that will appear at the gage when the external shunt resistor is switched into place This load value must be calculated based on the value of the external shunt resistor As with the Internal Shunt method calibration accuracy is directly tied to the accuracy and stability of the shunt resistor used Name Plate Calibration Name Plate Calibration is similar to the 2 Point Auto Calibration method No actual measurements are taken during the calibration process The calibration constants are calculated from information provided by the user The method is called Name Plate because the calibration information is obtained from the Name Plate or Label that is attached to the gage or load cell The Name Plate Calibration method requires that the user enter the following 5 parameters Excitation The value of the constant voltage source used to excite the gage Sensitivity The output of the gage measured in millivolts per volt Full Rated Load The maximum rated load of the gage Max Load The maximum load value that the gage will be expected to measure This value could be less than the max rated load of the gage Quiescent Load The minimum or at rest value of the load applied to the gage If no load is applied to the gage in its quiescent state enter zero WaveView
289. ta Bit 4 Port C C3 igi P2 Digital Port C Bit 3 or P2 Expansion Data Bit 3 Port C C2 igi P2 Digital Port C Bit 2 or P2 Expansion Data Bit 2 Port C C1 igi P2 Digital Port C Bit 1 or P2 Expansion Data Bit 1 Port C CO Digital I O P2 Digital Port C Bit 0 or P2 Expansion Data Bit 0 Port A A7 Digital I O P2 Digital Port A Bit 7 Port A A6 Digital I O P2 Digital Port A Bit 6 Port A A5 Digital I O P2 Digital Port A Bit 5 Port A A4 Digital I O P2 Digital Port A Bit 4 Port A A3 Digital I O P2 Digital Port A Bit 3 Port A A2 Digital I O P2 Digital Port A Bit 2 Port A A1 Digital I O P2 Digital Port A Bit 1 Port A AO Digital I O P2 Digital Port A Bit 0 Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 27 Specifications WBK40 and WBK41 Power Supply Voltage Range 10 to 30 VDC Power Out from P1 15 VDC 500 mA via pin 21 15 VDC 500 mA via pin 2 5 VDC 1000 mA via pin 1 e Up to eight DBK84 options can be powered from the DB37 P1 connector e For applications with 9 to 15 DBK84 options a DBK32A must be added to the system e The WBK41 includes a Power Terminal Block on the front panel When used it draws from the total power available to P1 Fuses Input Power Fuse F201 4A MINI ATO user replaceable refer to page 23 for details 5V Power Output Fuse F1 2 5A resettable not user replaceable General Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C 32
290. te 1 Each DBK84 module requires a unique address setting as explained on page 13 pg 12 WBK40 amp WBK41 o 926896 Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules Setting Unique Channel Addresses for DBK84 Modules All DBK84 modules that are connected to WBK40 or WBK41 systems must have unique channel address settings Unlike the WBK40 and WBK41 which are internally pre set with an address of 0 each DBK amp 84 module requires that the address be set via DIP switches located on the front panel of that module CAUTION Adjustment of the channel address must only be performed when the system power is OFF Failure to do so may result in equipment damage DBK84 modules that are connected to a WBK40 or WBK41 must have their addresses physically set to a value between 1 and 15 inclusive Four micro switches on a DIP switch are used to set the module s channel address in binary Set a DBK 84 address as follows 1 Locate the DIP switch It is just to the right of the P1 connector 2 Ensure system power is OFF 3 Adjust the micro switches to set the desired address Refer to the following figure Address 0 is used by WBK40 and WBK41 and is not to be assigned to a DBK84 that is part of a WBK40 or WBK41 system Each connected DBK84 must have a unique address The following figure shows the complete range of switch settings xe a See Note 1 regarding Address 0 0 0 of r DN o es w ys
291. ted and communicated Overrange events do not stop an acquisition or alter data For related information refer to Overrange Detection on page 3 Lights when data is being converted Lights when the WBK18 has established communication via its Expansion Control In connector Lights when power to the unit is turned on and present WBK18 pg 4 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module Hardware Setup Configuration Power The WBK18 requires no physical hardware settings All WBK18 configurations are controlled by software Reference Note Setup information pertaining to power expansion control and expansion signal connections is contained in the chapter System Setup and Power Options in the WaveBook User s Manual It is possible to connect a WaveBook to the host computer s parallel port with either a 2 foot CA 35 2 or 6 foot CA 35 6 communication cable To minimize the amount of noise that is introduced to the WBK18 use of the 2 foot CA 35 2 cable with the WaveBook is recommended The WBK18 module can be powered by an AC power adapter or directly from any 10 to 30 VDC source such as a 12 V car battery For portable or field applications the WBK18 and the WaveBook can be powered by the DBK30A rechargeable battery module Reference Note For details regarding power refer to the chapter System Setup and Power Options in the WaveBook User s Manual As described in this referenced chapter it is poss
292. ted to the expansion ports of the WaveBook 516E or WBK25 e Finally power on the WaveBook 516E and or WBK25 devices An exception to this power up scheme is to power on the entire system at once Assembly The WBK18 has the same footprint as the WaveBook and other modules allowing for convenient mounting A fastener panel allows multiple units to be stacked vertically Screw on handles are available for portable applications For more assembly information see chapter 3 of the WaveBook User s Manual p n 489 0901 Input Connections All input connections are made into the front panel BNCs in which the BNC center conductor is the signal HI and the BNC shell is the signal LO The BNC shell is common among all eight input channels and is not isolated from earth ground Consequently the shell is not meant to be driven with respect to earth ground An additional consideration exists regarding the setup of the input transducer If the transducer case is effectively earth grounded through its connection to a device under test there exists the possibility for added measurement noise due to the ground loop that is created This issue is minimized by electrically isolating the transducer from the device CAUTION The BNC shell is not to be driven with respect to earth ground Attempting to do so could result in equipment damage Tr Additional measurement noise may be present when using earth grounded transducers For best results elect
293. ter Sensitivity The sensitivity of an accelerometer is defined as its output voltage per unit input of motion The unit of motion used is g One g is equal to the gravitational acceleration at the Earth s surface which is 32 2 ft sec sec or 981 cm sec sec The output is usually specified in millivolts per g mV g Sensitivity is usually specified under defined conditions such as frequency testing levels and temperature An example 100 mV g at a frequency of 100 Hz level 1 g at 72 F Note that although a sensor may have a typical sensitivity of 100 mV g its actual sensitivity could range from 95 to 105 mV g when checked under stated conditions Manufacturers usually provide sensor calibration values 988396 WBK14 Dynamic Signal Input Module Transverse Sensitivity An accelerometer is designed to have one major axis of sensitivity usually perpendicular to the base and co linear with its major cylindrical axis The output caused by the motion perpendicular to the sensing axis 1s called transverse sensitivity This value varies with angle and frequency and typically is less than 5 of the basic sensitivity Base Strain Sensitivity An accelerometer s base strain sensitivity 1s the output caused by a deformation of the base due to bending in the mounting structure In measurements on large structures with low natural frequencies significant bending may occur Units with low base strain sensitivity
294. th a range of 50 ps to 85 89 seconds ct 100 0 mSec dt 10 0 mSec x Burst configuration Add Edit Amp 10 0 Vpp er Freq 1000 00 Hz Reset Delete L 1000 00 Hz 500 00 Hz 2 500 00 Hz 2 3 999695 a eS eS eS a Se i a a a aes ca aa aa tol aa lt a at ue EE y ca a a a I ee ee 4 99992 Wrdiv l l l SS Ee SSS Se ee ne ee ee eS ES Ss SS SS ee ee Te es Ue Ses ce 0 000 ps 43 950 ms Example of Waveforms Created in the Custom Mode WBK18 pg 16 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module How to Save or Open Output Sine Wave Configuration Files Within all modes there is the ability to save and recall waveform configurations which is very beneficial for complex custom configurations Within WaveView this feature is accessed through File in the WBK18 Output Sine Wave Configuration Window To Save a Configuration 1 Click on File in the upper left corner of the screen 2 Click on the option labeled Save Waveform Configuration As 3 Name the file Note that it will have a dds extension 4 Save the file to the desired drive To Open a Configuration 1 Click on File in the upper left corner of the screen 2 Click on the option labeled Open Waveform Configuration 3 Open the desired file WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module 926896 WBK18 pg 17 Using Accelerometers Overview A low impedance piezoelectr
295. the cable capacitance and the ratio of the maximum peak signal voltage to the current available from the constant current source i Frequency Response to 5 of Maximum Output Signal Amplitude ae CO 2 185 kHz 37 kHz Where K f Maximum frequency in Hz K 3 45 x10 Kis the scale factor to convert Farads to picoFarads and Amperes to milliAmperes V and a factor to allow cable capacitance to charge to 95 of the final charge Icc Ib C Cable capacitance in picoFarads V Maximum peak measured voltage from sensor in volts Icc Constant current from current source in mA Ib Current required to bias the internal electronics typically 1 mA 988396 WBK14 Dynamic Signal Input Module WBK14 Specifications Name Function WBK14 8 Channel Dynamic Signal Conditioning Module Connectors BNC connector mates with expansion signal input on the WaveBook 512 512A 516 516A or 516E Two 15 pin connectors mate with expansion signal control on the WaveBook signals via 1 BNC per channel Channels 8 Gain Ranges x1 2 5 10 20 50 100 Power Consumption 15 Watts typical Input Power Range 10 to 30 VDC Operating Temperature 0 C to 50 C Storage Temperature 0 C to 70 C Dimensions 216 mm wide x 279 mm long x 35 mm high 8 5 x 11 x 1 375 Weight 1 32 kg 2 9 Ib ICP Current Source Output Impedance gt 1 0 MQ 20 kHz Compliance 27 V Current Levels 2 amp 4 mA Coupling AC 10 Hz High Pass Filter
296. the sensor calibration program will ask you 1f you want to save the calibration data The calibration is now complete To use the load cell exit the Sensor Calibration window and return to the main WaveView Configuration main window lt StrainBook616 WBK16 Sensor Configuration File calibration Password Sensor Configuration Calibration Date 7 E aan ate ii zE he ths CH Cal Sensor Bridge Type Type Calibration hethod Calibration Date Units Label Yes Load Cell Name Plate Nol ali nated Ibs doo io ie io im Sensor Label Volts Factor Example Load Cell 10 0 3 000 Calibration Parameters Channel Values Exc Gage Sensitivity Shunt Bridge Full Rated Resistor Resistor Load ri i Ohm Ohm Lirts 3000 0 Calibration View of window with scrollbar to the left StrainBook616 WBK16 Sensor Configuration File Calibration Password Sensor Configuration Calibration Date 7 e ate ii zE pe ths CH Cal Sensor Bridge Type Type 1 Yes Load Cell Name Plate Mot Calibrated Ibs No Strain Gage Full Bridge 2 Pt Me Moot E No St No No No No Calibration Kiethod Calibration Date Units Label 2 on e joo po Calibration Parameters Channel Values Full Rated Max Appl Quiescent Point Point Point 2 Point 2 Load Load Units Tare Units Units l m 5000 0 3000 0 0 0 Units imi Units Calib
297. ting and stopping an acquisition Stop acquisition can occur on a different channel than start acquisition stop acquisition can be triggered via modes 2 4 5 or 6 described below Pre trigger is supported with fixed or variable pre trigger periods 1 Single Channel Analog Hardware Trigger Any analog input channel can be software programmed as the analog trigger channel including any of the 224 TC expansion channels Input Signal Range 10 V to 10 V max Trigger Level Programmable 11 bit resolution Hysteresis Programmable 11 bit resolution Latency 5 us max 2 Single Channel Analog Software Trigger Any TC input channel including any of the 224 TC expansion channels can be selected as the software trigger channel Input Signal Range Anywhere within range of the selected trigger channel Trigger Level Programmable 16 bit resolution including window triggering Latency One scan period max 3 Single Channel Digital Trigger A separate digital input is provided for digital triggering Input Signal Range 15V to 15V Trigger Level TTL Minimum Pulse Width 50 ns high 50 ns low Latency 5 us max 4 Software Triggering Trigger can be initiated under program control 5 Digital Pattern Triggering 8 or 16 bit pattern triggering on any of the digital input ports Programmable for trigger on equal above below or within outside of a window Individual bits can be masked for don t care condition Latenc
298. ting another counter the counter for this channel does not need to go unused The WBK17 has the ability to measure the pulsewidth of an input and the time between any two edges on any two inputs The time ranges are similar to those shown for period mode except that averaging is not available The ranges given below reflect this Lower 16 bits of the 32 bit Counter Range S Ticksize nS Averaging Option l 20000 1m 100m 2000 Pulsewidth and Time Ranges for a 16 bit Value Sampling error is less than 0 2 Full 32 bit Counter lt 1 ppm Range S Ticksize nS Averaging Option WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Timing Mode This mode provides a means of measuring time between two subsequent events 1 e the edge of one channel with respect to the edge of another channel The edge selection is done in each channel s debounce setup Whenever the time measurement is latched from the counter the counter is immediately cleared and enabled for accepting the subsequent time period which starts with the next edge on the main channel Low Word High Word Increment Channel Input 20 nz 200ne 2000 ns 20000 ns To Werehooks16 Post Debource Gale All s Channel Inputs Post Debounce Mapped Cl l Alls Detection mignals Timing Mode An Example of Timing Mode The following example represents one channel in timing mode The time desired is between the rising edge on the input channel and the falling
299. tion 10V Max Load 600 Quiescent Load 0 Point 1 Units 50 Point 2 Units 500 1 When the lt Calibrate Enabled Channels gt toolbar button is pressed the user is prompted to load the gage with 50 ue 2 After the load is applied and the lt Ok gt button pressed Wave View takes several voltage readings in an attempt to find the best gain setting for the first load value 3 When finished the user is prompted to load the gage with 500 ue 4 After the load is applied and the lt Ok gt button pressed WaveView again takes several measurements to find the best gain settings for the second load value 5 After both voltage measurements are obtained WaveView configures the input channel to provide the optimum settings for the two amplifier gain stages and the Offset DAC WaveView also sets the channels mX b parameters for proper conversion of the input voltage measurements to units of ue or whatever units have been specified by the user Note The greatest accuracy is obtained from 2 Point Manual calibration when the two calibration points are at the min and max load range of the gage In the above example the greatest possible accuracy would be obtained if Point was equal to the Quiescent load and Point 2 was equal to the Max load 2 Point Auto Calibration For 2 Point Auto Calibration the user must enter the following 7 parameters Excitation This is the value of the constant voltage source used to excite the gage Max Lo
300. tion stream In relation to theWBK17 this signal is generated by the counter value There are only two possible values for the terminal count 65 535 for a 16 bit counter and 4 294 967 295 for a 32 bit counter The terminal count can be used to stop the counter from rolling over to zero In relation to theWBK17 the ticksize is a fundamental unit of time and has four possible settings 20ns 200ns 2000ns 20000ns For measurements that require a timebase reference like period or pulsewidth the ticksize is the basic unit of time The count value returned in the scan is the number of ticks that make up the time measurement An event to start a scan or mark an instant during an acquisition The event can be defined in various ways e g a TTL signal a specified voltage level in a monitored channel a button manually or mechanically engaged a software command etc Some applications may use pre and post triggers to gather data around an instant or based on signal counts Transistor Transistor Logic TTL is a circuit in which a multiple emitter transistor has replaced the multiple diode cluster of the diode transistor logic circuit typically used to communicate logic signals at 5 V A range of analog signals that is always zero or positive e g 0 to 10 V Evaluating a signal in the right range unipolar or bipolar allows greater resolution by using the full range of the corresponding digital value See bipolar 969597 Glossary G 3
301. tional change in bias voltage This voltage change will be coupled to the WBK18 input amplifier through the capacitor C The value of R and the internal capacitance of the piezoelectric crystal control the low frequency corner Units weighing only a few grams can provide high level outputs up to 1 V g with response to frequencies below 1 Hz Accelerometer Specification Parameters Noise in Accelerometers The noise floor or resolution specifies the lowest discernible amplitude minimum g that can be measured There are two main sources of noise as follows e Noise from the crystal and microcircuit inside the accelerometer Some types of crystals such as quartz are inherently noisier than others A good noise floor is 10 to 20 uV e Noise from electrical activity on the mounting surface Since the signal from the accelerometer is a voltage 60 Hz or other voltages ground loop etc can interfere with the signal The best protection is to electrically isolate the accelerometer WBK18 pg 18 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module Sensitivity The sensitivity of an accelerometer is defined as its output voltage per unit input of motion The unit of motion used is g One g is equal to the gravitational acceleration at the Earth s surface which is 32 2 ft sec sec or 981 cm sec sec The output is usually specified in millivolts per g mV g Sensitivity 1s usually specified under defined conditions such as f
302. to 122 F Storage Temperature 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Relative Humidity 0 to 95 non condensing Vibration MIL STD 810E System Connectors Analog Expansion P1 DB37 male connector on rear panel Digital Expansion P2 DB3 male connector on WBK41 rear panel P2 does not apply to WBK40 TC mV Connector Mini TC connectors WBK40 amp WBK41 Digital I O Power out Counter Timer DAC Removable Screw Terminal Blocks on front panel WBK41 only A factory installed DBK46 option is required for DAC outputs see page 17 Dimensions 285 mm W x 220 mm D x 70 mm H 11 x 8 5 x 2 70 Weight 1 6 kg 3 5 Ibs A D Specifications Type Successive approximation Resolution 16 bit Conversion Time 5 us Maximum Sample Rate 200 kHz Nonlinearity Integral 1 LSB Nonlinearity Differential No missing codes Thermocouple Inputs Functions TC types J K S T E B R N x100 voltage Inputs 14 differential TC mV inputs Input Voltage Range 100 mV Input Impedance 40M Ohm differential 20M Ohm single ended Input Bandwidth 4 Hz Input Bias Current 10 nA typical CMRR 100dB typical Maximum Working Voltage signal common mode 10V Over Voltage Protection 40V Voltage Accuracy 0 2 of reading 50 uV TC Accuracy See the following table Valid for one year 18 to 28 C Minimum Resolution 0 1 C for all TC types Note Specifications are subject to change without notice pg 28 WBK40 amp WBK41 o 926896
303. to 65535 ticks or 0 to 4 294 967 295 ticks Encoder Mode WBK17 pg 20 Introduction Rotary shaft encoders are frequently used with CNC equipment metal working machines packaging equipment elevators valve control systems and in a multitude of other applications in which rotary shafts are involved The encoder mode allows the WBK17 to make use of data from optical incremental quadrature encoders When in the encoder mode the WBK17 accepts either differential or single ended inputs and provides power for up to four encoders When reading phase A phase B and index Z signals the WBK17 provides positioning direction and velocity data The WBK17 can receive input from up to four encoders however the WaveView data acquisition program can accept input from only one or two encoders To receive input from three or four encoders with one WBK17 refer to the Programmer s Manual p n 1008 0901 The WBK17 supports quadrature encoders with a 16 bit Counter Low or a 32 bit Counter High counter 5 MHz frequency and x1 x2 and x4 count modes With only phase A and phase B signals 4 channels are supported with phase A phase B and index Z signals 2 channels are supported Quadrature encoders generally have 3 outputs A B and Z The A and B signals are pulse trains driven by an optical sensor inside the encoder As the encoder shaft rotates a laminated optical shield rotates inside the encoder The shield has three concentr
304. ts to a multi port Ethernet hub Performance under these conditions will be dependent on the PC s ability to handle multiple networks WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module User s Guide 919896 WBK25 pg 3 Connecting a WBK25 to the Ethernet Ethernet Cable Connecting a WBK25 to the Ethernet Introduction The WBK25 connects directly to an Ethernet port on a PC or network hub via the unit s built in 10 100BaseT Ethernet interface An Ethernet patch cable CA 242 1 5 foot or CA 242 7 7 foot cable is used to make the connection CAUTION Turn off power to the system devices and externally connected equipment before connecting cables Electric shock or damage to equipment can result even under low voltage conditions Take ESD precautions packaging proper handling grounded wrist strap etc Minimum System Requirements Reference Note Adobe PDF versions of user PC system with Pentium Processor manuals will automatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support The default location is in the Programs group RAM as follows which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop You can also access documents 32 Mbytes of RAM for Windows NT directly from the data acquisition CD via the 64 Mbytes of RAM for Windows 2000 lt View PDFs gt button located on the CD s 64 Mbytes of RAM for Windows XP opening screen Windows Operating System Contact the factory or your service representative in regard to Ethe
305. ture Uncertainty 75 ps max x1 2 5 10 20 50 and 100 Voltage Droop 1 mV ms max 0 01 mV ms typ Switched Capacitor Filter Cutoff Frequencies Range Maximum Signal Voltage 5 00 VDC x1 400 Hz to 100 kHz THD 65 dB 70 dB typ for WaveBook 512A Number of Cutoff Frequencies 1024 Number of Cutoff Frequencies Simultaneously Set Filter Grouping 4 channels each in 2 programmable two one for each 4 channel bank of inputs banks Weight 0 14 kg 0 3 Ib Low Pass Filter Software selectable 8 pole elliptic filter Low Pass Filter Type Software selectable elliptic or linear phase Software Selectable Cutoff Frequencies Frequencies e Input Voltage Ranges Before a scan sequence begins the input voltage ranges can be programmed via software The ranges can be expanded as follows Unipolar Unipolar applies to WBK 10A only O to 10 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 2 V 0 to 1 V 0 to 0 5 V 0 to 0 2 V 0 to 0 1 V Bipolar Bipolar applies to WaveBook 516 516A 516E 512A and WBK10A 10 to 10 V 5 to 5 V 2 to 2 V 1 to 1 V 0 5 to 0 5 V 0 2 to 0 2 V 0 1 to 0 1 V 05 to 05 V This range applies to WBK 10A only Programmable Gain Amplifier Gain Ranges x1 2 5 10 20 50 100 Programmable Low Pass Filter Cards 988396 WBK12A and WBK13A pg 3 Accuracy and Noise Specifications ee a eee Alone with a WBK12A or a WBK13A Note 3 Input Noise Voltage Accuracy Note 2 LSB rms Accuracy Note 2 Input Noise
306. uencies However thought must also be given to the sampling rate of the A D converter In general for alias considerations the sampling rate should be set as high as possible given the number of active channels being used Recall that the maximum sampling rate is 1 MHz n 1 where n is the number of active channels Because the sampling rate determines the frequency at which aliasing occurs it determines the input signal bandwidth for a given level of alias rejection This relationship is shown in the following example Example of channels 4 Alias rejection 70dB min The sampling rate Fs is chosen to be the maximum of 1 MHz 4 1 200 kHz The alias frequency is Fs 2 or 100 kHz Referring to the attenuation table to achieve a minimum of 70dB of alias rejection there must be at least a 2 8 ratio between Fyw and Fe For the Fy value of maximum value of Fc of 100 kHz 2 8 35 7 kHz The largest available 100 kHz this translates into a Fc value that satisfies this condition is 20 kHz The input signal bandwidth for this case is then 20 kHz 926896 WBK18 Dynamic Signal Input Module Using the 2 pole Filter and Bypass 2 pole Filter Mode For applications where the signal of interest is entirely AC in nature the low pass filter mode of 8 pole is the best choice Vibration signals coupled through an ICP accelerometer are an example of this However for applications where the DC component of the input signal is a
307. unwanted noise is far outside the desired bandwidth For example if the desired input bandwidth is only 0 to 10 kHz then the 20 kHz low pass filter will reduce unwanted noise components of 20 kHz by 3dB Unwanted noise of 200 kHz will be reduced by 23dB and noise components of 2 MHz will be reduced by 43dB Since the analog filters come before the comparator circuit and the expansion analog output path their effects will be observed at the comparator and in the analog waveform scanned by the WaveBook The analog expansion path going back to the WaveBook has a 450 kHz single pole filter WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 5 Comparator WBK17 pg 6 Each channel has its own individually programmable comparator as shown in the figure below The output of the filter stage feeds the comparator circuit The analog waveform that is present at the comparator is gain adjusted and then multiplexed onto the WaveBook s analog expansion port This allows the analog input waveform as it appears at the comparator post coupling post filter to be scanned like any other analog waveform The analog path going to the WaveBook is bandwidth limited to 450 kHz The analog path between the input and the comparator is not bandwidth limited unless a low pass filter is used 450 kHz LPF To Wavebook S16 Multiplexer From Filter Stage Comparator To Debounce Programmable Module Threshold Comparator The comparator has a programmable thresho
308. up the period the data returned will always be time measured in ticks The error in each data sample will come from two sources the sampling error caused by not being able to count a partial tick and the WBK17 s internal timebase inaccuracy The WBK17 s internal timebase has an absolute accuracy of 10ppm The sampling error will vary with input frequency selected ticksize and selected averaging mode The absolute error is the root sum of squares of the two independent error sources For example if the sampling error is 10ppm and the timebase accuracy is 10ppm the absolute accuracy 1s 14 1 ppm Many times the desired accuracy is much less than what the internal timebase is capable of Other applications will require a more accurate period measurement and the effects of sampling error will have to be averaged out leaving only the inaccuracy associated with the internal timebase Inaccuracy due to the internal timebase cannot be averaged out For period and frequency measurements percent sampling error is equal to 100 n 1 where n 0 to 65 535 for a 16 bit counter and n 0 to 4 294 967 295 for a 32 bit counter For small count values the sampling error is large and for large count values the sampling error is small If sampling error is to be less than 0 2 n must be greater than 499 regardless of counter size If sampling error is to be less than 0 001 10 ppm n must be greater than 99 999 which requires use of a 32 bit cou
309. user to take a single reading and display the values in the Sensor Configuration window Calibrate Enabled Channels This command will calibrate all enabled channels Password The sensor calibration application provides password protection If you calibrate any StrainBook channels or WBK16 expansion channels and then choose the password protection option WaveView will prevent other users from making changes to your calibration file The Password menu provides three functions Password Enter paeeivond Set a New Password Be leeip arsine change parameters Set a New Password This command allows the user to select a 4 7 character password A message box will prompt you to enter a new password Type a password and press enter or click on the OK button Clear Password This command clears the password protection A message box will prompt you to enter the current password Type the current password and press enter or click on the OK button WBK16 Strain Gage Module 949794 WBK16 pg 25 Calibration Parameters Tab Selected StrainBook616 J WBK16 Sensor Configuration Fie Calibration Password Sensor Configuration Sensor Label aH ae OL A E CH Call Sensor Bridge Calibration P Type Type Method Calibration Parameters Channel Values Esc Gage Sensitivity Shunt Bric Calibration Date Units Label Sensor Label Volts Factor Resistor Res rei sy Ohm Ot Yes Load Cell Name
310. ussed on page 15 The CN 115 1 User Configurable Plug In Card performs the same function as the CN 115 Header Plug in Option CN 115 1 is discussed on page 19 Low Pass Filter Customization Each StrainBook and WBK16 module has 68 KQ 4 resistor SIP networks installed at the factory These networks result in a 10 9 Hz cutoff for filter A and a 1092 Hz cutoff for filter B The 4 resistor SIP networks are socketed and can be altered to the range of values in the table below Individual resistors may also be used but should be matched within 2 Cutoff frequency accuracy is about 5 If you change the filter nominal values be sure to update the filter cutoff frequencies in the WaveView software This is discussed in the Chapter 4 section entitled Changing Low Pass Filter Displays Filter B Resistance Frequency Resistance Frequency Resistance Resistance Frequency in KQ in Hz in KQ in Hz in KQ in KQ in Hz 470 33 330 22 220 15 150 10 68 4 7 3 3 Frequency in Hz 100 8 2 9055 2 6 8 10919 1092 4 7 15798 109 47 158 f 8 P47 i58 33 225 1580 3 3 22500 Lower frequency filters such as the 10 Hz filter provided are generally used to reduce higher frequency noise Some common sources of noise are 50 60 Hz power line pickup on long cables electromagnetic interference EMI from nearby equipment unwanted vibrations in the strain gage system itself or at higher gains the intrinsic therm
311. ut EXC Positive excitation output only used on strain gage type modules Signal Connection Jacks per channel Input signals and excitation leads must be wired to the plug in terminal blocks Eight 4 terminal blocks accept up to 8 inputs Terminal blocks are connected internally to their corresponding signal conditioning module The terminal blocks accept up to 14 gage wire into quick connect screw terminals Each type of input signal or transducer such as a thermocouple or strain gage should be wired to its terminal block as shown in the figure below Wiring is shown for RTDs thermocouples 20mA circuits mV V connections and for full and half bridge strain gages SIGL SIGH os SQ S S D D S S S EXC Vin Vin EXC EXC Vin Vin EXC Thermocouple mV and V Connection Connection Y O o EXC Vin Vin EXC Full Bridge Strain Gage Connection Vin Vin D S gt Plug In Resistor EXC Vin Vin EXC ERA N i Half Bridge 4 20 mA n Board socke mE connecion Strain Gage Connection Connection Typical Signal Connections WBK15 5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module 988396 WBK 15 pg 3 Power Like the WaveBook WBK15 contains an internal power supply The unit can be powered by the included AC power adapter or any 10 to 30 VDC source such as a 12 V car battery For portable or field applications WBK15 and the WaveBook can be powered by the DBK30A rechargeable battery module or DBK34 vehicle UPS module The supply inp
312. ut is fully isolated from the measurement system If the fuse requires replacement it is a 2 A fuse Littelfuse 251002 Prior to daisy chaining from one module s power connector to another be sure to compute the power consumption for the entire system Some modules may need independent power adapters The WaveBook manual s chapter entitled System Setup and Power Options contains detailed information regarding power supply issues WARNING Shock Hazard Voltages above 50 Vrms AC and voltages above 100 VDC are considered hazardous Safety precautions are required when 5B modules are used in situations that require high voltage isolation from the rest of the system Failure to practice electrical safety precautions could lead to injury or death WBK 15 is specified for 1500 VDC isolation in a normal environment free from conductive pollutants and condensation The 1500 VDC rating requires a proper earth ground connection to the chassis and treatment of adjacent inputs as potentially hazardous CE marked units used in the European community are rated at 600 VDC isolation The 600 VDC CE isolation specification is based on a double insulation requirement and no earth ground is required Input cables must be rated for the isolation potential in use Line voltage ratings are much lower than the DC isolation values specified due to transients that occur on power lines Never open the lid unless all inputs with potentially hazardous voltages are
313. ut port byte an 8 bit mask byte and a control byte can be assigned to a channel When a set point has been programmed count value period pulsewidth position or velocity the two 16 bit values are compared in real time to the measured value for that channel When the comparison condition is met the output port is updated instantaneously Valid conditions include greater than value less than value inside the window and outside the window Since each set point has an 8 bit mask byte any or all of the digital output bits can be updated With 16 setpoints per channel complex updating schemes can be defined to meet the most demanding application requirements WBK17 pg 30 987996 WBK17 Counter Encoder Module Pattern Detection and Data Markers The WBK17 has a pattern detection feature that can be individually programmed for any of the 8 input channels The pattern detection feature allows up to 16 detection setpoints to be set on each channel Each detection setpoint can be programmed in several ways inside the window outside the window above setpoint below setpoint When a channel s setpoint criteria has been met a digital marker signal called the detect signal will go high The detect signals can also be part of the scan group and measured just like any other input channel allowing real time data analysis during an acquisition Each setpoint can also update the digital output port with a data byte and mask byte allowing real time contr
314. utputs DBK21 48 Line General Purpose Digital I O Card with screw terminals for signal outputs DBK23 24 Line Optically Isolated Digital Input Module DBK24 24 Line Optically Isolated Digital Output Module DBK25 8 Channel Relay Output Card DBK32A Auxiliary Power Supply Card DBK46 Analog Output 4 DACs This option if selected must be installed at the factory DBK84 14 Channel Thermocouple mV expansion module WaveBook 516E 16 bit 1 MHz sampling with built in 10 100BaseT Ethernet Interface WBK25 Ethernet Interface Module for WaveBook DaqBook WBK40 and WBK41 Additional cables and or accessories may apply depending on the WaveBook model and the WBK module s that are being used in the WBK40 based or WBK41 based data acquisition system Note Ordering information is subject to change without notice Thermocouple amp Multifunctional Modules 926896 WBK40 amp WBK41 pg 33 WBK40 amp WBK41 Installation Guide For connecting to a WaveBook 516E or to a WBK25 CHi CH2 cma CHa CHS CH5 GHY cHe CH10 CHII CHi CM3 His CHIS abel wy Che CHID Crit CHI2 CHI3 i4 CHin A vod on aa ami POWER coumen Tv Z 213 44 w Y ew lfe RAA Ad u 4 AT j ahd hai ghd Lo dain th dhii ag a ins Lad ani hi fi 1 SoM SN FSS ed Sh 2282 0 WBK40 WBK41 14 Channel Thermocouple Input Module Multi Function Thermocouple I O Module Front amp Rear Views Front amp Rear Views The following instructions pertain
315. veBook This distortion may have to be taken into account when setting the comparator threshold Many times the best way to accommodate unbalanced inputs is to AC couple and set the threshold at 0 00V This forces the comparator to trigger on the center of the waveform where the input has high slew and little noise An option is to DC couple and set the comparator threshold at the mid point of the transition If external pullup resistors are required they can be connected at the WBK17 s input terminal blocks A pullup resistor can be placed between any input channel and one of the two power supplies offered on the output power connector 5V and 15V Choose a pullup resistor value based on the encoder s output drive capability and the input impedance of the WBK17 Lower values of pullup resistors will cause less distortion but also cause the encoder s output driver to pull down with more current Although the WBK17 has a wide input dynamic range and good common mode rejection you should connect the encoder GND to the COM input when possible Analog Filtering Bypass 100 kHz Frat Coupling Stage To Comparator 30 Hz Analog Filter Each channel has a single pole low pass filter with three programmable cut off frequencies These are 100 kHz 20 kHz and 30 Hz Use analog filtering to reject low level noise that may otherwise interfere with the comparator The analog filters are most beneficial when the
316. vious figure For WBK62 set m to 20 see previous figure Reference Notes gt For detailed WaveView information refer to the WaveView Document Module The document can be accessed directly from the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button located on the CD s opening screen gt Ifyou intend to write your own computer programs refer to the Programmer s Manual p n 1008 0901 as needed Note that the API does not contain functions that are specific to WBK61 or WBK62 The document can be accessed directly from the data acquisition CD via the lt View PDFs gt button located on the CD s opening screen WBK61 and WBK 62 pg 4 988296 WBK61 and WBK 62 High Voltage Adapters WBK671 and WBK 62 Specifications Name Function WBK61 High Voltage Adapter with Probes 200 1 Voltage Divider WBK62 High Voltage Adapter with Probes 20 1 Voltage Divider Number of Channels 1 Dimensions 83 mm x 61 mm x 19 5 mm 3 25 x 2 375 x 0 77 Cables 60 leads with detachable probe tips and alligator clips Output Connector BNC female Voltage Divider WBK61 200 1 fixed WBK62 20 1 fixed Maximum Voltage WBK61 1000 Vpeak on either input reference to earth ground WBK62 100 Vpeak on either input reference to earth ground Maximum Differential Voltage WBK61 2000 Vpeak if neither input exceeds 1000 Vp rating to earth ground WBK62 200 Vpeak if neither input exceeds 100 Vp rating to earth ground Frequency Characteristi
317. will remain in compliance providing that the required conditions as stated on the associated product s Declaration of Conformity continue to be met Note that connecting a non CE Compliant DBK or WBK module or card to your system will make the system non compliant You may want to expand your WaveBook system while having it retain its status of CCE Compliant If so refer to the most recent Declaration of Conformity for each device prior to making any efforts to expand the system Fuse Replacement CAUTION Turn OFF the power to and UNPLUG the WBK40 or WBK41 module and all connected equipment Remove all signal I O lines from the unit Electric shock or damage to equipment can result even under low voltage conditions Take ESD precautions to include using a grounded wrist strap Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components Ensure boards do not come into contact with foreign elements such as oils water and industrial particulate You should only replace a fuse if your device shows no sign of damage If your device appears damaged such as evidenced by a smoked component contact the factory as soon as possible If the replacement fuse blows contact the factory as this indicates a problem may exist with your WBK40 or WBK41 module Each WBK40 and WBK41 module has one user replaceable fuse designated as F201 F201 Input Power Fuse 4 0 A MINI ATO This 4 amp fuse is located near the
318. wire quarter bridge configurations do not benefit from external remote sense connections The lead resistance is actually a balanced part of the bridge If the remote sense input is connected to the input on a quarter bridge the voltage is regulated across the bridge completion resistor This results in a constant current linearized quarter bridge otherwise quarter bridges are not perfectly linear Shunt Calibration Resistors StrainBooks and WBK 16s each provide three physical locations for internal shunt calibration resistors for each channel Each shunt resistor is switched in from the EXCITATION to the IN of the Instrumentation Amp by a FET switch to create a repeatable bridge imbalance Internal resistance of the circuit is about 1 KQ the exact amount is automatically accounted for in the software The software also allows selection of the three shunt resistors B D F An internal inversion stage insures correct polarity during the shunt calibration process which arm is shunted is therefore irrelevant Header positions Rb Rd Rf correspond to the software shunt resistor selections of B D F For any balanced bridge a resistance value can be placed in parallel with one element to create a predictable imbalance and output voltage This shunt resistance value can be calculated by the following equation where V 1s the differential output voltage of the gage Example Rshunt Roridge Arm V Excitation 4 V out 0 5
319. ws for real time data analysis WBK17 Counter Encoder Module 987996 WBK17 pg 25 Application Example 2 Using Encoder mode to implement Up Down Counters of any size The encoder mode does not have to be used exclusively with quadrature encoders The encoder mode can be used to implement a 16 or 32 bit counter that has direction control The encoder mode can also be used to force the counter to rollover on any value When an odd numbered channel 1 3 5 7 1s put in encoder mode the next higher channel 2 4 6 8 is automatically selected to be the direction control Therefore if channel 1 is in encoder mode channel 2 is the direction control Channel 1 s counter will count up at the edge rate coming in on channel 1 if channel 2 is low and channel 1 will count down if channel 2 is high If channel 1 s counter is required to decrement only then channel 2 can be forced high by software set the coupling mode to OFF and the comparator threshold to negative 12V Any input channel can be forced to a low or high simply by setting the coupling mode to OFF and setting the appropriate threshold level When a channel is turned OFF the input settles to 0 0V setting a positive threshold will force a low and setting a negative threshold will force a high Encoder mode allows the mapped channel to clear the counter If the mapped channel is programmed to be the detection signal for the counter then the counter will rollover to zero when the
320. y One scan period max 6 Counter Totalizer Triggering Counter totalizer inputs can trigger an acquisition User can select to trigger on a frequency or on total counts that are equal above below or within outside of a window Latency One scan period max Note Specifications are subject to change without notice pg 30 WBK40 amp WBK41 926896 Thermocouple and Multifunctional Modules Additional Specifications for WBK41 In addition to the preceding specifications the following apply to WBK41 They do not apply to WBK40 Power Out accessed from front panel Terminal Block connectors 15V 500 mA 15 VDC 500 mA 5VDC 1000 mA WBK41 includes a Power Terminal Block on the front panel When used it draws from the total power available to P1 The terminal block is not used to power DBK84 modules but is for general use Note that the P1 connector located on the rear panel supplies power to up to eight DBK84 modules For applications with 9 to 15 DBK84 options a DBK32A must be added to the system Analog Output accessed from Terminal Block Connectors if the optional DBK46 is installed Providing that the DBK46 factory install has been made four analog output channels can be updated synchronously relative to scanned inputs or clocked from either an internal onboard clock or an external clock source Analog outputs can also be updated asynchronously independent of any other scanning in the system Channels 4 DA

WBK Options User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents